RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference(RAN10.0_01)

RAN

10.0

Network Optimization Parameter Reference

Issue Draft

Date 2008-03-20

Part Number

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For anyassistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 Power Control Parameters........................................................................................................1-11.1 Uplink Power Control Parameters...................................................................................................................1-2

1.1.1 Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control Part.....................................................1-41.1.2 Constant for Calculating the PRACH Initial Transmit Power...............................................................1-51.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp Step.....................................................................................................................1-61.1.4 Maximum Number of Preamble Retransmission Attempts...................................................................1-71.1.5 Maximum Preamble Loop......................................................................................................................1-71.1.6 Default Constant of DPCCH Transmit Power.......................................................................................1-81.1.7 Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit Power..........................................................................................1-9

1.2 Downlink Power Control Parameters............................................................................................................1-101.2.1 Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link....................................................................1-121.2.2 Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link.....................................................................1-131.2.3 PCPICH Transmit Power.....................................................................................................................1-141.2.4 Maximum PCPICH Transmit Power....................................................................................................1-151.2.5 Minimum PCPICH Transmit Power....................................................................................................1-16

2 Handover Parameters................................................................................................................2-12.1 Intra-Frequency Handover Parameters............................................................................................................2-2

2.1.1 Switch of Softer Handover Combination Indication..............................................................................2-42.1.2 Soft Handover Relative Thresholds.......................................................................................................2-52.1.3 Soft Handover Absolute Thresholds......................................................................................................2-72.1.4 1F Event Blind Handover Trigger Condition.........................................................................................2-82.1.5 Hysteresis Related to Soft Handover.....................................................................................................2-92.1.6 Time to Trigger Related to Soft Handover...........................................................................................2-122.1.7 Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft Handover...................................................................................2-142.1.8 Parameters Related to Soft Handover Failure......................................................................................2-152.1.9 Affect 1A and 1B Event Threshold Flag..............................................................................................2-162.1.10 Neighboring Cell Individual Offset....................................................................................................2-172.1.11 Cell Individual Offset.........................................................................................................................2-18

2.2 Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Parameters..............................................................................2-182.2.1 Inter-Frequency Measurement Report Mode.......................................................................................2-232.2.2 Inter-Frequency Measurement Periodic Report Interval......................................................................2-25

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference Contents

Issue Draft (2008-03-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

i

2.2.3 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover................................................................................2-252.2.4 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard Handover...............................................................2-272.2.5 Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement....................................2-292.2.6 EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds...................................................2-312.2.7 Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-Frequency Coverage....................................................2-322.2.8 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-Frequency Handover.........................................2-342.2.9 Retry Period of 2B Event.....................................................................................................................2-352.2.10 Maximum Retry Times of 2B Event..................................................................................................2-352.2.11 Neighboring Cell Individual Offset....................................................................................................2-362.2.12 Cell Individual Offset.........................................................................................................................2-372.2.13 Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch................................................................................2-382.2.14 Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Measurement Threshold Choice........................................2-382.2.15 Inter-Frequency Measurement Timer Length....................................................................................2-392.2.16 Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Priority.........................................................................2-40

2.3 Non Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Management Parameters................................................2-412.3.1 Hysteresis of Event 2C.........................................................................................................................2-422.3.2 Time to Trigger for Event 2C...............................................................................................................2-432.3.3 Inter-Frequency Measure Target Frequency Trigger Ec/No Threshold...............................................2-442.3.4 Retry Period of 2C Event.....................................................................................................................2-442.3.5 Maximum Retry Times of 2C Event....................................................................................................2-452.3.6 Inter-Frequency Measurement Timer Length......................................................................................2-452.3.7 Hysteresis of Downlink RSCP QoS Frequency...................................................................................2-462.3.8 DownLink Qos Measurement Timer Length.......................................................................................2-472.3.9 UpLink Qos Measurement Timer Length............................................................................................2-48

2.4 Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters.................................................................2-492.4.1 Inter-RAT Measurement Report Mode................................................................................................2-542.4.2 Inter-RAT Periodical Report Interval...................................................................................................2-552.4.3 BSIC Verify Selection Switch..............................................................................................................2-562.4.4 Event 3A Measurement Quantity.........................................................................................................2-572.4.5 RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds.............................................................2-582.4.6 Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds............................................................2-592.4.7 Inter-RAT Handover Judging Thresholds............................................................................................2-602.4.8 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT Handover................................................................................2-612.4.9 Hysteresis Related to the Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover........................................................2-622.4.10 Time to Trigger for Verified GSM Cells...........................................................................................2-632.4.11 Time to Trigger for Non-Verified GSM Cells...................................................................................2-642.4.12 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RAT Handover...............................................2-652.4.13 Inter-RAT Measurement Timer Length.............................................................................................2-672.4.14 Retry Period of 3A Event...................................................................................................................2-682.4.15 Maximum Retry Times of 3A Event..................................................................................................2-682.4.16 Neighboring Cell Individual Offset....................................................................................................2-692.4.17 Cell Individual Offset.........................................................................................................................2-70

ContentsRAN


ii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue Draft (2008-03-20)

2.5 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters.........................................................2-702.5.1 Inter-RAT Service Handover Switch...................................................................................................2-732.5.2 Hysteresis of Event 3C.........................................................................................................................2-742.5.3 Time to Trigger for Event 3C...............................................................................................................2-752.5.4 BSIC Verify Selection Switch..............................................................................................................2-762.5.5 Non-Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Decision Thresholds.......................................................2-772.5.6 Maximum Number of Inter-RAT Handover Attempts........................................................................2-782.5.7 Inter-RAT Measurement Timer Length...............................................................................................2-792.5.8 Switch used to Send Load Information to 2G......................................................................................2-802.5.9 Switch for Non-Coverage Based Handover according to 2G Load Information.................................2-812.5.10 2G Load Threshold by Inter-Rat Handover in CS-Domain...............................................................2-812.5.11 2G Load Threshold by Inter-RAT Handover in PS-domain..............................................................2-822.5.12 Retry Period of 3C Event...................................................................................................................2-832.5.13 Maximum Retry Times of 3C Event..................................................................................................2-842.5.14 Measurement Quantity of 3A Frequency in QoS Handover..............................................................2-842.5.15 Hysteresis of Downlink RSCP QoS Frequency.................................................................................2-852.5.16 DownLink Qos Measurement Timer Length.....................................................................................2-862.5.17 UpLink Qos Measurement Timer Length..........................................................................................2-86

2.6 Blind Handover Management Parameters.....................................................................................................2-872.6.1 Blind Handover Flag............................................................................................................................2-882.6.2 Blind Handover Priority.......................................................................................................................2-892.6.3 Ec/N0 Threshold for Direct Retry........................................................................................................2-90

2.7 Cell Selection and Reselection Parameters...................................................................................................2-912.7.1 Measurement Hysteresis Parameters....................................................................................................2-932.7.2 Cell Reselection Offset.........................................................................................................................2-952.7.3 Minimum Quality Criterion.................................................................................................................2-962.7.4 Minimum Access Level.......................................................................................................................2-972.7.5 Cell Reselection Start Thresholds........................................................................................................2-972.7.6 Reselection Hysteresis Time................................................................................................................2-992.7.7 Minimum Access Level of Inter-RAT Cells......................................................................................2-1002.7.8 Signal Level Threshold for MS in 2G Idle Mode to Search for 3G Cells..........................................2-1012.7.9 Signal Level Offset for 3G Cell Reselection......................................................................................2-1022.7.10 Signal Level Threshold for 3G Cell Reselection.............................................................................2-102

2.8 Neighboring Cell Management Parameters................................................................................................2-1032.8.1 Neighboring Cell Priority Flag...........................................................................................................2-1032.8.2 Neighboring Cell Priority...................................................................................................................2-104

3 Admission Control Parameters................................................................................................3-13.1 Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE Services............................................................................3-63.2 Intelligent Admission Algorithm Switch........................................................................................................3-73.3 Uplink Total Equivalent User Number...........................................................................................................3-83.4 Downlink Total Equivalent User Number......................................................................................................3-93.5 AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation Service.............................................................................3-10



iii

3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation Service......................................................................3-113.7 AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversational Services.....................................................................3-123.8 Non-AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversational Services............................................................3-133.9 Uplink Threshold for Other Services............................................................................................................3-143.10 Downlink Admission Threshold of Other Services....................................................................................3-153.11 Uplink Handover Admission Threshold.....................................................................................................3-153.12 Downlink Handover Admission Threshold.................................................................................................3-173.13 Uplink Total Power Threshold....................................................................................................................3-183.14 Downlink Total Power Threshold...............................................................................................................3-183.15 Reserved SF of the Uplink Credit Resource for Handovers.......................................................................3-193.16 Reserved SF of the Downlink Credit Resource and Channel Code Resource for Handovers....................3-203.17 Resources Reserved for Common Channel Load.......................................................................................3-21

4 Load Control Parameters..........................................................................................................4-14.1 Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm Parameters.................................................................................................4-2

4.1.1 LDR Period Timer Length..................................................................................................................... 4-64.1.2 Uplink or Downlink LDR Trigger Threshold and Release Threshold...................................................4-74.1.3 Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions.........................................................................................................4-84.1.4 Number of Subscribers for Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions...........................................................4-104.1.5 Cell Load Space Threshold for Uplink or Downlink Inter-Frequency Handover................................4-134.1.6 Upper Threshold of Bandwidth for Uplink or Downlink Inter-frequency Cell Load Handover.........4-134.1.7 Cell SF Reserved Threshold.................................................................................................................4-144.1.8 Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved Threshold............................................................................4-154.1.9 LDR Code Priority Indicator................................................................................................................4-164.1.10 Code Congestion Select Inter-Frequency Indication..........................................................................4-174.1.11 Inter-Frequency Handover Code used Ratio Space Threshold..........................................................4-174.1.12 Gold User Load Control Switch.........................................................................................................4-184.1.13 MBMS Power Control Service Priority Threshold............................................................................4-19

4.2 Cell Overload Congestion Control Parameters.............................................................................................4-194.2.1 OLC Period Timer Length...................................................................................................................4-224.2.2 Uplink or Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and Release Threshold.................................................4-234.2.3 Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction Times..........................................................................4-244.2.4 Number of RABs Selected for the Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction.............................4-254.2.5 OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Timer Length and Recover Timer Length..................................4-264.2.6 OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Coefficient..................................................................................4-274.2.7 Number of RABs Released by the Uplink or Downlink Traffic Release............................................4-28

5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters.......................................................................................5-15.1 BE Service Related Threshold Parameters......................................................................................................5-2

5.1.1 BE Service Handover Rate Threshold................................................................................................... 5-45.1.2 Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured Rate...........................................................................................5-55.1.3 Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission Mode................................................................................... 5-6

5.2 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Traffic......................................................................5-75.2.1 Traffic Upper Threshold.........................................................................................................................5-9

ContentsRAN


iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd


5.2.2 Traffic Lower Threshold........................................................................................................................5-95.2.3 Time to Trigger Event 4A ...................................................................................................................5-105.2.4 Time to Trigger Event 4B ...................................................................................................................5-115.2.5 Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust Levels...........................................................................................5-125.2.6 Uplink or Downlink DCCC Rate Threshold........................................................................................5-135.2.7 Uplink or Downlink Middle Rate Calculate Method...........................................................................5-135.2.8 Uplink or Downlink DCCC Middle Rate.............................................................................................5-145.2.9 Low Activity Rate Threshold...............................................................................................................5-15

5.3 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Throughput............................................................5-155.3.1 HSUPA DCCC Strategy.......................................................................................................................5-165.3.2 HSUPA UpLink Rate Adjust Set.........................................................................................................5-175.3.3 Initial Rate of HSUPA BE Rraffic.......................................................................................................5-18

5.4 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Link Quality..........................................................5-195.4.1 Uplink Quality Measurement Switches................................................................................................5-215.4.2 Uplink Quality Transmit Power Measurement Threshold...................................................................5-225.4.3 Uplink Quality Block Error Rate Measurement Threshold..................................................................5-225.4.4 Downlink Quality Measurement Swithes............................................................................................5-235.4.5 Downlink Quality Code Transmit Power Measurement Threshold.....................................................5-245.4.6 Downlink Quality Downlink RLC Measurement Threshold...............................................................5-255.4.7 Uplink Full Coverage Rate...................................................................................................................5-255.4.8 Downlink Full Coverage Rate..............................................................................................................5-26

5.5 State Transition Parameters...........................................................................................................................5-275.5.1 FACH to DCH Traffic Report Threshold............................................................................................5-305.5.2 FACH to DCH Traffic Time to trigger................................................................................................5-315.5.3 DCH to FACH State Transition Timer................................................................................................5-325.5.4 DCH to FACH Traffic Report Threshold............................................................................................5-325.5.5 DCH to FACH Traffic Time to trigger................................................................................................5-335.5.6 FACH to PCH State Transition Timer.................................................................................................5-345.5.7 Cell Reselection Timer.........................................................................................................................5-34

5.6 PS Inactive.....................................................................................................................................................5-355.6.1 PS Inactive Timer.................................................................................................................................5-36

6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters.............................................................................................6-16.1 Cell Channel Power Distribution Parameters..................................................................................................6-2

6.1.1 Maximum Cell Transmit Power.............................................................................................................6-36.1.2 PCPICH Transmit Power.......................................................................................................................6-46.1.3 PSCH and SSCH Transmit Power.........................................................................................................6-56.1.4 BCH Transmit Power.............................................................................................................................6-66.1.5 Maximum FACH Transmit Power.........................................................................................................6-66.1.6 PCH Transmit Power.............................................................................................................................6-76.1.7 PICH Transmit Power............................................................................................................................6-86.1.8 AICH Transmit Power...........................................................................................................................6-9

6.2 Paging Parameters...........................................................................................................................................6-9



v

6.2.1 Paging Cycle Coefficient.....................................................................................................................6-106.2.2 Number of RNC Paging Repetitions....................................................................................................6-11

6.3 RRC Connection Setup Parameters...............................................................................................................6-126.3.1 T300 and N300.....................................................................................................................................6-13

6.4 Synchronization Parameters..........................................................................................................................6-136.4.1 Number of Successive In-Sync Indications.........................................................................................6-156.4.2 Number of Successive Out-of-Sync Indications..................................................................................6-166.4.3 Radio Link Failure Timer Duration.....................................................................................................6-166.4.4 T312 and N312.....................................................................................................................................6-176.4.5 N313, N315, and T313.........................................................................................................................6-18

6.5 Location Update Parameters.........................................................................................................................6-196.5.1 Periodical Location Update Timer.......................................................................................................6-19

6.6 User Priority Parameters...............................................................................................................................6-206.6.1 User Priorities Corresponding to Allocation or Retention Priority 1 to 14..........................................6-226.6.2 Intergated Priority Configuration Reference .......................................................................................6-236.6.3 Indication of Carrier Type Priority.......................................................................................................6-23

6.7 Bearer Channel Type Parameters..................................................................................................................6-246.7.1 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the VoIP...............................................................................6-266.7.2 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the IMS Signaling................................................................6-276.7.3 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the SRB................................................................................6-276.7.4 Flag of Effecting SrbChlType at the RRC Stage.................................................................................6-286.7.5 Downlink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSDPA............................................................................6-286.7.6 Downlink BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPA.......................................................................................6-296.7.7 Uplink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPA.................................................................................6-306.7.8 Uplink BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPA............................................................................................6-306.7.9 Uplink and Downlink BE Traffic Decision Threshold on DCH..........................................................6-316.7.10 Enhanced Switch of the IMS Signaling Bearer..................................................................................6-326.7.11 Initial Access Rate of the IMS Signalling..........................................................................................6-32

7 HSDPA Parameters....................................................................................................................7-17.1 HSDPA Power Resource Management Parameters........................................................................................7-2

7.1.1 HSPA Total Power and Measurement Power Offset Constant..............................................................7-27.1.2 F-DPCH Power Control Parameter........................................................................................................7-4

7.2 HSDPA Code Resource Management Parameters..........................................................................................7-67.2.1 HSDPA Code Resource Allocation Mode.............................................................................................7-87.2.2 Number of HS-PDSCH Codes...............................................................................................................7-87.2.3 Maximum Number of HS-PDSCH Codes............................................................................................. 7-97.2.4 Minimum Number of HS-PDSCH Codes..............................................................................................7-97.2.5 Number of HS-SCCH Codes................................................................................................................7-10

7.3 HSDPA Mobility Management Parameters..................................................................................................7-117.3.1 HSPA Handover Protection Length.....................................................................................................7-11

7.4 HSDPA Direct Retry and Channel Type Switch Parameters........................................................................7-137.4.1 D2H Retry Timer Length.....................................................................................................................7-14

ContentsRAN


vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd


7.4.2 Intra-Frequency Handover D2H Timer Length....................................................................................7-157.4.3 Inter-Frequency Handover D2H Timer Length....................................................................................7-157.4.4 Multi-Carrier Handover Timer Length.................................................................................................7-167.4.5 Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPA............................................................................7-17

7.5 HSDPA Admission Control Parameters.......................................................................................................7-177.5.1 Maximum HSDPA Users Per NodeB..................................................................................................7-197.5.2 Uplink HS-DPCCH Reserve Factor.....................................................................................................7-197.5.3 HSDPA Streaming PBR Threshold......................................................................................................7-207.5.4 HSDPA BE Service PBR Threshold....................................................................................................7-217.5.5 Maximum HSDPA User Number........................................................................................................7-21

8 HSUPA Parameters....................................................................................................................8-18.1 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm Parameters.......................................................................................8-2

8.1.1 Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor...................................................................................................8-28.1.2 Rate Threshold for HSUPA 2 ms TTI ...................................................................................................8-38.1.3 Threshold of Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power Ratio.........................................................8-4

8.2 HSUPA Admission Control Parameters.........................................................................................................8-48.2.1 Maximum HSUPA User Number..........................................................................................................8-68.2.2 HSUPA Non-Serveice Cell Interfere Factor..........................................................................................8-68.2.3 PBR satisfaction for HSUPA different priority users............................................................................8-78.2.4 Downlink HSUPA Reserved Factor.......................................................................................................8-88.2.5 Maximum HSUPA User Number Per NodeB........................................................................................8-8

8.3 HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control Parameters.............................................................................................8-98.3.1 HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control Switch.........................................................................................8-108.3.2 Target Number of E-DCH PDU Retransmission.................................................................................8-118.3.3 Target Value of E-DCH Residual BLER.............................................................................................8-11

9 MBMS Parameters.....................................................................................................................9-19.1 MBMS Admission and Preemption Algorithm Parameters............................................................................9-2

9.1.1 Maximum FACH Transmit Power.........................................................................................................9-49.1.2 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Highest Priority................................9-59.1.3 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Lowest Priority.................................9-69.1.4 MTCH Budget Power Resources...........................................................................................................9-69.1.5 MTCH Budget Code Resource..............................................................................................................9-79.1.6 MTCH Maximum Power.......................................................................................................................9-89.1.7 MTCH Maximum Code Resource.........................................................................................................9-99.1.8 Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing Power..................................................................................9-99.1.9 MBMS Service Preemption Algorithm Switch....................................................................................9-109.1.10 MBMS PTM Preempt Switch............................................................................................................9-119.1.11 MBMS Streaming PTM Preempt Switch...........................................................................................9-119.1.12 MBMS Non-Streaming PTM Preempt Switch...................................................................................9-12

9.2 FLC/FLD Algorithm Parameters..................................................................................................................9-139.2.1 FLC Algorithm Switch.........................................................................................................................9-149.2.2 MBMS Transmission Mode.................................................................................................................9-15



vii

9.2.3 Counting Threshold..............................................................................................................................9-169.2.4 PTP To PTM Offset.............................................................................................................................9-169.2.5 MBMS PTP RB Uplink Rate...............................................................................................................9-179.2.6 MBMS Neighboring Cell Indicator......................................................................................................9-18

10 Algorithm Switches...............................................................................................................10-110.1 Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in the RNC...............................................................................10-2

10.1.1 Channel Class Algorithm Switches....................................................................................................10-210.1.2 Handover Algorithm Switch..............................................................................................................10-910.1.3 Power Control Algorithm Switches.................................................................................................10-1510.1.4 HSPA Algorithm Switch..................................................................................................................10-1710.1.5 DRD Algorithm Switches................................................................................................................10-1810.1.6 SRNS Relocation Algorithm Switch................................................................................................10-1910.1.7 Compressed Mode Algorithm Switch..............................................................................................10-21

10.2 Cell Algorithm Switches...........................................................................................................................10-2210.2.1 Cell Class Algorithm Switches........................................................................................................10-2310.2.2 Uplink Admission Control Algorithm Switch.................................................................................10-2510.2.3 Downlink Admission Control Algorithm Switch.............................................................................10-26

10.3 Other Algorithm Switches.........................................................................................................................10-2710.3.1 NodeB credit admission Algorithm Switch.....................................................................................10-2710.3.2 Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm Switch....................................................................10-2810.3.3 Intra-Frequency Measurement Control Information Indication.......................................................10-2810.3.4 Inter-Frequency or Inter-RAT Measurement Indication..................................................................10-2910.3.5 FACH Measurement Indication.......................................................................................................10-30

11 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT............................................................................11-111.1 HSDPA Flow Control Parameters...............................................................................................................11-2

11.1.1 HSDPA Flow Control Switch............................................................................................................11-211.1.2 Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub Interface................................................................................11-311.1.3 Time Delay Threshold on Iub Interface.............................................................................................11-4

11.2 HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm Parameters.................................................................................11-511.2.1 Scheduling Method............................................................................................................................11-711.2.2 Resource Allocation Method..............................................................................................................11-811.2.3 HS-SCCH Power Control Method.....................................................................................................11-911.2.4 HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit Power............................................................................11-911.2.5 Resource Limiting Switch................................................................................................................11-1011.2.6 HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation Switch......................................................................................11-1111.2.7 Maximum Transmit Power of per HSDPA user..............................................................................11-1111.2.8 Resource limiting for different GBR................................................................................................11-12

11.3 HSDPA Based on SPI Algorithm Parameters...........................................................................................11-1311.3.1 SPI Initial Value...............................................................................................................................11-1411.3.2 SPI End Value..................................................................................................................................11-1511.3.3 Weight of SPI...................................................................................................................................11-1511.3.4 EPF Schedule Algorithm Switch......................................................................................................11-17

ContentsRAN


viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd


11.3.5 Flow Control Algorithm Switch.......................................................................................................11-1711.3.6 CQI Adjust Algorithm Switch..........................................................................................................11-1811.3.7 Residual BLER Target Value...........................................................................................................11-1811.3.8 Maximum Number of Retransmission Attempts.............................................................................11-19

11.4 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm Parameters.................................................................................11-2011.4.1 MAC-e Schedule Parameters Switch...............................................................................................11-2011.4.2 GBR Scheduling Switch...................................................................................................................11-21

11.5 HSUPA Power Control Parameters...........................................................................................................11-2111.5.1 Power Control Algorithm Switches for the Downlink Control Channel.........................................11-2211.5.2 Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters..........................................................................11-26

11.6 Local Cell Management Parameters..........................................................................................................11-3111.6.1 Cell Radius.......................................................................................................................................11-3111.6.2 Cell Handover Radius......................................................................................................................11-32



ix

Figures

Figure 7-1 Impact from over long HSPA protection length...............................................................................7-12

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference Figures


xi

Tables

Table 1-1 List of uplink power control parameters..............................................................................................1-2Table 1-2 List of downlink power control parameters.......................................................................................1-11Table 1-3 List of the maximum and minimum downlink transmit powers........................................................1-12Table 2-1 List of intra-frequency handover parameters.......................................................................................2-2Table 2-2 Typical values of HystFor1A.............................................................................................................2-11Table 2-3 Typical values of the hysteresis for the 1B event...............................................................................2-11Table 2-4 Typical values of the hysteresis for the 1C event...............................................................................2-11Table 2-5 Typical values of TrigTime1B and TrigTime1F................................................................................2-13Table 2-6 List of coverage-based inter-frequency handover parameters...........................................................2-18Table 2-7 Typical values of hystereses related to inter-frequency handovers....................................................2-26Table 2-8 Typical values of time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-frequency handovers..........................2-28Table 2-9 Thresholds (RSCP) for starting inter-frequency measurement for UEs moving in different speeds.............................................................................................................................................................................2-30Table 2-10 Thresholds (EcIo) for starting inter-frequency measurement for UEs moving in different speeds.............................................................................................................................................................................2-31Table 2-11 List of non-coverage-based inter-Frequency handover management parameters............................2-41Table 2-12 List of coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters............................................2-49Table 2-13 List of time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-RAT hard handovers.........................................2-62Table 2-14 List of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters.....................................2-71Table 2-15 List of blind handover management parameters..............................................................................2-87Table 2-16 List of blind handover priority sets..................................................................................................2-89Table 2-17 List of cell selection and reselection parameters..............................................................................2-91Table 2-18 List of neighboring cell management parameters..........................................................................2-103Table 3-1 List of admission control parameters...................................................................................................3-1Table 4-1 List of cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters...................................................................4-2Table 4-2 List of overload congestion control parameters.................................................................................4-20Table 5-1 List of BE service related threshold parameters...................................................................................5-2Table 5-2 List of dynamic channel configuration parameters..............................................................................5-7Table 5-3 List of DCCC parameters...................................................................................................................5-16Table 5-4 List of DCCC parameters...................................................................................................................5-19Table 5-5 List of state transition parameters......................................................................................................5-27Table 5-6 List of PS inactive parameters............................................................................................................5-35Table 6-1 List of cell channel power distribution parameters..............................................................................6-2Table 6-2 List of paging parameters...................................................................................................................6-10

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference Tables


xiii

Table 6-3 List of RRC connection setup parameters..........................................................................................6-12Table 6-4 List of synchronization parameters....................................................................................................6-14Table 6-5 List of location update parameters.....................................................................................................6-19Table 6-6 List of user priority parameters..........................................................................................................6-21Table 6-7 List of bearer channel type parameters.............................................................................................. 6-24Table 7-1 HSPA total power and measurement power offset constant................................................................7-2Table 7-2 List of F-DPCH parameters.................................................................................................................7-4Table 7-3 List of HSDPA code resource management parameters......................................................................7-7Table 7-4 List of HSDPA mobility management parameters.............................................................................7-11Table 7-5 List of HSDPA direct retry and channel type switch parameters...................................................... 7-13Table 7-6 List of admission control parameters.................................................................................................7-18Table 8-1 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters..................................................................8-2Table 8-2 List of HSUPA admission control parameters.....................................................................................8-5Table 8-3 List of HSUPA outer loop power control parameters..........................................................................8-9Table 9-1 List of MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters ............................................................9-2Table 9-2 List of FLC/FLD algorithm parameters.............................................................................................9-13Table 10-1 List of channel algorithm switches.................................................................................................. 10-3Table 10-2 List of handover algorithm switches................................................................................................10-9Table 10-3 List of power control switches.......................................................................................................10-15Table 10-4 List of HSPA algorithm switches...................................................................................................10-17Table 10-5 DRD algorithm switches................................................................................................................10-18Table 10-6 List of SRNS relocation algorithm switches..................................................................................10-20Table 10-7 List of compressed mode algorithm switches................................................................................10-22Table 10-8 List of cell algorithm switches.......................................................................................................10-23Table 10-9 NodeB credit admission algorithm switch.....................................................................................10-27Table 11-1 List of HSDPA flow control parameters..........................................................................................11-2Table 11-2 List of HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters.............................................................11-5Table 11-3 List of HSDPA SPI scheduling algorithm parameters...................................................................11-13Table 11-4 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters............................................................11-20Table 11-5 List of power control algorithm switches for the downlink control channel.................................11-22Table 11-6 List of fixed power control mode algorithm parameters................................................................11-27Table 11-7 List of local cell management parameters......................................................................................11-31

TablesRAN


xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd


About This Document

PurposeThis document describes the configurable parameters in network optimization and offers themeaning, value range, impact, and configuration command of each parameter.

NOTE

This guide offers not all but some of the network parameters.

Related VersionsThe following table lists the versions of the product described in the document.

Product Name Version

RNC V200R010

NodeB V200R010

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

l Network planners

l Field engineers

l System engineers

Update HistoryRefer to Changes in RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference.

Organization

1 Power Control Parameters

This describes power control parameters. Power control parameters are categorized into uplinkpower control parameters and downlink power control parameters.

2 Handover Parameters

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference About This Document


1

This describes handover parameters. Handover aims to ensure the communication continuityand quality. Handovers in WCDMA system are of the following types: soft handover, softerhandover, intra-frequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, inter-RAT hardhandover, and so on. Handover emerges as an important factor affecting network performance,and handover optimization is also significant in the network optimization. Handover parametersare classified according to handover classifications.

3 Admission Control Parameters

This describes the admission control parameters that can be modified by network planners.

4 Load Control Parameters

This describes the load control parameters that can be modified by network planners.

5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters

This describes the PS service rate control parameters: the service-related thresholds, DCCCparameters, link stability parameters, state transfer parameters, PS active parameters, and so on.

6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters

This describes the special topic parameters, including parameters for cell channel powerdistribution, paging, RRC connection setup, synchronization, and location updating.

7 HSDPA Parameters

This describes HSDPA parameters as follows: HSDPA power resource management parameters,HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters, HSDPA mobility managementparameters, HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters, and HSDPA calladmission control algorithm parameters.

8 HSUPA Parameters

This describes the HSUPA parameters: HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters,HSUPA power control parameters, and HSUPA admission control parameters.

9 MBMS Parameters

This describes MBMS parameters. MBMS parameters are MBMS admission parameters,MBMS preemption parameters, and FLC/FLD algorithm parameters.

10 Algorithm Switches

This describes the RNC algorithm Switches. In the RNC, algorithm switches are categorizedinto connection-oriented algorithm switches and cell-oriented algorithm switches.

11 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT

This describes the parameters that can be configured on the NodeB LMT: the HSDPA flowcontrol parameters, HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA MAC-escheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA power control parameters, and local cell managementparameters.

Conventions1. Symbol Conventions

The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows

About This DocumentRAN


2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd


Symbol Description

DANGERIndicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided,will result in death or serious injury.

WARNINGIndicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, ifnot avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performancedegradation, or unexpected results.

TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save yourtime.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

2. General Conventions

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files,directories,folders,and users are in boldface. Forexample,log in as user root .

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.

3. Command Conventions


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italic.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.

{x | y | ...} Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by verticalbars.One is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets andseparated by vertical bars.One or none is selected.

{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by verticalbars.A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference About This Document


3


[ x | y | ... ] * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by verticalbars.A minimum of zero or a maximum of all can be selected.

4. GUI Conventions


Boldface Buttons,menus,parameters,tabs,window,and dialog titles are inboldface. For example,click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs.For example,choose File > Create > Folder .

5. Keyboard Operation


Key Press the key.For example,press Enter and press Tab.

Key1+Key2 Press the keys concurrently.For example,pressing Ctrl+Alt+Ameans the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key1,Key2 Press the keys in turn.For example,pressing Alt,A means the twokeys should be pressed in turn.

6. Mouse Operation

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving thepointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quicklywithout moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointerto a certain position.

About This DocumentRAN


4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd


1 Power Control Parameters

About This Chapter

This describes power control parameters. Power control parameters are categorized into uplinkpower control parameters and downlink power control parameters.

1.1 Uplink Power Control ParametersThis describes the uplink power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.

1.2 Downlink Power Control ParametersThis describes the downlink power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 1 Power Control Parameters


1-1

1.1 Uplink Power Control ParametersThis describes the uplink power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.

Table 1-1 List of uplink power control parameters

SerialNo.

ID Meaning DefaultConfiguration

MML Command Level

1 PowerOffsetPpm

The parameter is theoffset between thepower of the lastaccess preamble andpower of themessage controlpart (the power ofthe message controlpart equals thepower of the accesspreamble plus thevalue ofPowerOffsetPpm)

Signaling: –3 dB;services: –2dB

Set: ADD PRACHTFCTo modifyPowerOffsetPpm,delete the PRACH, andthen reconfigure thetransport formatinformation set (TFCS)of the PRACH.

Cell

2 ConstantValue Constant value usedby a UE to calculatethe initial transmitpower of thePRACH on the basisof the open looppower

–20, namely–20 dB

Set: ADDPRACHBASICTo modifyConstantValue, deletethe PRACH, and thenreconfigure the transportformat information set(TFCS) of the PRACH.

Cell

3 PowerRampStep

Step of the powerincrease for thepreamble when aUE does not receivethe acquisitionindication (AI) fromthe NodeB

2, namely 2dB

4 PreambleRetransMax

Maximum numberof attempts ofretransmitting thepreamble in apreamble rampperiod

8

1 Power Control ParametersRAN


1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd


SerialNo.


MML Command Level

5 Mmax Maximum numberof preamble loops

8 Set: ADD RACHQuery: LST RACHModify: MOD RACH

Cell

6 DefaultConstantValue

Constant value usedto calculate theinitial TX power ofthe uplink DPCCH

–22, namely-22 dB

Set or modify: SET FRCQuery: LST FRC

RNC

7 MaxAllowedUlTxPowerMaxUlTxPowerForConvMaxUlTxPowerForStrMaxUlTxPowerForIntMaxUlTxPowerForBac

Maximum uplinkTX power of a UE

The defaultvalue is 24,namely 24dBm.

Use ADDCELLSELRESEL toset, LSTCELLSELRESEL toquery, and MODCELLSELRESEL tomodifyMaxAllowedUlTxPow-er.Use ADD CELLCACto set, use LSTCELLCAC to query,and use MODCELLCAC to modifyMaxULTxPowerFor-Conv,MaxUlTxPowerForStr, MaxULTxPowerFor-Int, andMaxULTxPowerFor-Bac.

Cell

1.1.1 Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control PartThis describes the power offset (PowerOffsetPpm) between the last access preamble and themessage control part. The power of the message control part equals the power of the accesspreamble plus the value of PowerOffsetPpm.

1.1.2 Constant for Calculating the PRACH Initial Transmit PowerThis describes the constant value used by a UE to calculate the initial transmit power of thePRACH on the basis of the open loop power.

1.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp Step



1-3

This describes the step of the power increase for the preamble when a UE does not receive theAcquisition Indication (AI) from the NodeB.

1.1.4 Maximum Number of Preamble Retransmission AttemptsThis describes the maximum number of attempts of retransmitting the preamble in a preambleramp period.

1.1.5 Maximum Preamble LoopThis describes the maximum number of random access preamble loops. When the UE hastransmitted the access preamble and the number of retransmission times has reachedPreambleRetransMax, it repeats the access attempt after the specified waiting time, if the UEstill has not received the capture indication. The maximum number of cycles cannot exceedMmax.

1.1.6 Default Constant of DPCCH Transmit PowerThis describes the default constant value (DefaultConstantValue) that is used by a UE in theopen loop power control process to calculate the power offset of the DPCCH(DPCCH_Power_offset) and accordingly calculate the initial transmit power of the uplinkDPCCH.

1.1.7 Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit PowerThis describes the maximum transmit power of the PRACH when a UE is trying to access adesignated cell. The parameter (MaxAllowedUlTxPower) equalsUE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH in the cell selection rule. In addition, there are another fourparameters indicating the maximum transmit power of UEs, and the four parameters are intendedfor different QoS services.

1.1.1 Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message ControlPart

This describes the power offset (PowerOffsetPpm) between the last access preamble and themessage control part. The power of the message control part equals the power of the accesspreamble plus the value of PowerOffsetPpm.

IDPowerOffsetPpm

Value Range–5 to 10

Physical Scope–5 dB to 10 dB, with the step of 1 dB

SettingIn signaling transmission mode, set PowerOffsetPpm to –3; in service transmission mode, setPowerOffsetPpm to –2.





Impact on the Network Performance

l If PowerOffsetPpm is excessively high, the signaling messages and service messages thatthe RACH bears may not be normally received by the UTRAN, and the uplink coveragemay be affected.

l If PowerOffsetPpm is excessively low, the uplink interference may increase, and theuplink capacity may be affected.

Related Commands

Use ADD PRACHTFC to set PowerOffsetPpm. To modify PowerOffsetPpm, use RMVPRACHTFC to delete the TFC of the PRACH, and then reconfigure the TFC of the PRACH.Before using RMV PRACHTFC, use DEA PRACH to deactivate the PRACH and DEACELL to deactivate the cells.

1.1.2 Constant for Calculating the PRACH Initial Transmit PowerThis describes the constant value used by a UE to calculate the initial transmit power of thePRACH on the basis of the open loop power.

ID

ConstantValue

Value Range

–35 to –10

Physical Scope

–35 dB to –10 dB, with the step of 1 dB

Setting

The default value of ConstantValue is –20, namely –20 dB.

The constant value is used by a UE in the random access process to calculate the initial transmitpower of the PRACH on the basis of the open loop power. The formula for calculating the initialtransmit power is as follows: Preamble_Initial_Power = Primary CPICH DL TX power-CPICH_RSCP + UL interference + Constant Value.

Where,

l Preamble_Initial_Power is the preamble initial transmit power;

l Primary CPICH DL TX power is the downlink transmit power of the PCPICH;

l CPICH_RSCP is the received signal code power of the PCPICH measured by UEs;

l UL_interference is the uplink interference, which is received by UEs from the BCH;

l Constant_Value is the constant value received by UEs from the BCH.



1-5


l If ConstantValue is excessively high, the initial transmit power becomes excessively high,and the period of the access process is shortened.

l If ConstantValue is excessively low, the transmit power during the access process canmeet the requirement, but the preamble needs to ramp for many times, and thus the periodof the access process increases.

Because the RACH has short periods of preamble power ramp and retransmission, the value ofConstantValue has a comparatively small impact on the system access performance.

Related Commands

Use ADD PRACHBASIC to set and MOD PRACHUUPARAS to modify ConstantValue.

1.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp StepThis describes the step of the power increase for the preamble when a UE does not receive theAcquisition Indication (AI) from the NodeB.

ID

PowerRampStep

Value Range

1 to 8

Physical Scope

1 dB to 8 dB, with the step of 1 dB

Setting

The default value of PowerRampStep is 2, namely 2 dBm.


l If PowerRampStep is excessively high, the access process is shortened, whereas the powercost may increase.

l If PowerRampStep is excessively low, the access process becomes longer, but the powercost is reduced.

In addition, the higher PowerRampStep is, the smaller impact ConstantValue has on thenetwork performance.

Related Commands

Use ADD PRACHBASIC to set, MOD PRACHUUPARAS to modify, and LST PRACH toquery PowerRampStep.





1.1.4 Maximum Number of Preamble Retransmission AttemptsThis describes the maximum number of attempts of retransmitting the preamble in a preambleramp period.

ID

PreambleRetransMax

Value Range

1 to 64

Physical Scope

1 to 64 attempts, with the step of 1 attempt

Setting

The default value of PreambleRetransMax is 8.

The product of PreambleRetransMax and 1.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp Step determines themaximum ramp power of the UE within a preamble ramp period.


l If PreambleRetransMax is excessively low, the preamble power cannot ramp to therequired value, and UEs cannot successfully access the network.

l If PreambleRetransMax is excessively high, some UEs may continuously increase thepower and repeatedly try to access the network, and thus other UEs are affected.

Related Commands

Use ADD PRACHBASIC to set, MOD PRACHUUPARAS to modify, and LST PRACH toquery PreambleRetransMax.

1.1.5 Maximum Preamble LoopThis describes the maximum number of random access preamble loops. When the UE hastransmitted the access preamble and the number of retransmission times has reachedPreambleRetransMax, it repeats the access attempt after the specified waiting time, if the UEstill has not received the capture indication. The maximum number of cycles cannot exceedMmax.

ID

Mmax

Value Range

1 to 32



1-7

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingThe default value is 8.

Impact on the Network Performancel If Mmax is excessively low, the UE access success rate is affected.

l If Mmax is excessively high, the UE probably tries the access attempt repeatedly within along time, which increases the uplink interference.

Related CommandsUse ADD RACH to set, LST RACH to query, and MOD RACH to modify Mmax.

1.1.6 Default Constant of DPCCH Transmit PowerThis describes the default constant value (DefaultConstantValue) that is used by a UE in theopen loop power control process to calculate the power offset of the DPCCH(DPCCH_Power_offset) and accordingly calculate the initial transmit power of the uplinkDPCCH.

IDDefaultConstantValue

Value Range-35 to -10

Physical Scope–35 dB to –10 dB, with the step of 1 dB

SettingThe default value of DefaultConstantValue is –22, namely –22 dB.

In 3GPP 25.331, the formula for calculating the initial transmit power of the DPCCH is asfollows:

DPCCH_Initial_power = DPCCH_Power_offset – CPICH_RSCP. Where, the value ofCPICH_RSCP is measured by UEs.

In 3GPP 25.331, the formula for calculating the initial transmit power of the PRACH or PCPCHpreamble is as follows:

Preamble_initial_Power = Primary CPICH DL TX Power – CPICH RSCP + UL Interference +Constant Value. Where, Primary CPICH DL TX Power (SIB5) and UL Interference (SIB7) arebroadcasted in system messages.





By comparison of the preceding formulas, you can find that DPCCH_Power_offset = PrimaryCPICH DL TX Power + UL Interference + Constant Value. Where, Constant Value equalsDefaultConstantValue, namely the target of the DPCCH preamble (Ec/N0_Target).Considering that the step of DPCCH_Power_offset is 2 dB, the accuracy ofDefaultConstantValue is not strictly required. The uplink synchronization, however, requiresa high value of DefaultConstantValue.

Impact on the Network Performancel If DefaultConstantValue is excessively low, the uplink synchronization at cell verges may

fail in the initial link setup process, and the uplink coverage is affected.l If DefaultConstantValue is excessively high, instantaneous interference may be caused

for the uplink reception.

Related CommandsUse SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query DefaultConstantValue.

1.1.7 Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit PowerThis describes the maximum transmit power of the PRACH when a UE is trying to access adesignated cell. The parameter (MaxAllowedUlTxPower) equalsUE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH in the cell selection rule. In addition, there are another fourparameters indicating the maximum transmit power of UEs, and the four parameters are intendedfor different QoS services.

IDMaxAllowedUlTxPower

MaxUlTxPowerForConv (maximum transmit power of the conversational service)

MaxUlTxPowerForStr (maximum transmit power of the streaming service)

MaxUlTxPowerForInt (maximum transmit power of the interactive service)

MaxUlTxPowerForBac (maximum transmit power of the background service)


Physical Scope–50 dBm to 33 dBm, with the step of 1 dBm

SettingThe default values of MaxAllowedUlTxPower, MaxUlTxPowerForConv,MaxUlTxPowerForStr, MaxUlTxPowerForInt, and MaxUlTxPowerForBac are 24, namely24 dBm.

If a cell is capacity-limited, the four parameters are not the factors that restrict the cell becausethe transmit power of UEs can be timely adjusted. If a cell is coverage-limited whereas needs



1-9

to provide full coverage, the formula related to the cell is as follows:

. According to the formula, you can infer that:

and Noiserise = Itotal/PN.

Where,l PUE,max represents the maximum transmit power of a UE.

l Lmax represents the maximum path loss.

l V represents the activation factor of a service.

l Gp represents the processing gain of a service. The formula is Gp = W/R (W represents thesignal bandwidth; R represents the data rate of a service.)

l Ga represents the antenna gain, which is the sum of the actual antenna gain and the cableloss gain.

l Gd represents the sum of diversity gains, such as the multi-path diversity gain and receiverantenna gain.

l PN represents the background noise.

l Eb/Io represents the target SIR value of a service.

For the services that do not require full cell coverage, you can also use the previous formula toestimate the transmit power of the UE that meets the special requirement for coverage area. Ifthe transmit power of a UE has reached the maximum, you can use the previous formula toestimate the uplink coverage scope.

Impact on Network PerformanceIf the coverage is restricted, the uplink coverage scope is affected if this parameter is set to anexcessively small value.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST CELLSELRESEL to query, and MODCELLSELRESEL to modify MaxAllowedUlTxPower.

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyMaxULTxPowerForConv, MaxUlTxPowerForStr, MaxULTxPowerForInt, andMaxULTxPowerForBac.

1.2 Downlink Power Control ParametersThis describes the downlink power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.





Table 1-2 List of downlink power control parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 RlMaxDlPwr

Maximum transmitpower of theDPDCH. It relativeto the maximumtransmit power ofthe CPICH.

Refer to Listof themaximumandminimumdownlinktransmitpowers

Set: ADDCELLRLPWRQuery: LSTCELLRLPWRModify: MODCELLRLPWR

Cell

2 RlMinDlPwr

Minimum transmitpower of theDPDCH. It isrelative to theminimum transmitpower of theCPICH.

3 PCPICHPower

Power of theprimary CPICH of acell. The referencepoint of theparameter is the topof the NodeBcabinet.

330, namely330 dBm.

Set: ADD PCPICHQuery: LST PCPICHModify: MOD CELL

4 MaxPCPICHPower

Maximum transmitpower of theprimary CPICH of acell

346, namely34.6 dBm.

Set: ADD PCPICHQuery: LST PCPICHModify: MODPCPICHPWR

5 MinPCPICHPower

Minimum transmitpower of theprimary CPICH of acell

313, namely31.3 dBm.

1.2.1 Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio LinkThis describes the maximum transmit power of the DPDCH, which is relative to the maximumtransmit power of the CPICH.

1.2.2 Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio LinkThis describes the minimum transmit power of the DPDCH, which is relative to the minimumtransmit power of the CPICH.

1.2.3 PCPICH Transmit Power



1-11

This describes the power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point of the parameteris the antenna connector of NodeB, and the value of the parameter is related to the downlinkcoverage in the network planning.

1.2.4 Maximum PCPICH Transmit PowerThis describes the maximum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference pointof the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB, and the value of the parameter is related tothe downlink coverage in the network planning.

1.2.5 Minimum PCPICH Transmit PowerThis describes the minimum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference pointof the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB and the value of the parameter is related tothe downlink coverage in the network planning.

1.2.1 Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio LinkThis describes the maximum transmit power of the DPDCH, which is relative to the maximumtransmit power of the CPICH.

ID

RlMaxDlPwr

Value Range

–350 to 150

Physical Scope

–35 dB to 15 dB, with the step of 0.1 dB

Setting

The service type and service rate need to be considered for the configuration of RlMaxDlPwr.The values configured for single services are listed in Table 1-3.

Table 1-3 List of the maximum and minimum downlink transmit powers

Service Type Max. Downlink TransmitPower (in the parentheses isthe dB value)

Min. Downlink TransmitPower (in the parentheses isthe dB value)

CS

12.2K AMR -30 (-3) –180 (–18)

64K transparent data 30 (3) –150 (–15)

56K transparent data 0 (0) –150 (–15)

32K transparent data –20 (–2) –170 (–17)

28.8K transparentdata

–20 (–2) –170 (–17)





Service Type Max. Downlink TransmitPower (in the parentheses isthe dB value)

Min. Downlink TransmitPower (in the parentheses isthe dB value)

57.6K controllablestream

–10 (–1) –160 (–16)

PS

0 stream(unidirectional)

–20 (–2) –170 (–17)

384K 40 (4) –110 (–11)

256K 20 (2) –130 (–13)

144K 0 (0) –150 (–15)

128K 0 (0) –150 (–15)

64K -20 (-2) –170 (–17)

32K –40 (–4) –190 (–19)

16K –60 (–6) –210 (–21)

8K –80 (–8) –230 (–23)

For combined services, the maximum and minimum transmit power is computed by the RNCaccording to the configuration of individual services.

Impact on the Network Performancel If RlMaxDlPwr is excessively high, downlink interference may occur.

l If RlMaxDlPwr is excessively low, the downlink power control may be affected.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLRLPWR to set, LST CELLRLPWR to query, and MOD CELLRLPWR tomodify RlMaxDlPwr.

1.2.2 Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio LinkThis describes the minimum transmit power of the DPDCH, which is relative to the minimumtransmit power of the CPICH.

IDRlMinDlPwr




1-13

Physical Scope–35 dB to 15 dB, with the step of 0.1 dB

SettingRefer to List of the maximum and minimum downlink transmit powers.

The value of RlMinDlPwr varies according to the specific services and is related to the valueof Maxmum DL Tx Power and dynamic scope of power. Their relation is shown in thefollowing formula:

Minimum DL Tx Power = Maximum DL Tx Power - Dynamic scope of power control

Where, the dynamic scope of power control can be set to 15 dB.

Impact on the Network Performancel If RlMinDlPwr is excessively low, the transmit power may become excessively low

because of incorrect estimation of SIR.l If RlMinDlPwr is excessively high, the downlink power control may be affected.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLRLPWR to set, LST CELLRLPWR to query, and MOD CELLRLPWR tomodify RlMinDlPwr.

1.2.3 PCPICH Transmit PowerThis describes the power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point of the parameteris the antenna connector of NodeB, and the value of the parameter is related to the downlinkcoverage in the network planning.

IDPCPICHPower


Physical Scope–10 dBm to 50 dBm, with the step of 0.1 dBm

SettingThe default value of PCPICHPower is 330, namely 33 dBm.

For a cell with large coverage, PCPICHPower should be set to a comparatively high value; fora cell with small coverage, PCPICHPower should be set to a comparatively low value. In aplanned multi-cell environment, the minimum value of PCPICHPower is definite. If the valueof PCPICHPower is lower than the allowed minimum value, coverage holes may occur whenthe cells are under heavy load.






l If PCPICHPower is excessively low, the downlink pilot coverage range is directlyaffected.

l If PCPICHPower is excessively high, the downlink interference increases and the transmitpower allocated to the service is reduced, and thus the downlink capacity is affected.

In addition, the configuration of PCPICHPower also has direct influence on the distribution ofhandover areas.

Related Commands

Use ADD PCPICH to set, LST PCPICH to query, and MOD CELL to modifyPCPICHPower.

1.2.4 Maximum PCPICH Transmit PowerThis describes the maximum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference pointof the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB, and the value of the parameter is related tothe downlink coverage in the network planning.

ID

MaxPCPICHPower

Value Range

–100 to 500

Physical Scope

–10 dBm to 50 dBm, with the step of 0.1 dBm

Setting

The default value of MaxPCPICHPower is 346, namely 34.6 dBm.

When setting MaxPCPICHPower, consider some factors of the actual system environment,such as the cell coverage scope (radius), geographic environment, and total power of the cell.When the ratio of soft handover areas keeps the same, the downlink coverage cannot be promotedby the increase of PCIPCH power.


MaxPCPICHPower is the upper limit for the transmit power of the PCPICH. When modifyingMaxPCPICHPower, ensure that MaxPCPICHPower is always higher than the actually neededtransmit power of the PCPICH.

Related Commands

Use ADD PCPICH to set, LST PCPICH to query, and MOD PCPICHPWR to modifyMaxPCPICHPower.



1-15

1.2.5 Minimum PCPICH Transmit PowerThis describes the minimum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference pointof the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB and the value of the parameter is related tothe downlink coverage in the network planning.

IDMinPCPICHPower


Physical Scope–10 dBm to 50 dBm, with the step of 0.1 dBm

SettingThe default value of MinPCPICHPower is 313, namely 31.3 dBm.

When setting MinPCPICHPower, consider some factors of the actual system environment,such as the cell coverage scope (radius) and geographic environment. If MinPCPICHPower isexcessively small, the cell coverage is affected. Ensure that MinPCPICHPower is set underthe condition of a proper proportion of soft handover area, or under the condition that no coveragehole exists.

Impact on the Network PerformanceMaxPCPICHPower is the lower limit for the transmit power of the PCPICH. When modifyingMinPCPICHPower, ensure that MinPCPICHPower is always lower than the actually neededtransmit power of the PCPICH.

Related CommandsUse ADD PCPICH to set, LST PCPICH to query, and MOD PCPICHPWR to modifyMinPCPICHPower.





2 Handover Parameters

About This Chapter

This describes handover parameters. Handover aims to ensure the communication continuityand quality. Handovers in WCDMA system are of the following types: soft handover, softerhandover, intra-frequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, inter-RAT hardhandover, and so on. Handover emerges as an important factor affecting network performance,and handover optimization is also significant in the network optimization. Handover parametersare classified according to handover classifications.

2.1 Intra-Frequency Handover ParametersThe common configurable intra-frequency handover parameters are listed here.

2.2 Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover ParametersThe common configurable coverage-based inter-frequency handover parameters are listed here.

2.3 Non Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Management ParametersThe common configurable non-coverage-based inter-Frequency handover managementparameters are listed here.

2.4 Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management ParametersThis describes the coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters.

2.5 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management ParametersThe common configurable non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parametersare listed here.

2.6 Blind Handover Management ParametersThis describes the blink handover management parameters.

2.7 Cell Selection and Reselection ParametersThis describes the cell selection and reselection parameters.

2.8 Neighboring Cell Management ParametersThis describes the neighboring cell management parameters.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 2 Handover Parameters


2-1

2.1 Intra-Frequency Handover ParametersThe common configurable intra-frequency handover parameters are listed here.

Table 2-1 List of intra-frequency handover parameters

No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 DivCtrlField Softer handovercombinationindication switch

MAY Set or modify: SETHOCOMMQuery: LSTHOCOMM

RNC

2 IntraRelThdFor1APSIntraRelThdFor1ACSVPIntraRelThdFor1ACSNVPIntraRelThdFor1BPSIntraRelThdFor1BCSVPIntraRelThdFor1BCSNVP

Soft handoverrelative thresholdsfor event 1A andevent 1B

1A: 6 (3dB)1B: 12 (6dB)

For RNCSet or modify: SETINTRAFREQHOQuery: LSTINTRAFREQHOFor CellSet: ADDCELLINTRAFREQHOQuery: LSTCELLINTRAFREQHOModify: MODCELLINTRAFREQHO

RNC/Cell

3 IntraAblThdFor1FEcNoIntraAblThdFor1FRSCP

Soft handoverabsolute thresholdsfor event 1F

EcNo: -24dBRSCP:-115 dBm

4 BlindHORSCP1FThreshold

1F event blindhandover triggercondition

-115 dBm

5 HystFor1AHystFor1BHystFor1CHystFor1DHystFor1FHystFor1J

Hysteresis related tosoft handover forevents 1A, 1B, 1C,1D, 1F and 1J

1A and1B: 0 (0dB)1C/1D/1F/1J: 8 (4dB)

2 Handover ParametersRAN




No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

6 TrigTime1ATrigTime1BTrigTime1CTrigTime1DTrigTime1FTrigTime1J

Time-to-Triggerparameters related tosoft handover forevents 1A, 1B, 1C,1D, 1F and 1J

1A: D320(320 ms)1B/1C/1D/1F/1J:D640 (640ms)

7 SHOQualmin Minimum qualitythreshold of softhandover

-24 dB

8 ShoFailPeriodShoFailNumForDwnGrdRelThdForDwnGrdDcccShoPenaltyTime

Parameters relatedto soft handoverfailure

ShoFailPeriod: 60(60 s)ShoFailNumForDwnGrd: 3RelThdForDwnGrd:2 (1 dB)DcccShoPenaltyTime: 30 (30 s)

Set or modify: SETINTRAFREQHOQuery: LSTINTRAFREQHO

RNC

9 CellsForbidden1ACellsForbidden1B

Affect 1A and 1Bthreshold flag

AFFECT Set: ADDINTRAFREQNCELLQuery: LSTINTRAFREQNCELLModify: MODINTRAFREQNCELL

NCell

10 CIOOffset Neighboring cellindividual offset

0

11 CIO Cell individualoffset

0 Set:ADDCELLSETUPModify: MODCELLSETUP

Cell

2.1.1 Switch of Softer Handover Combination IndicationThis describes the indication that indicates whether the NodeB implements the softercombination of radio links in soft handovers.

2.1.2 Soft Handover Relative ThresholdsThese parameters define the difference between the quality of a cell (evaluated with the Ec/Noof PCPICH at present) and the comprehensive quality of the active set (the best cell quality incase that W=0).



2-3

2.1.3 Soft Handover Absolute ThresholdsThis describes the soft handover absolute thresholds. The soft handover absolute thresholdscorrespond to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic service QoS. The absolutethresholds of soft handovers are IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo correspond to Ec/No andIntraAblThdFor1FRSCP correspond to RSCP.

2.1.4 1F Event Blind Handover Trigger ConditionThis describes the threshold of triggering blind handover by 1F event.

2.1.5 Hysteresis Related to Soft HandoverThis describes the hysteresis values of the 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1F and 1J events.

2.1.6 Time to Trigger Related to Soft HandoverThis describes the trigger delay time of the 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1F, and 1J events.

2.1.7 Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft HandoverThis describes the minimum quality threshold of soft handover. When the RNC receives events1A, 1C and 1D, the target cell can be added to the active set only when CPICH Ec/Io of thetarget cell is higher than this absolute threshold.

2.1.8 Parameters Related to Soft Handover FailureThis describes the parameters related to soft handover failure including maximum evaluationperiod of soft handover failure, threshold of soft handover failure times, relative threshold forimmediate slowdown upon soft handover failure, and penalty time for slowdown soft handover.

2.1.9 Affect 1A and 1B Event Threshold FlagThis describes the flags CellsForbidden1A and CellsForbidden1B. The flags determinewhether the relative thresholds of the 1A and 1B events are affected.

2.1.10 Neighboring Cell Individual OffsetThis describes the neighboring cell offset for intra-frequency handovers.

2.1.11 Cell Individual OffsetThis describes the cell offset for intra-frequency handovers.

2.1.1 Switch of Softer Handover Combination IndicationThis describes the indication that indicates whether the NodeB implements the softercombination of radio links in soft handovers.

ID

DivCtrlField

Value Range

MAY, MUST, MUST_NOT

Physical Scope

l Softer combination may be implemented.

l Softer combination must be implemented.

l Softer combination must not be implemented.





SettingThe default value is MAY.

There are two combination methods for uplink combination of soft handover: one is themaximum ratio combination at the NodeB Rake receiver, which gives the highest combinationgain; the other is the selective combination at the RNC, which gives a relatively smallercombination gain.

The default value of the indication switch is MAY, which means that the NodeB decides whetherto implement maximum ratio combination according to its own physical conditions.

l When MUST is selected, the NodeB is forced to carry out maximum ratio combinationwhich is usually used in tests.

l When MUST_NOT is selected, the NodeB is forbidden to carry out maximum ratiocombination, and this method is adopted when maximum ratio combination performanceof softer handover is poor.

Consider the working status (test/normal operation) and the propagation environment whendeciding whether to implement softer combination and to adopt which kind of softercombination.

Impact on the Network PerformanceNone.

Related CommandsUse SET HOCOMM to set and LST HOCOMM to query DivCtrlField.

2.1.2 Soft Handover Relative ThresholdsThese parameters define the difference between the quality of a cell (evaluated with the Ec/Noof PCPICH at present) and the comprehensive quality of the active set (the best cell quality incase that W=0).

Parameter IDIntraRelThdFor1APS

IntraRelThdFor1ACSVP

IntraRelThdFor1ACSNVP

IntraRelThdFor1BPS

IntraRelThdFor1BCSVP

IntraRelThdFor1BCSNVP

Value Range0 to 29

Physical Value Range0 to 14.5 dB, step 0.5 dB



2-5

Parameter Setting

l The default values of IntraRelThdFor1APS, IntraRelThdFor1ACSVP andIntraRelThdFor1ACSNVP are 6, namely 3 dB.

l The default values of IntraRelThdFor1BPS, IntraRelThdFor1BCSVP andIntraRelThdFor1BCSNVP are 12, namely 6 dB.

As specified in Protocol 25.331, when CPICH Ec/No value is adopted as the measurementquantity, the following formula is adopted for the event 1A trigger decision:

Where,

l MNew is the measurement quantity of the cell that enters the report range;

l CIONew is the offset of this cell;

l Mi is the measurement quantity of the cells in the active set;

l NA is the number of cells in the current active set;

l MBest is the measurement quantity of the best cell in the active set;

l W is the weighting value which is used for weighting the comprehensive quality of the bestcell and the active set;

l R1a is report range, namely the relative threshold for soft handover;

l H1a is the hysteresis value of event 1A.

The following event is taken as the trigger condition of event 1B:

Where,

l MOld is the measurement quantity of the cell that leaves the report range;

l CIOOld is the offset of this cell;

l Mi is the measurement quantity of the cells in the active set;

l NA is the number of cells in the current active set;

l MBest is the measurement quantity of the best cell in the active set;

l W is the weighting value used for weighing the comprehensive quality of the best cell andthe active set;

l R1b is report range, namely the relative threshold for soft handover;

l H1b is the hysteresis value of event 1B.

The selection of a relative threshold for handover corresponds directly to the soft handoverproportion, and it should ensure the trouble-free implementation of smoothing handover.






The parameter setting determines the size of the soft handover area and the user proportioninvolved in soft handover.

l If the thresholds are high, the target cell joins the active set more easily, call drop occursmore difficultly, and the UE proportion in the state of soft handover increases, but theforward resources are seriously occupied.

l If the thresholds are low, the target cell joins the active set more difficultly, thecommunication quality cannot be guaranteed, and the implementation of smoothinghandover is affected.

Relevant Commands

For RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SETINTRAFREQHO, and query them through LST INTRAFREQHO.

For cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: add them through ADDCELLINTRAFREQHO, query them through LST CELLINTRAFREQHO, and modifythem through MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO.

2.1.3 Soft Handover Absolute ThresholdsThis describes the soft handover absolute thresholds. The soft handover absolute thresholdscorrespond to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic service QoS. The absolutethresholds of soft handovers are IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo correspond to Ec/No andIntraAblThdFor1FRSCP correspond to RSCP.

ID

IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo

IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP

Value Range

IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo: –24 to 0

IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP: –155 to 25

Physical Scope

IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo: –24 dB to 0 dB, with the step of 1 dB

IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP: –155 dBm to 25 dBm, with the step of 1 dBm

Setting

The default value of IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo is –24, namely –24 dB.

The default value of IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP is –115, namely –115 dBm.

Event 1F: The measurement quantity of the best cell's PCPICH is lower than the absolutethreshold.



2-7

These values are the absolute thresholds used for 1F reports in the soft handover algorithm,corresponding to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic service QoS and affectingthe triggering of event 1F.

The 1F event is used to trigger emergency blind handover. If the best cell of the active set reportsthe 1F event, you can infer that the active set quality is rather poor, and a blind handover istriggered at this moment to make the final attempt before call drops.

The emergency blind handover needs to be triggered on special occasions. The on-sitemeasurement needs to be implemented to know the range of the pilot strength of the best cell atthe areas where blind handovers need to be triggered. The emergency blind handover functionis usually not needed, so the absolute thresholds are set to the minimum value by default, namelythat emergency blind handovers are not triggered.


The higher the absolute thresholds are, the more easily blind handovers are triggered, and viceversa. In practice, adjust the thresholds according to the handover policy and network coverage.

Related Commands

For the RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters:

Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query the soft handoverabsolute thresholds.

For the cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters:

Use ADD CELLINTRAFREQHO to add, LST CELLINTRAFREQHO to query, and MODCELLINTRAFREQHO to modify the soft handover absolute thresholds.

2.1.4 1F Event Blind Handover Trigger ConditionThis describes the threshold of triggering blind handover by 1F event.

Parameter ID

BlindHORSCP1FThreshold

Value Range

-155 to 25

Physical Value Range

-155 dBm to 25 dBm, step 1 dBm

Parameter Setting

The default value is -115 dBm.






That parameter is used to judge whether to perform the blind handover. The smaller the value,the greater the probability of the blind handover. An extremely small value, however, may leadto handover failure due to very low quality requirements.

Relevant Commands

For RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SETINTRAFREQHO, and query them through LST INTRAFREQHO.

For cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: add them through ADDCELLINTRAFREQHO, query them through LST CELLINTRAFREQHO, and modifythem through MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO.

2.1.5 Hysteresis Related to Soft HandoverThis describes the hysteresis values of the 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1F and 1J events.

ID

HystFor1A

HystFor1B

HystFor1C

HystFor1D

HystFor1F

HystFor1J

Value Range

0 to 15

Physical Scope

0 dB to 7.5 dB, with the step of 0.5 dB

Setting

The default values of events 1A and 1B hysteresis parameters are 0 (0 dB). The default valuesof other events are 8 (4 dB).

Event 1C: cell replacement in the active set.

Event 1D: For a cell in the active set, event 1D means that the best cell is modified; for a cell inthe monitored set, event 1D means that the cell is added into the active set and the best cell ismodified.

1. Event 1A:



2-9

,

,

The first formula is used to trigger 1A, and the second one is used to cancel 1A. Therefore,the hysteresis range is the signal fluctuation range under usual conditions, or the fluctuationrange of the slow fading under the same condition.

2. Event 1B:

The first formula is used to trigger 1B, and the second one is used to cancel 1B.

3. Event 1C:

MNew ≥ MInAS + H1c/2

MNew ≤ MInAS - H1c/2

The value of HystFor1C ranges from 3 dB to 5 dB. Because 1C is triggered when the activeset size reaches the maximum value, the delay of handover at this time does not lead to badresult. The signaling interaction caused by the ping-pong effect should be minimized in theparameter configuration, the parameter can be increased appropriately in the adjustment.

4. Event 1D:

MNotBest ≥ MBest + H1d/2

The event cancellation formula has not been given in the protocol. According to thecancellation definitions of other events, the 1D cancellation definition can be deduced asfollows:

MNotBest ≤ MBest - H1d/2

The value of HystFor1D ranges from 3 dB to 5 dB. Because all the handover policies arebased on the best cell and the change of the best cell usually leads to the update of themeasurement control, the ping-pong change and mis-decision should be minimized inreports of event 1D. The parameter can be increased appropriately in the adjustment.

5. Event 1F:

MNew ≤ T1f - H1f/2

MNew ≥ M1f + H1f/2

The value of HystFor1F ranges from 3 dB to 5 dB. The value of HystFor1F is usually thesame as HystFor1B.

Table 2-2 lists the recommended values of HystFor1A for different moving speeds of UE.





Table 2-2 Typical values of HystFor1A

Speed (km/h) Range Recommended Value

5 6 to 10 (3 dB to 5 dB) 10 (5 dB)

50 4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB) 6 (3 dB)

120 2 to 6 (1 dB to 3 dB) 2 (1 dB)

Typicalconfiguration

4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB) 6 (3 dB)

Table 2-3 lists the recommended values of HystFor1B for different moving speeds of UE.

Table 2-3 Typical values of the hysteresis for the 1B event


5 6 to 10 (3 dB to 5 dB) 10 (5 dB)

50 4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB) 8 (4 dB)

120 2 to 6 (1 dB to 3 dB) 2 (1 dB)


4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB) 8 (4 dB)

Table 2-4 lists the recommended values of HystFor1C for different moving speeds of UE.

Table 2-4 Typical values of the hysteresis for the 1C event


5 6 to 10 (3 dB to 5 dB) 10 (5 dB)

50 4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB) 8 (4 dB)

120 2 to 6 (1 dB to 3 dB) 4 (2 dB)


4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB) 8 (4 dB)

Table 2-4 lists the recommended values of HystFor1D for different moving speeds of UE.

Table 2-3 lists the recommended values of HystFor1F for different moving speeds of UE.

The value of HystFor1F ranges from 2 dB to 5 dB. Event 1A means that cells are added to theactive set, so it is a critical event. To guarantee timely handovers for 1A, the hysteresis for 1Acan be set to be smaller than the hystereses for 1B, 1C, 1D, and 1F. There cannot be a bigdifference between hystereses for different events, or the proportion of soft handovers is affected.When adjusting the hysteresis, consider the filtering factors and delay triggering.



2-11

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf a hysteresis increases, the soft handover scope is reduced for the UEs in the soft handoverarea while increased for the UEs outside the soft handover area. If the number of UEs in the softhandover area equals that of UEs outside the soft handover area, the change of a hysteresis hasno impact on the actual proportion of soft handovers. The higher the hysteresis is, the strongerthe signal fluctuation resistance capability is, the more ping-pong effect is suppressed, however,the more slowly the handover algorithm responds to signal changes.

Related CommandsFor the RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters:

Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query the hysteresis relatedto soft handovers.


Use ADD CELLINTRAFREQHO to add, LST CELLINTRAFREQHO to query, and MODCELLINTRAFREQHO to modify the hysteresis related to soft handovers.

2.1.6 Time to Trigger Related to Soft HandoverThis describes the trigger delay time of the 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1F, and 1J events.

IDTrigTime1A

TrigTime1B

TrigTime1C

TrigTime1D

TrigTime1F

TrigTime1J

Value RangeEnum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640, D1280,D2560, D5000)

Working range: Enum (D0, D200, D240, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)

Physical ScopeEnum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms

SettingThe default value for 1A is D320 (320 ms), and the default values for other events are D640(640 ms).

The time-to-trigger mechanism is mainly used:





l To reduce the number of wrong event reports caused by burst signals.

l To suppress ping-pong handover to some degree.

l To reduce the influence of shadow fading on event decisions.

The hysteresis can effectively reduce the average number of handovers and mis-decisions andavoid unnecessary handovers. 3GPP TS25.133 V3.6.0 prescribes that the intra-frequencymeasurement physical layer updates the measurement result once every 200 ms, so the time totrigger shorter than 200 ms is invalid. The time-to-trigger parameter should be close to a multipleof 200 ms.

UEs with different moving speeds vary in their responses to the event delay trigger value. UEsmoving in a high speed are sensitive to the time-to-trigger value, while UEs moving in a slowspeed are slow to the time-to-trigger value and cause fewer ping-pong handovers and wronghandovers. Therefore, the time-to-trigger parameter can be set to a comparatively low value forthe cells where most UEs are moving in a high speed, and can be set to a comparatively highvalue for the cells where most UEs are moving in a slow speed.

Different events require different values of the time-to-trigger parameter:l The event (1A) of adding cells to the active set requires a comparatively short delay;

l The events of replacing cells in the active set (1C and 1D) require relatively fewer ping-pong handovers and wrong handovers and have no big impact on the call drop rate, andtherefore TrigTime1C and TrigTime1D can be set to comparatively high values;

l The events of deleting cells in the active set (1B and 1F) require fewer ping-pong handovers,so the initial settings of TrigTime1B can be the same as TrigTime1A and can be adjustedaccording to the actual network statistics.

Table 2-5 lists the recommended value ranges of TrigTime1B and TrigTime1F for macro cells.

Table 2-5 Typical values of TrigTime1B and TrigTime1F

Speed (km/h) Range (ms) Recommended Value (ms)

5 640 to 1280 1280

50 240 to 640 640

120 240 to 640 640

Typical configuration 640 to 1280 640

The values listed in the preceding table should be reduced for micro cells.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the time-to-trigger parameters are, the smaller the average number of handovers is.The increase of the time to trigger causes a increase of call drops.


Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query the time-to-triggerparameters.



2-13


Use ADD CELLINTRAFREQHO to add, LST CELLINTRAFREQHO to query, and MODCELLINTRAFREQHO to modify the time-to-trigger parameters.

2.1.7 Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft HandoverThis describes the minimum quality threshold of soft handover. When the RNC receives events1A, 1C and 1D, the target cell can be added to the active set only when CPICH Ec/Io of thetarget cell is higher than this absolute threshold.

IDSHOQualmin



SettingThe default value is –24, namely -24 dB.

The purpose for setting SHOQualmin is as follows:

The current events of soft handovers are defined on the basis of relative thresholds and have norequirement about the absolute quality of cells. If the signals of added cells are too bad, thecomprehensive quality of the active set is not obviously improved and more downlink resourcesare occupied and more TPC errors are caused, and the soft handover performance is worsened.Therefore, there should be a baseline for the quality of the radio links to be added.

The setting of SHOQualmin depends on the power distribution rate of public channels anddemodulation capability of UEs.

Impact on the Network PerformanceAdjust SHOQualmin according to the Ec/Io that the cell soft handover area reaches as expectedat network planning.

l The higher SHOQualmin is, the more difficult it is for the neighboring cells to join in theactive set, but the service quality of the joining cell can be ensured.

l The lower SHOQualmin is, the easier it is for the neighboring cells to join in the activeset, but the service quality of the cell cannot be restricted if SHOQualmin is excessivelylow.


Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query SHOQualmin.






Use ADD CELLINTRAFREQHO to add, LST CELLINTRAFREQHO to query, and MODCELLINTRAFREQHO to modify SHOQualmin.

2.1.8 Parameters Related to Soft Handover FailureThis describes the parameters related to soft handover failure including maximum evaluationperiod of soft handover failure, threshold of soft handover failure times, relative threshold forimmediate slowdown upon soft handover failure, and penalty time for slowdown soft handover.

Parameter IDShoFailPeriod

ShoFailNumForDwnGrd

RelThdForDwnGrd

DcccShoPenaltyTime

Value RangeShoFailPeriod: 0 to 120

ShoFailNumForDwnGrd: 0 to 63

RelThdForDwnGrd: -29 to 29

DcccShoPenaltyTime: 0 to 255

Physical Value RangeShoFailPeriod: 0 to 120 s

ShoFailNumForDwnGrd: None

RelThdForDwnGrd: -14.5 dB to 14.5 dB, step is 0.5 dB

DcccShoPenaltyTime: 0 to 255 s

Parameter SettingThe default value of ShoFailPeriod is 60, namely 60 s.

The default value of ShoFailNumForDwnGrd is 3.

The default value of RelThdForDwnGrd is -24, namely -24 dB.

The default value of DcccShoPenaltyTime is 30 s.

Impact on the Network Performancel ShoFailPeriod(Maximum evaluation period of soft handover failure) :

An extremely short period will affect the triggering of slowdown soft handover, thusaffecting the reduction of call drops. An extremely long period temporally does not haveany adverse effect.

l ShoFailNumForDwnGrd(Threshold of soft handover failure times) :



2-15

The smaller the threshold, the greater probability of triggering slowdown before softhandover, but the higher the success rate of handover. The greater the threshold, the greaterprobability of handover attempt failures.

l RelThdForDwnGrd(Relative threshold for immediate slowdown upon soft handoverfailure) :

The greater the threshold, the greater the probability of meeting the slowdown conditions,but the higher the successf rate of soft handover.

l DcccShoPenaltyTime(Penalty time for slowdown soft handover) :

If the value is too small, it may lead to invalid penalty, that is, the speedup may be triggereddue to the DCCC cause and call drops may be increased. If the value is too large, the speedupof subscribers may be delayed, and the user experience may be affected

Relevant Commands

Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query the parameters.

2.1.9 Affect 1A and 1B Event Threshold FlagThis describes the flags CellsForbidden1A and CellsForbidden1B. The flags determinewhether the relative thresholds of the 1A and 1B events are affected.

ID

CellsForbidden1A

CellsForbidden1B

Value Range

NOT_AFFECT, AFFECT

Physical Scope

Not affected, Affected

Setting

The default value is AFFECT.

In the following formulas for calculating relative thresholds of 1A and 1B,CellsForbidden1A and CellsForbidden1B determine whether the measurement value Mi of

corresponding cell i is counted in . If the value of CellsForbidden1A or

CellsForbidden1B is AFFECT, Mi is counted in . If the value of

CellsForbidden1A or CellsForbidden1B is NOT_AFFECT, Mi is not counted in .





Impact on the Network PerformanceWhen W in the preceding formulas is 0, the value of CellsForbidden1A orCellsForbidden1B has no impact on the results of the formulas.

Related CommandsUse ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to add, LST INTRAFREQNCELL to query, and MODINTRAFREQNCELL to modify CellsForbidden1A and CellsForbidden1B.

2.1.10 Neighboring Cell Individual OffsetThis describes the neighboring cell offset for intra-frequency handovers.

IDCIOOffset




The UE adds the CIOOffset and CIO to the original measured value of the cell, and uses thesum as the measurement result for the UE intra-frequency handover decision. CIOOffset playsthe role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm.

Impact on the Network Performancel The higher CIOOffset is, the easier it is for soft handovers to occur, and the more UEs

there are in the soft handover state, but the more forward resources are occupied.l The lower CIOOffset is, the more difficult it is for soft handovers to occur, which is likely

to affect the reception quality.

Related CommandsUse ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to add, LST INTRAFREQNCELL to query, and MODINTRAFREQNCELL to modify CIOOffset.



2-17


IDCIO




The UE adds the CIOOffset and CIO to the original measured value of the cell, and uses thesum as the measurement result for the UE intra-frequency handover decision. CIO plays therole of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm.

Impact on the Network Performancel The higher CIO is, the easier it is for soft handovers to occur, and the more UEs there are

in the soft handover state, but the more forward resources are occupied.l The lower CIO is, the more difficult it is for soft handovers to occur, which is likely to

affect the reception quality.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLSETUP to add and MOD CELLSETUP to modify CIO.

2.2 Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover ParametersThe common configurable coverage-based inter-frequency handover parameters are listed here.

Table 2-6 List of coverage-based inter-frequency handover parameters

No. Parameter ID ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 InterFreqReportMode

Inter-Frequencymeasurementreport mode

Periodical_reporting

For RNCSet or modify:SETINTERFREQHOCOV

RNCCell

2 PrdReportInterval

Inter-Frequencymeasurementperiodic reportinterval

500 ms






DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

3 Query: LSTINTERFREQHOCOVFor CellSet: ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOVQuery: LSTCELLINTERFREQHOCOVModify: MODCELLINTERFREQHOCOV

Hystfor2BHystfor2DHystfor2FHystforHHO

Hysteresis relatedto inter-frequencyhandover

Hystfor2B,Hystfor2D,Hystfor2F: 4(2 dB)HystforHHO: 0 (0 dB)

4 TIMETOTRIG2BTIMETOTRIG2DTIMETOTRIG2FTIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ

Time-to-Triggerrelated to inter-frequency hardhandover

TIMETOTRIG2B: D0TIMETOTRIG2D: D320TIMETOTRIG2F: D1280TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ:0

5 InterFreqCSThd2FRSCPINTERFREQR99PSTHD2FRSCPINTERFREQHTHD2FRSCPInterFreqCSThd2DRSCPINTERFREQR99PSTHD2DRSCPINTERFREQHTHD2DRSCP

RSCP-Basedinter-frequencymeasurementstart/stopthresholds

2D: -95 dBm;2F: -92 dBm



2-19


DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

6 InterFreqCSThd2FEcNoInterFreqCSThd2FEcNoINTERFREQR99PSTHD2DECN0INTERFREQHTHD2DECN0INTERFREQR99PSTHD2FECN0INTERFREQHTHD2FECN0

Ec/No-basedinter-frequencymeasurementstart/stopthresholds

2D: -14 dB2F: -12 dB

7 TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCPTARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCPTARGETFREQHTHDRSCPTARGETFREQCSTHDECN0TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0TARGETFREQHTHDECN0

Target frequencytrigger thresholdof inter-frequencycoverage

RSCP: -92dBmEc/No: -12dB

8 USEDFREQCSTHDRSCPUSEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCPUSEDFREQHTHDRSCPUSEDFREQCSTHDECN0USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0USEDFREQHTHDECN0

Current usedfrequency qualitythreshold of inter-frequencyhandover

RSCP: -92dBmEc/No: -12dB

9 PeriodFor2B Retry period of 2Bevent

500 ms






DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

10 AmntOfRpt2B Maximum retrytimes of 2B event

Infinity

11 CIOOffset Neighboring cellindividual offset

0 dB Set: ADDINTERFREQNCELLQuery: LSTINTERFREQNCELLModify: MODINTERFREQNCELL

NCell

12 CIO Cell individualoffset

0 dB Set: ADDCELLSETUPModify: MODCELLSETUP

Cell

13 INTERFREQRATSWITCH

Inter-Freq andInter-RAT coexistswitch

InterFreq Set: ADDCELLHOCOMMQuery: LSTCELLHOCOMMModify: MODCELLHOCOMM

Cell

14 CoExistMeasThdChoice

InterFreq andInterRAT coexistmeasure thresholdchoice

COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ

For RNC: SETINTERFREQHOCOVLSTINTERFREQHOCOVFor Cell:ADDCELLHOCOMMLSTCELLHOCOMMMODCELLHOCOMM

RNC/Cell



2-21


DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

15 INTERFREQMEASTIME

Inter-freq measuretimer length[s]

60 s Set: ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOVQuery: LSTCELLINTERFREQHOCOVModify: MODCELLINTERFREQHOCOV

Cell

16 HOCovPrio Coverage-Basedinter-frequencyhandover priority

0 Set:ADDINTERFREQNCELLQuery: LSTINTERFREQNCELL

Cell

2.2.1 Inter-Frequency Measurement Report ModeThis describes the inter-frequency measurement report mode: the periodical report mode or eventtrigger mode.

2.2.2 Inter-Frequency Measurement Periodic Report IntervalThis describes the interval for periodic report of inter-frequency measurement.

2.2.3 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency HandoverThis describes the trigger hystereses for the 2B, 2D, 2F events, and hard handovers (HHOs).

2.2.4 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard HandoverThis describes the trigger delay time for the 2B, 2D, 2F events, and hard handovers (HHOs) inthe coverage-oriented inter frequency handover.

2.2.5 Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency MeasurementThis describes the start or stop thresholds for the RSCP-based inter-frequency measurement. Inthe coverage-based inter-frequency handover, when the periodical report mode is used for theinter-frequency measurement, the start or stop thresholds for the RSCP-based inter-frequencymeasurement correspond to the absolute thresholds of inter-frequency measurement events,including the absolute thresholds of the 2D event and 2F event, when RSCP is used formeasurement.

2.2.6 EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop ThresholdsIn the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequencymeasurement event absolute thresholds when Ec/No is used for measurement.

2.2.7 Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-Frequency CoverageWhen the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover in the coverage-basedinter-frequency handover, this parameter is used as the mandatory threshold requirementsatisfied by target frequency quality when event 2B is triggered, and it is one of the mandatoryconditions for triggering event 2B. If the periodical reporting mode is adopted, this parameteris used as the absolute threshold of inter-frequency hard handover event.





2.2.8 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-Frequency HandoverWhen the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover, these parameters areused for measurement control of event 2B. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorerthan this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 2B is satisfied.

2.2.9 Retry Period of 2B EventThis parameter specifies the 2B event retry period.

2.2.10 Maximum Retry Times of 2B EventThis parameter specifies the 2B event maximum retry times.

2.2.11 Neighboring Cell Individual OffsetThis describes the neighboring cell offset for inter-frequency handovers.


2.2.13 Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist SwitchThis describes the inter-frequency and inter-RAT coexist switch. The switch indicates how toperform neighboring cell measurement if a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RATneighboring cells.

2.2.14 Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Measurement Threshold ChoiceThis describes the inter-frequency and inter-RAT coexist measurement threshold switch. Theswitch determines what configuration parameters for the 2D and 2F events should be chosenbased on measurement types when a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboringcells.

2.2.15 Inter-Frequency Measurement Timer LengthThis describes the inter-frequency measurement timer length. The inter-frequency measurementtimer is used to prevent a cell from keeping in the inter-frequency measurement state(compressed mode) for a long time if the cell cannot find a target cell that meets the handovercondition.

2.2.16 Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover PriorityThis parameters specifies the priority of coverage-based inter-frequency handover.

2.2.1 Inter-Frequency Measurement Report ModeThis describes the inter-frequency measurement report mode: the periodical report mode or eventtrigger mode.

ID

InterFreqReportMode

Value Range

Enum (Periodical_reporting, Event_trigger)

Physical Scope

Periodical_reporting indicates that the periodical reporting mode is used.

Event_trigger indicates that the event triggering mode is used.



2-23

SettingThe default value is Periodical_reporting.

There are two optional inter-frequency handover report modes in RNC: event report andperiodical report, which are selected through the inter-frequency report mode switch. Thisalgorithm switch is oriented to RNC configuration.

l Event report:To prevent ping-pong effect before and after inter-frequency handovers, the 2B event (thequality of current in-use frequency is lower than the threshold of current frequency quality,and the quality of frequencies that are not used currently is higher than the target frequencytrigger threshold) is used to trigger inter-frequency handovers. As the 2B event has no eventtransfer period mechanism, the function of retrying after handover failures is notimplemented, unless this cell can trigger 2B events again.Advantage:The event report can save signaling transmission resources and reduce processing load. Inevent report mode, the quality of intra-frequency signals and inter-frequency signals canbe compared to avoid ping-pong handovers in a degree.Disadvantage:The event report can be reported only once, because no event transfer period mechanismis available. If a handover fails, the periodical retry can be triggered only by an internaltimer. If the algorithm parameters are oriented to the cell level, the inter-frequencymeasurement parameters need to be updated every time after the optimal cell is updated.

l Periodical report:The 2D and 2F events are used to start and stop the compressed modes. In the period of thecompressed mode, the measurement result of inter-frequency neighboring cells is reported.When the cell quality reported by the UE is higher than the sum of a absolute threshold andits hysteresis, the system starts the delay triggering timer. If the cell quality meets therequirement throughout the duration of the timer, the system starts an inter-frequencyhandover after the timer times out.If the handover fails, the system implements handover decision based on the periodicalreport of inter-frequency measurement again.Advantage:After a handover fails, the system can use the periodical reports to retry for many times fora cell. The algorithm of the periodical report can be flexibly extended. Parameters of theperiodical reports are oriented to cells, so the RNC updates the parameters whenimplementing internal handover decision and the system needs not to use signalingmessages to inform UEs of the parameter change after handovers occur.Disadvantage:A large amount of signaling is needed. The air-interface load and signaling processing loadincreases.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe periodical report and event report have both advantages and disadvantages. Currently, theperiodical report mode is most commonly used.

Related CommandsFor the RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters:





Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to queryInterFreqReportMode.

For the cell-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters:

Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify InterFreqReportMode.

2.2.2 Inter-Frequency Measurement Periodic Report IntervalThis describes the interval for periodic report of inter-frequency measurement.

ID

PrdReportInterval

Value Range

NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, D250, D500, D1000, D2000, D3000, D4000, D6000, D8000,D12000, D16000, D20000, D24000, D28000, D32000, D64000

Physical Scope

No periodic report, 250, 500, 1000, 2000,3000, 4000, 6000, 8000, 12000, 16000, 20000, 24000,28000, 32000, 64000, step is ms.

Setting

The default value is D500, namely 500 ms.


Reporting once every such interval when periodic report is enabled. It is recommended that thevalue should not be set to NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, otherwise the UE action is unknown.

The shorter the interval is, the more timely the measurement report is, but the load over the airinterface is increased.

Related Commands

For the RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters:

Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to queryPrdReportInterval.


Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify PrdReportInterval.

2.2.3 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency HandoverThis describes the trigger hystereses for the 2B, 2D, 2F events, and hard handovers (HHOs).



2-25

ID

Hystfor2B

Hystfor2D

Hystfor2F

HystforHHO

Value Range

0 to 29

Physical Scope


Setting

The default values of Hystfor2B, Hystfor2D, and Hystfor2F are 4, namely 2 dB. The defaultvalue of HystforHHO is 0, namely 0 dB.

In periodic report mode, the inter-frequency measurement hysteresis is mainly used to preventping-pong handovers of the 2D event (the estimated quality of the current frequency is lowerthan a threshold) and the 2F event (the estimated quality of the current frequency is higher thana threshold). The 2D event is used to start the compressed mode, while the 2F event is used tostop the compressed mode. Therefore, Hystfor2D can be higher than the recommended valuebased on the statistics about the ping-pong effect of inter-frequency handovers, andHystfor2F can be higher than the recommended value. In this way, frequent actions of startingand stopping the compressed mode are prevented and unnecessary updates of the active set arereduced.

When setting hystereses related to inter-frequency handovers, consider the radio environment(feature of slow fading), actual handover distance, and UEs' moving speed. The values ofhystereses related to inter-frequency handovers range from 2 dB to 5 dB. When adjusting thehystereses, consider the filtering factors and delay triggering.

Table 2-7 lists the recommended value ranges of hystereses related to inter-frequencyhandovers.

Table 2-7 Typical values of hystereses related to inter-frequency handovers

Speed(km/h)

Scope (CPICHRSCP)

RecommendedValue (CPICHRSCP)

Scope (CPICHEc/No)

RecommendedValue (CPICHEc/No)

Lowspeed (5)

8 to 12 (4 dBm to6 dBm)

10 (5 dBm) 6 to 10 (3 dB to 5dB)

10 (5 dB)

Middlespeed(50)

6 to 8 (3 dBm to 4dBm)

8 (4 dBm) 4 to 10 (2 dB to 5dB)

6 (3 dB)





Speed(km/h)

Scope (CPICHRSCP)

RecommendedValue (CPICHRSCP)

Scope (CPICHEc/No)

RecommendedValue (CPICHEc/No)

Highspeed(120)

4 to 8 (2 dBm to 4dBm)

6 (3 dBm) 2 to 6 (1 dB to 3dB)

4 (2 dB)


6 to 12 (3 dBm to6 dBm)

8 (4 dBm) 4 to 10 (2 dB to 5dB)

6 (3 dB)

In event report mode, the inter-frequency measurement hysteresis is mainly used to decrease thefrequent handovers triggered by event 2B because of radio channel changing. The 2B eventtriggers inter-frequency coverage handovers. The frequent reports of 2B events can be used toimplement retry (for the same or different cells) for many times after handover failures. If the2B event is triggered frequently in the same cell, and the handovers in the cell always fail, thesystem may retry ineffectively for many times. In this case, signaling resources are wasted andthe system processing load increases. Hystfor2B is set to 0 currently and needs to be optimizedbased on the actual situation.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the hysteresis is, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability is, and themore ping-pong effect is suppressed. In this case, the handover algorithm responds to signalchanges more slowly.


Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query thehystereses related to inter-frequency handovers.


Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify the hystereses related to inter-frequencyhandovers.

2.2.4 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard HandoverThis describes the trigger delay time for the 2B, 2D, 2F events, and hard handovers (HHOs) inthe coverage-oriented inter frequency handover.

IDTIMETOTRIG2B

TIMETOTRIG2D

TIMETOTRIG2F

TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ



2-27

Value Range

The value ranges and working ranges of TIMETOTRIG2B, TIMETOTRIG2D, andTIMETOTRIG2F are as follows:

l Value range: Enum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240,D320, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)

l Working range: Enum (D0, D200, D240, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)

TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ ranges 0 to 64000.

Physical Scope

Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms

TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ ranges 0 to 64000 ms.

Setting

Default values

l TIMETOTRIG2B: D0

l TIMETOTRIG2D: D320

l TIMETOTRIG2F: D1280

l TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ: 0

The previous simulation results show that hystereses can effectively reduce the average numberof handovers and mis-decisions and avoid unnecessary handovers. Because the report period ofinter-frequency measurement is 480 ms, the trigger time shorter than 480 ms is invalid.

UEs with different moving speeds vary in their responses to the event delay trigger value. UEsmoving in a high speed are sensitive to the time-to-trigger value, while UEs moving in a slowspeed are slow to the time-to-trigger value. Therefore, the time-to-trigger parameter can be setto a low value for the cells where most UEs are moving in a high speed, and can be set to acomparatively high value for the cells where most UEs are moving in a slow speed. The time-to-trigger parameters need to be adjusted based on the actual network statistics.

Table 2-8 lists the value ranges and recommended values of time-to-trigger parameters relatedto inter-frequency handovers.

Table 2-8 Typical values of time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-frequency handovers


5 640 to 1280 1280

50 240 to 640 640

120 240 to 640 640






Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the time-to-trigger parameters are, the more difficult it is for handovers to occur, andthe possibility of call drops increases.


Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query the time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-frequency handovers.


Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify the time-to-trigger parameters related tointer-frequency handovers.

2.2.5 Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-Based Inter-FrequencyMeasurement

This describes the start or stop thresholds for the RSCP-based inter-frequency measurement. Inthe coverage-based inter-frequency handover, when the periodical report mode is used for theinter-frequency measurement, the start or stop thresholds for the RSCP-based inter-frequencymeasurement correspond to the absolute thresholds of inter-frequency measurement events,including the absolute thresholds of the 2D event and 2F event, when RSCP is used formeasurement.

IDInterFreqCSThd2DRSCP (Threshold to trigger inter-frequency measurement with measurementquantity of RSCP for CS domain services)

InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP (Threshold to stop inter-frequency measurement with measurementquantity of RSCP for CS domain services)

InterFreqR99PSThd2DRSCP (Threshold to trigger inter-frequency measurement withmeasurement quantity of RSCP for PS domain R99 services)

InterFreqHThd2DRSCP (Threshold to trigger inter-frequency measurement with measurementquantity of RSCP for PS domain HSPA services)

InterFreqR99PsThd2FRSCP (Threshold to stop inter-frequency measurement withmeasurement quantity of RSCP for PS domain R99 services)

InterFreqHThd2FRSCP (Threshold to stop inter-frequency measurement with measurementquantity of RSCP for PS domain HSPA services)

Value Range–115 to –25

Physical Scope–115 dBm to –25 dBm, with the step of 1 dBm



2-29

SettingThe default values of InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP, InterFreqR99PsThd2DRSCP andInterFreqHThd2DRSCP are –95.

The default values of InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP, InterFreqR99PsThd2FRSCP andInterFreqHThd2FRSCP are –92.

When the current measured value of frequency points is lower than the absolute threshold of the2D event, UEs report 2D events, and the RNC delivers signaling messages to start thecompressed mode and inter-frequency measurement. When the current measured value offrequency points is higher than the absolute threshold of the 2F event, UEs report 2F events, andthe RNC delivers signaling messages to stop the compressed mode and inter-frequencymeasurement.

The threshold for starting the inter-frequency measurement (namely the threshold for startingthe compressed mode) is the most important parameter in the inter-frequency handover policy,because the threshold affects the proportion of the UEs in compressed mode and the success rateof hard handovers. When setting the threshold, consider the following factors:

l Moving speed of UEs

l Cell radius

l Path loss

Table 2-9 list the inter-frequency measurement start thresholds, which are represented by RSCP,of the cells on the edge of carrier coverage.

Table 2-9 Thresholds (RSCP) for starting inter-frequency measurement for UEs moving indifferent speeds

Speed (km/h) Inter-frequency measurement start threshold(dBm)

5 -100

50 -97

120 -93

In actual situations, there may be UEs moving with different speeds in a cell, so the recommendedvalue of the inter-frequency measurement start threshold of all cells is –95 dBm. The emulationresult shows that the call drop rate is still low for UEs moving with the speed of 120 km/h whenthe inter-frequency measurement start threshold is set to –95 dBm.

For the cells at the center of the coverage areas, the inter-frequency measurement start thresholdsrepresented by Ec/No are shown in the following table:





Table 2-10 Thresholds (EcIo) for starting inter-frequency measurement for UEs moving indifferent speeds

Speed (km/h) Inter-frequency measurement start threshold(dB)

5 -17

50 -14

120 -12

In the cells at the center of the coverage areas, UEs preferentially implement intra-frequencysoft handovers, so inter-frequency hard handovers are unnecessary. In addition, the starting ofthe compressed mode reduces the communication quality of UEs and increases networkinterference, so the recommended value of the inter-frequency measurement start threshold forthe cells at the center of the coverage areas is –24 dB, namely that the compressed mode is notstarted for the cells at the center of the coverage areas.

If a cell is a macro cell, there must be micro cells in the coverage of the cell. To enable the microcells to use the traffic absorption function, the inter-frequency measurement start or stopthreshold should be set to a comparatively high value, namely the thresholds for events 2D and2F should be set to comparatively high values (represented by CPICH RSCP).

If a cell is a micro cell, the preceding default values should be modified according to the linkbudget.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe 2D and 2F events are switches for starting and stopping the compressed mode. If a cell ison the edge of coverage, the measured value of RSCP is used as the decision standard for the2D and 2F events. Therefore, the threshold of the 2D event needs to be set to a high value tostart the compression mode early. To reduce the ping-pong effect of starting and stopping thecompressed mode, increase the difference between the thresholds for the 2D event and the 2Fevent.


Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query the inter-frequency measurement thresholds.


Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify the inter-frequency measurementthresholds.

2.2.6 EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/StopThresholds

In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequencymeasurement event absolute thresholds when Ec/No is used for measurement.



2-31

Parameter IDInterFreqCSThd2DEcN0 (Inter-freq CS measure start Ec/No THD)

InterFreqCSThd2FEcN0 (Inter-freq CS measure stop Ec/No THD)

INTERFREQR99PSTHD2DECN0 (Inter-freq R99 PS measure start Ec/No THD)

INTERFREQHTHD2DECN0 (Inter-freq H measure start Ec/No THD)

INTERFREQR99PSTHD2FECN0 (Inter-freq R99 PS measure stop Ec/No THD)

INTERFREQHTHD2FECN0 (Inter-freq H measure stop Ec/No THD)

Value Range-24 to 0

Physical Value Range-24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB

Parameter Settingl The default values of InterFreqCSThd2DecN0, INTERFREQR99PSTHD2DECN0 and

INTERFREQHTHD2DECN0 are -14, namely -14 dBl The default values for InterFreqCSThd2FEcN0, INTERFREQR99PSTHD2FECN0 and

INTERFREQHTHD2FECN0 are -12, namely -12 dB.

For the detailed descriptions, refer to 2.2.5 Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-BasedInter-Frequency Measurement.

Impact on the Network PerformanceSet the event 2D threshold to a relatively greater value if the compressed mode is expected tostart as early as possible; otherwise, set it to a relatively less value. To control the ping-pongeffect of the compressed mode start/stop, increase appropriately the difference between thethresholds for events 2D and 2F.

Relevant CommandsFor RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SETINTERFREQHOCOV and query them through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.

For cell-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: add them through ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, andmodify them through MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV.

2.2.7 Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-FrequencyCoverage

When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover in the coverage-basedinter-frequency handover, this parameter is used as the mandatory threshold requirementsatisfied by target frequency quality when event 2B is triggered, and it is one of the mandatory





conditions for triggering event 2B. If the periodical reporting mode is adopted, this parameteris used as the absolute threshold of inter-frequency hard handover event.

Parameter ID

TARGETFREQCSTHDECN0 (Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD)

TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCP (Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger RSCP THD)

TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0 (Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD)

TARGETFREQHTHDECN0 (Inter-freq H target frequency trigger Ec/No THD)

TARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCP (Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger RSCP THD)

TARGETFREQHTHDRSCP (Inter-freq H target frequency trigger RSCP THD)

Value Range

TARGETFREQCSTHDECN0, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0 andTARGETFREQHTHDECN0: -24 to 0

TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCP, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCP andTARGETFREQHTHDRSCP: -115 to -25


TARGETFREQCSTHDECN0, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0 andTARGETFREQHTHDECN0: -24 dB to 0 dB

TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCP, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCP andTARGETFREQHTHDRSCP: -115 dBm to -25 dBm

Parameter Setting

The default values of TARGETFREQCSTHDECN0, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0 andTARGETFREQHTHDECN0 are -12 dB.

The default values of TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCP, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCP andTARGETFREQHTHDRSCP are -92 dBm.


The greater the parameters are, the more difficult hard handover occurs.

Relevant Commands

For parameters oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set them through SETINTERFREQHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.

For parameters oriented to cell inter-frequency handover algorithm: add them through ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, andmodify them through MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV.



2-33

2.2.8 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-Frequency Handover

When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover, these parameters areused for measurement control of event 2B. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorerthan this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 2B is satisfied.

Parameter ID

Based on different inter-frequency measurement quantities in use and different borne services,it can be:

USEDFREQCSTHDECN0 (Inter-freq CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)

USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 (Inter-freq R99 PS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)

USEDFREQHTHDECN0 (Inter-freq H Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)

USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP (Inter-freq CS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)

USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP (Inter-freq R99 PS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)

USEDFREQHTHDRSCP (Inter-freq H Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)

Value Range

USEDFREQCSTHDECN0, USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and USEDFREQHTHDECN0:-24 to 0

USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP, USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and USEDFREQHTHDRSCP:-115 to -25


USEDFREQCSTHDECN0, USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and USEDFREQHTHDECN0:-24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB

USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP, USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and USEDFREQHTHDRSCP:-115 dBm to -25 dBm, step 1 dBm

Parameter Setting

The default values of USEDFREQCSTHDECN0, USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 andUSEDFREQHTHDECN0 are -12 dB.

The default values of USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP, USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP andUSEDFREQHTHDRSCP are -92 dBm.

Factors to be considered while setting these parameters:

The cell signal quality of current frequency is poor and cannot better satisfy the coveragerequirement of current service. After handover is completed, it is hard to hand over to the currentused frequency cell again even inter-frequency measurement is started again. In other words,these parameters should be set less than the trigger threshold of event 2F, or equal to the thresholdof event 2D.





Impact on the Network PerformanceHigher values of these parameters get event 2B to be more easily triggered.

Relevant CommandsFor parameters oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set them through SETINTERFREQHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.

For parameters oriented to cell inter-frequency handover algorithm: add them through ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, andmodify them through MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV.

2.2.9 Retry Period of 2B EventThis parameter specifies the 2B event retry period.

IDPeriodFor2B

Value Range1 to 64

Physical Scope500 ms to 32000 ms, step is 500 ms.

SettingThe default value is 1, namely 500 ms.


The lower the parameter is，the more easily handover to inter-frequency cell，but the systemprocessing resource will be a little increased.


Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to queryPeriodFor2B.


Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify PeriodFor2B.

2.2.10 Maximum Retry Times of 2B EventThis parameter specifies the 2B event maximum retry times.



2-35

ID

AmntOfRpt2B

Value Range

0 to 63

Physical Scope

0 to 63 times, 64 means Infinity.

Setting

The default value is 64.


The higher the parameter is，the more easily handover to inter-frequency cell，but the systemprocessing resource will be a little increased.

Related Commands

For the RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters:

Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to queryAmntOfRpt2B.


Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify AmntOfRpt2B.

2.2.11 Neighboring Cell Individual OffsetThis describes the neighboring cell offset for inter-frequency handovers.

ID

CIOOffset

Value Range

–20 to 20

Physical Scope


Setting






The UE adds the CIOOffset and CIO to the original measured value of the cell, and uses thesum as the measurement result for the UE intra-frequency handover decision. CIOOffset playsthe role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm.

Impact on the Network Performancel The higher CIOOffset is, the easier it is for soft handovers to occur, and the more UEs

there are in the soft handover state, but the more forward resources are occupied.l The lower CIOOffset is, the more difficult it is for soft handovers to occur, which is likely

to affect the reception quality.

Related CommandsFor the cell-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters:

Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to add, LST INTERFREQNCELL to query, and MODINTERFREQNCELL to modify CIOOffset.


IDCIO




The UE adds the CIOOffset and CIO to the original measured value of the cell, and uses thesum as the measurement result for the UE intra-frequency handover decision. CIO plays therole of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm.

Impact on the Network Performancel The higher CIO is, the easier it is for soft handovers to occur, and the more UEs there are

in the soft handover state, but the more forward resources are occupied.l The lower CIO is, the more difficult it is for soft handovers to occur, which is likely to

affect the reception quality.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLSETUP to add and MOD CELLSETUP to modify CIO.



2-37

2.2.13 Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist SwitchThis describes the inter-frequency and inter-RAT coexist switch. The switch indicates how toperform neighboring cell measurement if a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RATneighboring cells.

IDInterFreqRATSwitch

Value RangeEnum(InterFreq, InterRAT, SimInterFreqRAT)

Physical Scopel Only the inter-frequency neighboring cells are measured.

l Only the inter-RAT neighboring cells are measured.

l Both the inter-frequency neighboring cells and the inter-RAT neighboring cells aremeasured.

SettingThe default setting is InterFreq.

For a cell having both inter-frequency neighboring cells and inter-RAT neighboring cells, setInterFreqRATSwitch based on the actual handover policy.

InterFreq means that only the inter-frequency cells are measured and the inter-frequencyhandover is implemented. InterRAT means that only the GSM cells are measured and only theinter-RAT handover is implemented. SimInterFreqRAT means that both the inter-frequencycells and inter-RAT cells are measured and the handover mode depends on which cell meets thehandover decision condition.

InterFreqRATSwitch is invalid when only inter-frequency cells or inter-RAT cells areavailable.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter determines the cell handover policy when inter-frequency neighboring cells co-exist with inter-RAT neighboring cells. Configure this parameter for each cell.

Related CommandsFor the cell-oriented handover parameters, use ADD CELLHOCOMM to set, use MODCELLHOCOMM to modify, and use LST CELLHOCOMM to queryInterFreqRATSwitch.

2.2.14 Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist MeasurementThreshold Choice

This describes the inter-frequency and inter-RAT coexist measurement threshold switch. Theswitch determines what configuration parameters for the 2D and 2F events should be chosen





based on measurement types when a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboringcells.

ID

CoExistMeasThdChoice

Value Range

COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ,COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT

Physical Scope

COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ indicates that the 2D and 2Fmeasurement threshold parameters oriented to inter-frequency are chosen as thresholds for cellsubscribers to enable or disable the compress mode.

COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT indicates that the 2D and 2F measurementthreshold parameters oriented to inter-RAT are chosen as thresholds for cell subscribers to enableor disable the compress mode.

Setting

The default setting is COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ.

During the setting, take into account the following items: Thresholds for 2D and 2F events ininter-frequency and inter-RAT systems, thresholds for the inter-frequency or inter-RAThandover, and current handover policies. For instance, if the threshold for an inter-RAT 2D eventis higher than that for an inter-frequency 2D event, you can choose the inter-frequencymeasurement threshold parameters to have the system be able to choose inter-frequencyneighboring cells when the inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells coexist.


CoExistMeasThdChoice is set on the basis of the actual network handover policy.

Related Commands

For the RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: use SET HOCOMM toset and LST HOCOMM to query CoExistMeasThdChoice.

For the cell-oriented handover common parameters, use ADD CELLHOCOMM to set, MODCELLHOCOMM to modify, and LST CELLHOCOMM to queryCoExistMeasThdChoice.




2-39

IDINTERFREQMEASTIME

Value RangeInteger (0...512)

Physical ScopeInteger (0...512) second(s)

SettingThe default value is 60, namely 60 s.

The system stops inter-frequency measurement and disables the enabled compression mode, ifno inter-frequency handover occurs upon expiration of the inter-frequency measurement timer.

For the coverage-based inter-frequency measurement, it can use 2F event report to disablecompression mode. But for the non-coverage inter-frequency measurement, it can disablecompressed mode only by measurement timer. So it is recommended not set the timer to 0.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter is used to reduce the impact on serving cells by shortening the time forcompression mode.

If the compress mode is closed in advance, the UE cannot initiate an inter-frequency handover.If the coverage-based inter-frequency handover is not triggered when the timer expires, thecompress mode will be closed and the call may drops.


Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify INTERFREQMEASTIME.

For the non-coverage-based inter-frequency handover:

Use SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to queryINTERFREQMEASTIME.

2.2.16 Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover PriorityThis parameters specifies the priority of coverage-based inter-frequency handover.

IDHOCovPrio

Value Range0 to 3.





Physical Scope0 means not supporting coverage-based inter-frequency handover. 1 means the highest priorityof coverage-based inter-frequency handover. 3 means the lowest priority of coverage-basedinter-frequency handover.




Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to add andLST INTERFREQNCELL toqueryHOCovPrio.

2.3 Non Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency HandoverManagement Parameters

The common configurable non-coverage-based inter-Frequency handover managementparameters are listed here.

Table 2-11 List of non-coverage-based inter-Frequency handover management parameters


Default Value

RelevantCommand

Level

1 Hystfor2C Hysteresis for the2C event

6 Set: SETINTERFREQHONCOVQuery: LSTINTERFREQHONCOV

RNC

2 TrigTime2C Time-to-Triggerfor the 2C event

D640(640ms)

3 InterFreqNCovHOThdEcN0

Inter-FrequencyMeasure TargetFrequency TriggerEc/No Threshold

-16 dB

4 PeriodFor2C Retry period of 2Cevent

2 s

5 AmntOfRpt2C Maximum retrytimes of 2C event

5

6 InterFreqMeasTime

Inter-Frequencymeasurement timerlength

60 s



2-41


Default Value

RelevantCommand

Level

7 DlRscpQosHyst Hysteresis ofdownlink RSCPQoS frequency

4 dB Set: SETQOSHOQuery: LSTQOSHO8 DLQosMcTimer

LenDownLink Qosmeasurement timerlength

20 s

9 ULQosMcTimerLen

UpLink Qosmeasurement timerlength

20 s

2.3.1 Hysteresis of Event 2CThis describes the trigger hysteresis of the 2C event in inter-Frequency handovers that are notbased on coverage.

2.3.2 Time to Trigger for Event 2CThis describes the time to trigger the 2C event in inter-Frequency handovers that are not basedon coverage.

2.3.3 Inter-Frequency Measure Target Frequency Trigger Ec/No ThresholdThis parameter specifies the threshold of Ec/No value on the target frequency for inter-frequencyhandover.

2.3.4 Retry Period of 2C EventThis parameter specifies the 2C event retry period.

2.3.5 Maximum Retry Times of 2C EventThis parameter specifies the 2C event maximum retry times.


2.3.7 Hysteresis of Downlink RSCP QoS FrequencyThis parameter is used in both inter-rat handover and inter-frequency handover.

2.3.8 DownLink Qos Measurement Timer LengthThis parameter is used in both inter-rat handover and inter-frequency handover.

2.3.9 UpLink Qos Measurement Timer LengthThis parameter is used in both inter-rat handover and inter-frequency handover.

2.3.1 Hysteresis of Event 2CThis describes the trigger hysteresis of the 2C event in inter-Frequency handovers that are notbased on coverage.





ID

Hystfor2C

Value Range

0 to 29

Physical Scope


Setting

The default value is 6, namely 3 dB.

The event 2C is applied to non-coverage-based inter-frequency hard handover scenarios whereinter-frequency measurement needs to be started.


The value is related to the slow fading feature. The higher the parameter is, the less the ping-pong effect and the fewer the decision mistakes. In this case, however, the event 2C might notbe triggered in time.

Related Commands

Use SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to queryHystfor2C.

2.3.2 Time to Trigger for Event 2CThis describes the time to trigger the 2C event in inter-Frequency handovers that are not basedon coverage.

ID

TrigTime2C

Value Range

Enum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640, D1280,D2560, D5000)

Physical Scope

Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms

Setting

The default value is D640, namely 640 ms.



2-43

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe value is related to the slow fading feature. The higher the parameter is, the fewer the decisionmistakes. In this case, however, the event 2C might not be triggered in time.

Related CommandsUse SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to queryTrigTime2C.

2.3.3 Inter-Frequency Measure Target Frequency Trigger Ec/NoThreshold

This parameter specifies the threshold of Ec/No value on the target frequency for inter-frequencyhandover.

Parameter IDInterFreqNCovHOThdEcN0

Value Range-24 to 0

Physical Value Range-24 dB to 0 dB

Parameter SettingThe default values is -16, namely -16 dB.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe greater the parameters are, the more difficult hard handover occurs.

Relevant CommandsUse SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to queryInterFreqNCovHOThdEcN0.


IDPeriodFor2C

Value Range1 to 64







Impact on the Network PerformanceThe lower the parameter is，the more easily handover to inter-frequency cell，but the systemprocessing resource will be increased.

Related CommandsUse SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to queryPeriodFor2C.


IDAmntOfRpt2C

Value Range0 to 63

Physical Scope0 to 63 times, 64 means Infinity.


Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the parameter is，the more easily handover to inter-frequency cell，but the systemprocessing resource will be increased.

Related CommandsUse SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to queryAmntOfRpt2C.

2.3.6 Inter-Frequency Measurement Timer LengthThis describes the inter-frequency measurement timer length. The inter-frequency measurementtimer is used to prevent a cell from keeping in the inter-frequency measurement state



2-45

(compressed mode) for a long time if the cell cannot find a target cell that meets the handovercondition.

IDINTERFREQMEASTIME

Value RangeInteger (0...512)

Physical ScopeInteger (0...512) second(s)


The system stops inter-frequency measurement and disables the enabled compression mode, ifno inter-frequency handover occurs upon expiration of the inter-frequency measurement timer.

For the coverage-based inter-frequency measurement, it can use 2F event report to disablecompression mode. But for the non-coverage inter-frequency measurement, it can disablecompressed mode only by measurement timer. So it is recommended not set the timer to 0.


If the compress mode is closed in advance, the UE cannot initiate an inter-frequency handover.If the coverage-based inter-frequency handover is not triggered when the timer expires, thecompress mode will be closed and the call may drops.


Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify INTERFREQMEASTIME.

For the non-coverage-based inter-frequency handover:

Use SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to queryINTERFREQMEASTIME.


IDDlRscpQosHyst





Value Range

-15 to 15

Physical Scope

-15 dB to 15 dB.

Setting

The default value is 4, namely 4 dB.

In event-trigger mode, the frequency threshold for the inter-frequency, inter-rat measurementtriggered due to downlink QoS causes, and RSCP measurement quantity adopts the frequencythreshold of coverage measurement configured on the daemon minus this parameter.


The greater the delay, the more likely to trigger the 2B/3A event，more easily handover to thetarget cell.

Related Commands

Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query DlRscpQosHyst.


ID

DLQosMcTimerLen

Value Range

0 to 512

Physical Scope

0 s to 512 s.

Setting

The default value is 20, namely 20 s.

After DownLink Qos measurement starts, if no handover is performed, when this timer expires,the Qos measurement is stopped.

If there is no coverage-based measurement on, the inter-frequency or inter-system measurementis stopped. In addition, the compressed mode is deactivated, if any. The value 0 indicates thetimer is not to be enabled.



2-47


This parameter is used to reduce the impact on serving cells by shortening the time forcompression mode.

If the compress mode is closed in advance, the UE cannot initiate an inter-frequency handover,that may lead to call drops.

Related Commands

Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query DLQosMcTimerLen.


ID

ULQosMcTimerLen

Value Range

0 to 512

Physical Scope

0 s to 512 s.

Setting


After UpLink Qos measurement starts, if no handover is performed, when this timer expires, theQos measurement is stopped.





Related Commands

Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query ULQosMcTimerLen.





2.4 Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover ManagementParameters

This describes the coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters.

Table 2-12 List of coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 InterRATReportMode

Inter-RATmeasurementreport mode

Periodical_reporting For the RNCSet or modify: SETINTERRATHOCOVQuery: LSTINTERRATHOCOVFor the cellSet: ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOVQuery: LSTCELLINTERRATHOCOVModify: MODCELLINTERRATHOCOV

RNC/Cell

2 InterPeriodReportInterval

Inter-RATperiod reportinterval

D1000 (1000 ms)

3 BSICVerify BSIC verifyselectionswitch

Require

4 MEASQUANTITYOF3A

Inter-RATmeasurementquantity

MEASQUANTITYOF3A: AUTO

5 InterRATCSThd2DRSCPInterRATR99PSThd2DRSCPInterRATHThd2DRSCPInterRATCSThd2FRSCPInterRATR99PSThd2FRSCPInterRATHThd2FRSCP

RSCP-Basedinter-RATmeasurementstart/stopthresholds

InterRATCSThd2DRSCP: –100 (dBm)InterRATR99PSThd2DRSCP andInterRATHThd2DRSCP: –110 (dBm)InterRATCSThd2FRSCP: –97 (dBm)InterRATR99PSThd2FRSCP andInterRATHThd2FRSCP: –107 (dBm)



2-49

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

6 INTERRATCSTHD2DECN0InterRATR99PSThd2DEcN0InterRATHThd2DEcN0INTERRATCSTHD2FECN0InterRATR99PSThd2FEcN0InterRATHThd2FEcNO

Ec/No-basedinter-RATmeasurementstart/stopthresholds

INTERRATCSTHD2DECN0: –14 (dB)InterRATR99PSThd2DEcN0 andInterRATHThd2DEcNO: –15 (dB)INTERRATCSTHD2FECN0: –12 (dB)InterRATR99PSThd2FEcN0 andInterRATHThd2FEcNO: –13 (dB)

7 InterRATCovHOCSThdTARGETRATR99PSTHDTARGETRATHTHD

Inter-RAThandoverdecisionthresholds

16, namely –95 dBm

8 TrigTime2DTrigTime2FTrigTime3A

Time-to-Triggerrelated tointer-RAThandoverevent

TRIGTIME2D: D320TRIGTIME2F: D1280TRIGTIME3A: D0

9 Hystfor3AHystfor2DHystfor2FHystforInterRAT

Hysteresisrelated tointer-RAThandover

2D/2F/3A: 4 (2 dB)HystforInterRAT: 0 (0dB)





SerialNo.


MML Command Level

10

TimeToTrigForVerify

Time-to-Trigger forverified GSMcells

0 ms, namely that thehandover isimplementedimmediately

11

TimeToTrigForNonVerify

Time-to-Trigger fornon-verifiedGSM cells

0 ms

12

UsedFreqCsThdEcN0UsedFreqR99PsThdEcN0UsedFreqHThdEcN0USEDFREQCSTHDRSCPUsedFreqR99PsThdRSCPUsedFreqHThdRSCP

Inter-RAT CSUsedfrequencytrigger Ec/NoTHDInter-RATR99 PS Usedfrequencytrigger Ec/NoTHDInter-RAT HUsedfrequencytrigger Ec/NoTHDInter-RAT CSUsedfrequencytrigger RSCPTHDInter-RATR99 PS Usedfrequencytrigger RSCPTHDInter-RAT HUsedfrequencytrigger RSCPTHD

UsedFreqCsThdEcN0: –12 (dB)UsedFreqR99PsThdEcN0 andUsedFreqHThdEcN0: –13 (dB)USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP: –97 (dBm)UsedFreqR99PsThdRSCP andUsedFreqHThdRSCP: –107 (dBm)



2-51

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

13

InterRATMeasTime

Time length ofthe inter-RATmeasurementtimer

60 s

14

PeriodFor3A

Retry periodof 3A event

1, namely 500 ms

15

AmntOfRpt3A

Maximumretry times of3A event

63, namely Infinity

16

CIOOffset Neighboringcell individualoffset

0 dB Set: ADDGSMNCELLQuery: LSTGSMNCELLModify: MODGSMNCELL

NCell

17

CIO Cellindividualoffset

0 dB Set: ADDGSMCELLQuery: LSTGSMCELLModify: MODGSMCELL

Cell

2.4.1 Inter-RAT Measurement Report ModeThis describes the inter-RAT measurement report mode: the periodical report more or the eventtrigger mode.

2.4.2 Inter-RAT Periodical Report IntervalThis describes the measurement report interval when the periodical reporting mode is selectedfor the inter-RAT measurement.

2.4.3 BSIC Verify Selection SwitchThis describes the BSIC verify selection switch. The parameter is used to control the inter-RATmeasurement report. If it is set to Require, report is allowed only after the measured GSM cellidentity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded. If it is set to Not_Require, all the measured cells canbe reported so long as the report conditions are available, no matter whether their BSICs arecorrectly decoded or not.

2.4.4 Event 3A Measurement QuantityParameter MEASQUANTITYOF3A is used to configure event 3A measurement quantity forinter-RAT measurement, including EcNo and RSCP.





2.4.5 RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop ThresholdsThis set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurementevents when RSCP is used for measurement.

2.4.6 Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop ThresholdsThis set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement eventwhen Ec/No is used for measurement.

2.4.7 Inter-RAT Handover Judging ThresholdsInter-RAT handover judging thresholds involve the inter-RAT CS service handover judgingthreshold TARGETRATCSTHD and the inter-RAT PS service handover judging thresholdTARGETRATR99PSTHD, TARGETRATHTHD.

2.4.8 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT HandoverThis describes the time to trigger related to inter-RAT handovers. In coverage-oriented inter-RAT handovers, the time-to-trigger parameters include time-to-trigger for 2D (TrigTime2D),time-to-trigger for 2F (TrigTime2F) and time-to-trigger for 3A (TrigTime3A).

2.4.9 Hysteresis Related to the Coverage-Based Inter-RAT HandoverThis describes the trigger hystereses for the 3A, 2D, 2F events, and inter-RAT handovers.

2.4.10 Time to Trigger for Verified GSM CellsThis describes the delay trigger time of the GSM cells of which the BSIC is already verifiedwhen the periodical report mode is used for the inter-RAT measurement. If the signal quality ofa GSM neighboring cell always satisfies the conditions for the inter-RAT handover decision andis in the verified state in the time length stipulated by this parameter value, the system starts theinter-RAT handover to the GSM neighboring cell.

2.4.11 Time to Trigger for Non-Verified GSM CellsThis describes the delay trigger time of the GSM cell of which the BSIC is not verified whenthe periodical report mode is used for the inter-RAT measurement. If the signal quality of a GSMneighboring cell always satisfies the conditions for the inter-RAT handover decision and is inthe non-verified state in the time length specified by this parameter, the system starts the inter-RAT handover to the GSM neighboring cell.

2.4.12 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RAT HandoverThis parameter is used for measurement control of event 3A when the event reporting mode isadopted for the inter-RAT measurement. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorer thanthis threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 3A is satisfied.

2.4.13 Inter-RAT Measurement Timer LengthThis describes the effective time length of the inter-RAT measurement. If no proper inter-RATcell is found (for example no 3A event report is received or no periodic report meets the triggerconditions of inter-RAT handovers) till the timer expires, the system will stop the inter-RATmeasurement, disables the compressed mode, and waits for the triggering of another inter-RATmeasurement.

2.4.14 Retry Period of 3A EventThis parameter specifies the 3A event retry period.

2.4.15 Maximum Retry Times of 3A EventThis parameter specifies the 3A event maximum retry times.

2.4.16 Neighboring Cell Individual OffsetThis describes the neighboring cell individual offset for inter-RAT handovers.

2.4.17 Cell Individual OffsetThis describes the cell individual offset for inter-RAT handovers.



2-53

2.4.1 Inter-RAT Measurement Report ModeThis describes the inter-RAT measurement report mode: the periodical report more or the eventtrigger mode.

IDInterRATReportMode

Value RangeEnum (Periodical_reporting, Event_trigger)

Physical ScopePeriodical_reporting indicates that the periodical reporting mode is used.

Event_trigger indicates that the event triggering mode is used.

SettingThe default value is Periodical_reporting.

There are two optional inter-RAT handover report modes in the RNC: event report and periodicalreport, which are selected through the switch of inter-RAT measurement report mode.

l Event report:To prevent ping-pong effect before and after inter-RAT handover, event 3A (the currentused frequency quality is lower than the absolute threshold, and the GSM cell level is higherthan the other absolute threshold) is used as the trigger event for the decision on theorigination of inter-RAT handovers. To improve the handover success rate, the BSIC ofthe GSM cell where the 3A event is triggered must be decoded correctly by the UE. As the3A event has no event transfer period, the function of retrying after handover failures isnot implemented, unless this cell can trigger 3A events again.Advantage: The event report can save signaling transmission resources and reduceprocessing load. In event report mode, the signal quality of the current frequency and thesignal quality of frequencies of other systems can be compared to avoid ping-ponghandovers in a degree.Disadvantage: The event report can be reported only once, because no event transfer periodmechanism is available. If a handover fails, the periodical retry can be triggered only byan internal timer. If the algorithm parameters are oriented to the cell level, the inter-frequency measurement parameters need to be updated every time after the optimal cell isupdated.

l Periodical report:When the quality of the GSM cell reported by UE is satisfied the requirement to trigger theinter-RAT handover, it starts the delay trigger timer. If the quality of the GSM cell satisfiesthe requirement throughout the duration of the timer, the system starts the inter-RAThandover after the time-out.If the handover fails, the system implements the handover again according to the periodicalreport of inter-RAT measurement.Advantage: After a handover fails, the system can use the periodical reports to implementthe handover for many times for a cell. The algorithm of the periodical report can be flexibly





extended. Parameters of the periodical reports are oriented to cells, so the RNC updates theparameters when implementing internal handover decision and the system needs not to usesignaling messages to inform UEs of the parameter change after handovers occur.Disadvantage: A large amount of signaling is needed. The air-interface load and signalingprocessing load increases.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe periodical report and event report have both advantages and disadvantages. Currently, theperiodical report mode is most commonly used.

Related CommandsFor the RNC-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:

Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query the inter-RATmeasurement report mode.

For the cell-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:

Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, andMOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify the inter-RAT measurement report mode.

2.4.2 Inter-RAT Periodical Report IntervalThis describes the measurement report interval when the periodical reporting mode is selectedfor the inter-RAT measurement.

IDInterPeriodReportInterval

Value RangeEnum (NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, D250, D500, D1000, D2000, D3000, D4000, D6000,D8000, D12000, D16000, D20000, D24000, D28000, D32000, D64000)

Physical ScopeEnum (NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, 250 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms, 3000 ms, 4000 ms,6000 ms, 8000 ms, 12000 ms, 16000 ms, 20000 ms, 24000 ms, 28000 ms, 32000 ms, 64000 ms)

SettingThe default value is D1000, namely 1 s.

Because the GSM RSSI measurement period is 480 ms, the inter-RAT periodical report intervalshall be longer than 480 ms. If InterPeriodReportInterval is excessively high, the handoverjudging time shall be long, and handovers will become slower.

InterPeriodReportInterval is adjusted according to the configured GSM RSSI measurementcompressed mode sequence. According to the current configured GSM RSSI measurementcompressed mode sequence, the RSSI measurement of eight GSM cells can be finished in 480ms, so the RSSI measurement of 16 GSM cells can be finished in 1000 ms. According to the



2-55

protocol, there should be not more than 32 inter-RAT neighboring cells, so theInterPeriodReportInterval can be set to 2000 ms if there are more than 16 neighboring GSMcells.


The higher InterPeriodReportInterval is, the fewer measurement reports are sent; but theincrease of InterPeriodReportInterval will increase the risk of call drop.

Related Commands

For the RNC-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:

Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to queryInterPeriodReportInterval.

For the cell-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameter:

Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, andMOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify InterPeriodReportInterval.

2.4.3 BSIC Verify Selection SwitchThis describes the BSIC verify selection switch. The parameter is used to control the inter-RATmeasurement report. If it is set to Require, report is allowed only after the measured GSM cellidentity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded. If it is set to Not_Require, all the measured cells canbe reported so long as the report conditions are available, no matter whether their BSICs arecorrectly decoded or not.

ID

BSICVerify

Value Range

Enum (REQUIRED, NOT_REQUIRE)

Physical Scope

Required, not required

Setting

The default value is REQUIRED.

BSICVerify is valid for both periodical report mode and event report mode. To ensure thereliability of handovers, the system reports only the cells of which the BSIC is correctly decoded,namely, the recommended value of BSICVerify is REQUIRED.


If BSICVerify is set to NOT_REQUIRE, handovers occur more easily. If BSICVerify is setto REQUIRED, handovers occur with higher reliability.





Related Commands


Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query BSICVerify.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, andMOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify BSICVerify.

2.4.4 Event 3A Measurement QuantityParameter MEASQUANTITYOF3A is used to configure event 3A measurement quantity forinter-RAT measurement, including EcNo and RSCP.

ID

MEASQUANTITYOF3A

Value Range

MEASQUANTITYOF3A: Enum (CPICH_EcNo, CPICH_RSCP, AUTO)


None.

Parameter Setting

The default value for MEASQUANTITYOF3A is AUTO.

l If select CPICH_Ec/No then use the Ec/No measurement quantity for event 3Ameasurement. The physical unit is dB.

l If select CPICH_RSCP then use the RSCP measurement quantity for event 3Ameasurement. The physical unit is dBm.

l If select AUTO then use the Ec/N0 measurement quantity for event 3A measurement ifRNC receives the Ec/No 2D firstly, or use the RSCP measurement quantity for event 3Ameasurement if RNC receives the RSCP 2D firstly.


Set it based on the cell location in the network.

Relevant Commands

For parameters oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set them through SETINTERRATHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERRATHOCOV.

For parameters oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, andmodify them through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.



2-57

2.4.5 RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop ThresholdsThis set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurementevents when RSCP is used for measurement.

Parameter IDInterRATCSThd2DRSCP (Inter-RAT CS measure start RSCP THD)

INTERRATR99PSTHD2DRSCP (Inter-RAT R99 PS measure start RSCP THD)

INTERRATHTHD2DRSCP (Inter-RAT H measure start RSCP THD)

InterRATCSThd2FRSCP (Inter-RAT CS measure stop RSCP THD)

INTERRATR99PSTHD2FRSCP (Inter-RAT R99 PS measure stop RSCP THD)

INTERRATHTHD2FRSCP (Inter-RAT H measure stop RSCP THD)

Value Range-115 to -25

Physical Value Range-115 dBm to -25 dBm, step 1 dBm

Parameter SettingThe default values are as follows:l InterRatCSThd2DRSCP is -100 dBm;

l InterRatCSThd2FRSCP is -97 dBm;

l INTERRATR99PSTHD2DRSCP and INTERRATHTHD2DRSCP is -110 dBm;

l INTERRATR99PSTHD2FRSCP and INTERRATHTHD2FRSCP is -107dBm.

For the detailed descriptions, refer to 2.2.5 Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-BasedInter-Frequency Measurement. For multiRAB services, use the configuration of CS serviceif there exits CS service.

Impact on the Network PerformanceEvents 2D and 2F are the compressed mode start/stop switches. Because different service typesmay have different requirements on the signal quality and different inter-RAT handover policiesto be adopted, the inter-RAT measurement start/stop thresholds are classified here according toCS, PS.

Set the event 2D thresholds to a greater value if the compressed mode is expected to start asearly as possible; otherwise set it to a lower value. To reduce ping-pong start/stop of thecompressed mode, increase appropriately the difference between the 2D and 2F thresholds.

Relevant CommandsFor parameters oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set them through SETINTERRATHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERRATHOCOV.






2.4.6 Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop ThresholdsThis set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement eventwhen Ec/No is used for measurement.

Parameter ID

INTERRATCSTHD2DECN0 (Inter-RAT CS measure start Ec/No THD)

InterRATR99PsThd2DEcN0 (Inter-RAT R99 PS measure start Ec/No THD)

InterRATHThd2DEcN0 (Inter-RAT H measure start Ec/No THD)

INTERRATCSTHD2FECN0 (Inter-RAT CS measure stop Ec/No THD)

InterRATR99PsThd2FEcN0 (Inter-RAT R99 PS measure stop Ec/No THD)

InterRATHThd2FEcN0 (Inter-RAT H measure stop Ec/No THD)

Value Range

-24 to 0


-24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB

Parameter Setting

The default values are as follows:l INTERRATCSTHD2DECN0 is -14dB;

l INTERRATCSTHD2FECN0 is -12dB;

l InterRATR99PsThd2DEcN0 and InterRATHThd2DEcN0 is -15dB;

l InterRATR99PsThd2FEcN0 and InterRATHThd2FEcN0 is -13dB.

For the detailed descriptions, refer to 2.2.5 Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-BasedInter-Frequency Measurement. For multiRAB service, use the configuration of CS service ifthere exists CS service.


Events 2D and 2F are the compressed mode start/stop switches. Because different service typesmay require different signal qualities and different inter-RAT handover policies, the inter-RATmeasurement start/stop thresholds are classified here according to CS, PS and signaling.

Set the event 2D threshold to a greater value if the compressed mode is expected to start as earlyas possible; otherwise set it to a lower value. To eliminate ping-pong start/stop of the compressedmode, increase appropriately the difference between the 2D and 2F thresholds.



2-59

Relevant Commands


For parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, andmodify them through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.

2.4.7 Inter-RAT Handover Judging ThresholdsInter-RAT handover judging thresholds involve the inter-RAT CS service handover judgingthreshold TARGETRATCSTHD and the inter-RAT PS service handover judging thresholdTARGETRATR99PSTHD, TARGETRATHTHD.

Parameter ID

TARGETRATCSTHD

TARGETRATR99PSTHD

TARGETRATHTHD

Value Range

0 to 63


-110 dBmto -48 dBm

(0 corresponds to the value lower than -110 dBm; 1 corresponds to -110 dBm; 2 corresponds to-109 dBm; ...; 63 corresponds to -48 dBm)

Parameter Setting

The default values are 16, namely, -95 dBm.

This set of parameters are used for inter-RAT coverage handover evaluation at the RNC side,that is, Tother_RATin the formula introduced below. It is the absolute threshold of inter-RAT cellquality (RSSI) at the time of inter-RAT handover judging.

If the inter-RATquality in the inter-RAT measurement report obtained at a moment satisfies thefollowing condition:

Mother_RAT + CIO ≥ Tother_RAT + H/2

Then start the delay trigger timer Trigger-Timer, and handover judgment is made after the timerexpires. If the inter-RAT quality satisfies the following condition before the timer gets expired:

Mother_RAT + CIO < Tother_RAT - H/2

Then the timer stops timing, and the RNC goes on waiting for receiving of the inter-RATmeasurement report.





Impact on the Network PerformanceConfigure these parameters differently according to different policies. If the MS can be handedover only after the GSM cell quality is good enough, this parameter can be increased properly,-85 dBm for example.

Relevant CommandsFor parameters oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set them through SETINTERRATHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERRATHOCOV.

For parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, andmodify them through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.

2.4.8 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT HandoverThis describes the time to trigger related to inter-RAT handovers. In coverage-oriented inter-RAT handovers, the time-to-trigger parameters include time-to-trigger for 2D (TrigTime2D),time-to-trigger for 2F (TrigTime2F) and time-to-trigger for 3A (TrigTime3A).

IDTrigTime2D

TrigTime2F

TrigTime3A



SettingThe default values of TrigTime3A, TrigTime2D, and TrigTime2F are D0, D320, andD1280 respectively.

The previous simulation results show that the hysteresis can effectively reduce the averagenumber of handovers and mis-decisions and avoid unnecessary handovers. UEs with differentmoving speeds vary in their responses to the event delay trigger value. UEs moving in a highspeed are sensitive to the time-to-trigger value, while UEs moving in a slow speed are slow tothe time-to-trigger value and cause fewer ping-pong handovers and wrong handovers. Therefore,the time-to-trigger value can be set to a comparatively high value for the cells where most UEsmove in a high speed and can be set to a comparatively low value for the cells where most UEsmove in a low speed. The time-to-trigger parameters need to be adjusted based on the actualnetwork statistics.

Table 2-13 lists the value ranges and recommended values of time-to-trigger parameters relatedto inter-RAT handovers.



2-61

Table 2-13 List of time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-RAT hard handovers


5 640 to 1280 1280

50 240 to 640 640

120 240 to 640 640


Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the time-to-trigger values are, the lower the average handover frequency is; but theincrease of the time-to-trigger setting increases the risk of call drop.

Related CommandsFor the RNC-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:

Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query the time-to-trigger values related to inter-RAT handovers.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, andMOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify the time-to-trigger values related to inter-RAThandovers.

2.4.9 Hysteresis Related to the Coverage-Based Inter-RATHandover

This describes the trigger hystereses for the 3A, 2D, 2F events, and inter-RAT handovers.

IDHystfor3A

Hystfor2D

Hystfor2F

HystforInterRAT

Value RangeHystfor2D and Hystfor2F: 0 to 29

Hystfor3A and HystforInterRAT: 0 to 15

Physical ScopeHystfor2D and Hystfor2F: 0 dB to 14.5 dB, with the step of 0.5 dB





Hystfor3A and HystforInterRAT: 0 dB to 7.5 dB, with the step of 0.5 dB

Settingl The default values of Hystfor3A, Hystfor2D, and Hystfor2F are 4, namely 2 dB.

l The default value of HystforInterRAT is 0, namely 0 dB.

HystforInterRAT aims to prevent the mis-decision caused by unexpected jitters of signalsduring inter-RAT handover decisions. HystforInterRAT and the inter-RAT handover decisionthreshold determine whether to trigger inter-RAT handovers.

The simulation result shows that in a cell where the average moving speed of UEs is high, forexample a cell that covers highways, HystforInterRAT can be set to 1.5, because in the cellthe hypsography is flat and there are few barriers, which causes a small shadow fading variation.In a cell where the average moving speed of UEs is low, there are usually many tall buildings,so the shadow fading variation is comparatively big, and HystforInterRAT can be set to 3.0.

The settings of the hystereses related to coverage-based inter-RAT handover are similar to thatof the hestereses related to coverage-based inter-frequency handover. For details, refer to 2.2.3Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the hysteresis is, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability is, the moreping-pong effect is suppressed, and the more slowly the handover algorithm responds to signalchanges. If the inter-RAT handover hysteresis is set to an excessively high value, the GSM cellto which the UE hands over must have a good quality. Therefore, the conditions for triggeringthe inter-RAT handover decision are hard to be satisfied, and the call drop rate increases.

Related CommandsFor the RNC-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters: use SETINTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query the inter-RAT handoverhysteresis.

For the cell-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters: use ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, and MODCELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify the inter-RAT handover hysteresis.

2.4.10 Time to Trigger for Verified GSM CellsThis describes the delay trigger time of the GSM cells of which the BSIC is already verifiedwhen the periodical report mode is used for the inter-RAT measurement. If the signal quality ofa GSM neighboring cell always satisfies the conditions for the inter-RAT handover decision andis in the verified state in the time length stipulated by this parameter value, the system starts theinter-RAT handover to the GSM neighboring cell.

IDTimeToTrigForVerify

Value Range0 to 64000



2-63

Physical Scope

0 ms to 64000 ms

Setting

The default value is 0, namely that the handover is implemented immediately.

As described in the section about the inter-RAT handover decision threshold, the triggercondition for inter-RAT handover decision is as follows:

Mother_RAT + CIO ≥ Tother_RAT + H/2

If the quality of the GSM neighboring cell meets the preceding condition, the system starts thetrigger timer. The system then implements the handover decision after timeout if the quality ofthe GSM neighboring cell always meets the preceding condition throughout the time length ofthe timer. The time length of the trigger timer is called the delay trigger time.

The delay trigger time and hysteresis are used to prevent mis-decisions caused by signal jittersduring inter-RAT handover decisions.

Considering that the UE is on the edge of the system, TimeToTrigForVerify should be set toa comparatively low value. Because the GSM cells of which the BSIC is already verified usuallyhave good performance, TimeToTrigForVerify should be set to 0, namely that the handoveris implemented immediately.


The higher the time-to-trigger parameters are, the smaller the average number of handovers is,and the possibility of call drops increases.

Related Commands


Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to queryTimeToTrigForVerify.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, andMOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify TimeToTrigForVerify.

2.4.11 Time to Trigger for Non-Verified GSM CellsThis describes the delay trigger time of the GSM cell of which the BSIC is not verified whenthe periodical report mode is used for the inter-RAT measurement. If the signal quality of a GSMneighboring cell always satisfies the conditions for the inter-RAT handover decision and is inthe non-verified state in the time length specified by this parameter, the system starts the inter-RAT handover to the GSM neighboring cell.

ID

TimeToTrigForNonVerify





Value Range

0 to 64000, 65535

Physical Scope

The physical scope of TimeToTrigForNonVerify is 0 ms to 64000 ms or 65535 ms. IfTimeToTrigForNonVerify is set to 65535, the RNC does not allow handovers to the GSMcells that are not verified.

Setting

The default value of TimeToTrigForNonVerify is 0, namely that the handovers to the non-verified GSM cells are not allowed.


The higher the time-to-trigger parameters are, the smaller the average number of handovers is,and the possibility of call drops increases.

Related Commands


Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to queryTimeToTrigForVerify.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, andMOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify TimeToTrigForVerify.

2.4.12 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RATHandover

This parameter is used for measurement control of event 3A when the event reporting mode isadopted for the inter-RAT measurement. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorer thanthis threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 3A is satisfied.

Parameter ID

Based on different inter-RAT measurement quantities in use and different borne services, thisparameter can be categorized as follows:

l USEDFREQCSTHDECN0 (Inter-RAT CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)

l USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 (Inter-RAT R99 PS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)

l USEDFREQHTHDECN0 (Inter-RAT H Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)

l USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP (Inter-RAT CS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)

l USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP (Inter-RAT R99 PS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)

l USEDFREQHTHDRSCP (Inter-RAT R99 PS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)



2-65

Value Range

USEDFREQCSTHDECN0, USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and USEDFREQHTHDECN0:-24 to 0

USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP, USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and USEDFREQHTHDRSCP:-115 to -25


USEDFREQCSTHDECN0, USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and USEDFREQHTHDECN0:-24 dB to 0 dB

USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP, USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and USEDFREQHTHDRSCP:-115 dBm to -25 dBm

Parameter Setting

The default values for each parameter are as follows:

l USEDFREQCSTHDECN0: -12 dB

l USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0: -13 dB

l USEDFREQHTHDECN0: -13 dB

l USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP: -97 dB

l USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP: -107 dB

l USEDFREQHTHDRSCP: -107 dB

Factors to be considered while setting these parameters:

Only when the quality of the current used frequency satisfies QUsed ≤ TUsed - H3a/2 and thequality of target frequency satisfies Mother_RAT + CIO ≥ Tother_RAT + H/2, delay the time fortriggering the timer when the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-RAT measurement. A3A event is report upon expiry of the timer.

where,

l QUsed: estimated quality of the UTRAN frequency currently used.

l Tused: indicates the quality threshold for the inter-RAT frequency currently used.

l Mother_RAT: indicates the inter-RAT (GSM RSSI) measurement results.

l Tother_RAT: indicates the threshold for judging the inter-RAT handover.

l Cell individual offset (CIO): indicates the offset set by inter-RAT cells.

l H: indicates the hysteresis. The setting on the hysteresis reduces incorrect judgement causedby jitter signals.

When the cell signal quality of current frequency is poor and is lower than the threshold definedby this parameter, infer that the current frequency cannot better satisfy the coverage requirementof current service. The event 2F indicates that the current frequency quality is restored.Therefore, this parameter should be set less than the trigger threshold of event 2F or equal to thethreshold of event 2D.

For composite services, use the parameters configured for CS services.





Impact on the Network PerformanceHigher values of these parameters get event 3A to be more easily triggered. When the value ofthis parameter is too high, the UE may perform handover even when the signal quality is goodin current system.

Relevant CommandsParameter oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SETINTERRATHOCOV and query it through LST INTERRATHOCOV.

Parameter oriented to the cell inter-RAT handover algorithm, add it through ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, and modifyit through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.

2.4.13 Inter-RAT Measurement Timer LengthThis describes the effective time length of the inter-RAT measurement. If no proper inter-RATcell is found (for example no 3A event report is received or no periodic report meets the triggerconditions of inter-RAT handovers) till the timer expires, the system will stop the inter-RATmeasurement, disables the compressed mode, and waits for the triggering of another inter-RATmeasurement.

IDInterRATMeasTime

Value Range0 to 512

Physical Scope0 means that the system does not start the inter-RAT measurement timer.

1 to 512 means 1 s to 512 s.

SettingThe default value is 60, namely 60 s. When setting the thresholds, consider the following factors:

InterRATMeasTime aims to prevent that the handover conditions are not available and thecompressed mode is kept for a long time when the UE does not move or is moving in a lowspeed. The service quality is adversely affected and the total available capacity decreases if thecompressed mode is kept for a long time.

Most inter-RAT handovers can be finished in 60 s.

Impact on the Network Performancel If InterRATMeasTime is excessively low, the UE cannot finish inter-RAT handovers.

l If InterRATMeasTime is excessively high, it cannot help improve the service quality.

For the acutal network, statistics can be made to obtain the delay for a successful inter-RAThandover to get a proper value of InterRATMeasTime that satisfies most UEs.



2-67

Related Commands

For the RNC-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameter:

Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and use LST INTERRATHOCOV to queryInterRATMeasTime.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, use LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query,and use MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify InterRATMeasTime.

2.4.14 Retry Period of 3A EventThis parameter specifies the 3A event retry period.

ID

PeriodFor3A

Value Range

1 to 64

Physical Scope

500 ms to 32000 ms, step is 500 ms.

If the RNC fails to handover to all the target cells of the 3A event, the RNC periodically retriesto launch handover to the target cells failed by load cause.

Setting

The default value is 1, namely 500 ms.


The lower the parameter is，the more easily handover to GSM cell，but the processing resourceof WCDMA cell will be increased.

Related Commands



2.4.15 Maximum Retry Times of 3A EventThis parameter specifies the 3A event maximum retry times.





IDAmntOfRpt3A

Value Range0 to 63



If the RNC fails to handover to all the target cells of the 3A event, the RNC periodically retriesto launch handover to the target cells failed by load cause for the 3A event maximum retry times.If the handover succeeds or the new 3A event report is received, the periodically retry processis stopped.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the parameter is，the more easily handover to GSM cell，but the processing resourceof WCDMA cell will be increased.

Related CommandsFor parameters oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set them through SETINTERRATHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERRATHOCOV.


2.4.16 Neighboring Cell Individual OffsetThis describes the neighboring cell individual offset for inter-RAT handovers.

IDCIOOffset


Physical Scope–50 dB to 50 dB




2-69

The UE adds the CIOOffset and CIO to the original measured value of the cell, and uses thesum as the measurement result for the UE intra-frequency handover decision. CIOOffset playsthe role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm..

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the sum is, the more easily inter-RAT handovers occur.

Related CommandsUse ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modifyCIOOffset.

2.4.17 Cell Individual OffsetThis describes the cell individual offset for inter-RAT handovers.

IDCIO




The UE adds the CIOOffset and CIO to the original measured value of the cell, and uses thesum as the measurement result for the UE intra-frequency handover decision. CIO plays therole of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm..

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the sum is, the more easily inter-RAT handovers occur.

Related CommandsUse ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modifyCIO.

2.5 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover ManagementParameters

The common configurable non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parametersare listed here.





Table 2-14 List of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters


Default Value

RelevantCommand

Level

1 CSServiceHOSwitchPSServiceHOSwitch

Inter-RAT servicehandover switch

OFF Set: ADDCELLHOCOMMQuery: LSTCELLHOCOMMModify: MODCELLHOCOMM

Cell

2 Hystfor3C Hysteresis of event3C

0 dB For RNCSet or modify:SETINTERRATHONCOVQuery: LSTINTERRATHONCOVFor CellSet: ADDCELLINTERRATHONCOVQuery: LSTCELLINTERRATHONCOVModify: MODCELLINTERRATHONCOV

RNC/Cell

3 TrigTime3C Time-to-Triggerfor event 3C

D640(640ms)

4 BSICVerify BSIC verifyselection switch

Required

5 TARGETRATCSTHDInterRATNCovHOPSThd

Non-Coverage-Based inter-RAThandover judgingthresholds

21, thatis, -90dBm

6 InterRATHOAttempts

Inter-RAThandover maxattempt times

16times

7 InterRATMeasTime

Inter-RAT measuretimer length

60 s

8 SNDLDINFO2GSMIND

Switch used to sendload information to2G

ON

9 NCOVHOON2GLDIND

Switch for non-coverage basedhandoveraccording to 2Gload information.

ON

10 CSHOOUT2GLOADTHD

2G load thresholdby inter-rathandover in CS-domain

80 %



2-71


Default Value

RelevantCommand

Level

11 PSHOOut2GloadThd

2G load thresholdby inter-rathandover in PS-domain

60 %

12 PeriodFor3C Retry period of 3Cevent

2000ms

13 AmntOfRpt3C Maximum retrytimes of 3C event

5

14 UsedFreqMeasQuantityForQos3A

Measurementquantity of 3Afrequency in QoShandover

CPICH_RSCP

Set: SETQOSHOQuery: LSTQOSHO

RNC

15 DlRscpQosHyst Frequency delay ofdownlink RSCPQoS

4 dB

16 DLQosMcTimerLen

DownLink Qosmeasurement timerlength

20 s

17 ULQosMcTimerLen

UpLink Qosmeasurement timerlength

20 s

2.5.1 Inter-RAT Service Handover SwitchThis describes the inter-RAT service handover switches. The parameters indicate whether thecell allows the triggering of CS and PS service handovers.

2.5.2 Hysteresis of Event 3CThis describes the trigger hysteresis of the 3C event in inter-RAT handovers that are not basedon coverage.

2.5.3 Time to Trigger for Event 3CThis describes the time to trigger the 3C event in inter-RAT handovers that are not based oncoverage.

2.5.4 BSIC Verify Selection SwitchThis describes the BSIC verify selection switch, which is used to control the non-coverage-basedinter-RAT measurement report. If it is set to Require, the reporting is allowed only after themeasured GSM cell identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded. If it is set to Not_Require, allthe measured cells can be reported so long as the report conditions are available, no matterwhether their BSICs are correctly decoded or not.

2.5.5 Non-Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Decision ThresholdsThis describes the non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover decision thresholds:InterRATNCovHOCSThd and InterRATNCovHOPSThd.

2.5.6 Maximum Number of Inter-RAT Handover Attempts





This describes the maximum number of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover attempts.

2.5.7 Inter-RAT Measurement Timer LengthThis describes the effective time length of the inter-RAT measurement. If no proper inter-RATcell is found, for example no 3C event report is received, till the timer expires, the system willstop inter-RAT measurement, disables the compressed mode, and waits for the triggering ofanother inter-RAT measurement.

2.5.8 Switch used to Send Load Information to 2GThis is a switch used to send load information to 2G, without direct impact on networkperformance. When it is set to ON, the RNC sends UMTS cell load information to the GSMduring the non-coverage based system relocation in or out process. When it is set to OFF, theRNC does not send UMTS cell load information to the GSM during the system relocation in orout process.

2.5.9 Switch for Non-Coverage Based Handover according to 2G Load InformationThis describes the switch for non-coverage based handover according to 2G load information.When it is set to ON, the RNC stops the non-coverage based system relocation out process ifthe GSM cell load exceeds the CS/PS dormain relocate GSM load Threshold.

2.5.10 2G Load Threshold by Inter-Rat Handover in CS-DomainThis parameter specifies the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in CS-domain.

2.5.11 2G Load Threshold by Inter-RAT Handover in PS-domainThis parameter specifies the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in PS-domain.



2.5.14 Measurement Quantity of 3A Frequency in QoS HandoverThis parameter is used to configure the used frequency measurement quantity for the 3A event.




2.5.1 Inter-RAT Service Handover SwitchThis describes the inter-RAT service handover switches. The parameters indicate whether thecell allows the triggering of CS and PS service handovers.

IDCSServiceHOSwitch

PSServiceHOSwitch

Value RangeEnum (ON, OFF)



2-73

Physical ScopeOpen, close

SettingThe default value is OFF.

The service handover is configured refers to the service handover attribute of each service andrelated parameters at network side. Once the service is set up, the related measurement isimmediately triggered and inter-RAT handover is performed.

The two switches need to be opened only when the service handover function is necessary. Bydefault, they are closed.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe inter-RAT service handover switches are set on the basis of the actual network handoverstrategy.

Related CommandsFor the cell-oriented handover parameters:

Use ADD CELLHOCOMM to set, MOD CELLHOCOMM to modify, and LSTCELLHOCOMM to query the inter-RAT service handover switches.

2.5.2 Hysteresis of Event 3CThis describes the trigger hysteresis of the 3C event in inter-RAT handovers that are not basedon coverage.

IDHystfor3C

Value Range0 to 15

Physical Scope0 dB to 7.5 dB, with the step of 0.5 dB

SettingThe default value is 0, namely 0 dB.

The 3C event means that the quality of a GSM cell is higher than an absolute threshold.

The 3C event is used for the inter-RAT load handovers and service handovers. When a GSMcell satisfies the following condition, the system triggers the 3C event and records the GSM cellin the 3C event trigger list. The 3C event is not repeatedly reported for the cells in the 3C eventtrigger list.





MotherRAT + CIOotherRAT ≥ TotherRAT + H3C/2

(prescribed in the TS25.331 protocol)

Where,

l H3C represents the hysteresis for the 3C event, namely Hystfor3C.

l TotherRAT represents the threshold for triggering the reporting of the 3C event of inter-RATcells, namely InterRATNCovHOCSThd or InterRATNCovHOPSThd.

When a cell in the 3C event trigger list satisfies the following condition:

MotherRAT + CIOotherRAT ≤ TotherRAT - H3C/2

(prescribed in 3GPP TS25.331)

the cell is deleted from the 3C event trigger list.

The hysteresis aims to avoid mis-decisions that are caused by transient fluctuations of signals.For details, refer to 2.2.3 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover.


The higher the hysteresis is, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability is, and themore ping-pong effect is suppressed. In this case, the handover algorithm responds to signalchanges more slowly. If Hystfor3C is set to an excessively high value, the GSM cell to whichthe UE hands over must have a good quality. Therefore, the conditions for triggering the inter-RAT handover decision are hard to be satisfied, and the call drop rate increases.

Related Commands

For the RNC-oriented non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:

Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to queryHystfor3C.

For the cell-oriented non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:

Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify Hystfor3C.

2.5.3 Time to Trigger for Event 3CThis describes the time to trigger the 3C event in inter-RAT handovers that are not based oncoverage.

ID

TrigTime3C

Value Range




2-75


SettingThe default value is D640, namely 640 ms.

The delay trigger time aims to avoid the occasional triggering of excessive event reports for ameasurement result. Considering that the period of the physical layer of UE reporting to Layer3 is 480 ms, TrigTime3C is set to 640, namely that the system reports the 3C event only whenat least two continuous measurement reports satisfy the condition for triggering the 3C event.The value of TrigTime3C can be optimized based on the actual radio environment.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the time-to-trigger parameters are, the smaller the average number of handovers is,and the possibility of call drops increases.

Related CommandsFor the RNC-oriented non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:

Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to queryTrigTime3C.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify TrigTime3C.

2.5.4 BSIC Verify Selection SwitchThis describes the BSIC verify selection switch, which is used to control the non-coverage-basedinter-RAT measurement report. If it is set to Require, the reporting is allowed only after themeasured GSM cell identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded. If it is set to Not_Require, allthe measured cells can be reported so long as the report conditions are available, no matterwhether their BSICs are correctly decoded or not.

IDBSICVerify

Value RangeREQUIRED, NOT_REQUIRE

Physical ScopeRequired, not required

SettingThe default value is REQUIRED.





The non-coverage-based handovers require a lower timeliness but a higher handover successrate of handovers, so the recommended value of BSICVerify is REQUIRED to ensure thereliability of handovers.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf BSICVerify is set to NOT_REQUIRE, handovers occur more easily. If BSICVerify is setto REQUIRED, handovers occur with higher reliability.


Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to queryBSICVerify.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify BSICVerify.

2.5.5 Non-Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover DecisionThresholds

This describes the non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover decision thresholds:InterRATNCovHOCSThd and InterRATNCovHOPSThd.

IDInterRATNCovHOCSThd

InterRATNCovHOPSThd

Value Range0 to 63

Physical Scope–110 dBm to –48 dBm

(0 represents a value lower than –110 dBm; 1 represents –110 dBm; 2 represents –109 dBm; ...63 represents –48 dBm.)

SettingThe default value is 21, namely –90 dBm.

For the decision formula, refer to 2.5.2 Hysteresis of Event 3C.

The thresholds for coverage-based handovers and non-coverage-based handovers aredistinguished to flexibly control handovers with different aims. The non-coverage-basedhandovers do not require a high timeliness but require a high success rate and good link qualitybefore and after the handovers, so the non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover decisionthreshold needs to be set to a high value.



2-77

For multi-RAB services, use the parameter configuration of CS service if CS services exist.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe values of inter-RAT handover decision thresholds vary according to the handover policy.To have UEs hand over only to the GSM cells with high quality, you can set the inter-RAThandover decision threshold to a comparatively high value, for example –85.


Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to queryInterRATNCovHOCSThd and InterRATNCovHOPSThd.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify InterRATNCovHOCSThd andInterRATNCovHOPSThd.

2.5.6 Maximum Number of Inter-RAT Handover AttemptsThis describes the maximum number of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover attempts.

IDInterRATHoAttempts

Value Range1 to 16

Physical Scope1 to 16 attempts


An inter-RAT handover involves many network nodes and is a complicated process, so the delayof the inter-RAT handover is long and the failure rate is comparatively high. Too many handoverfailures affect the call quality and increase the processing load of the network, soInterRATHoAttempts can be set to a proper value to limit handover failures.InterRATHoAttempts and InterRATMeasTime help reduce unnecessary inter-RATmeasurement (compressed mode) by limiting the number of handovers and time of inter-RATmeasurement respectively.

The number of inter-RAT handovers includes the number of attempts to hand over to the samecell and the number of attempts to hand over to different cells. If the penalty is introduced to theinter-RAT handovers, namely that the system prohibits handovers to the cells to which handovershave failed for a period. The penalty does not prohibit the UE from hand over to other cells.

InterRATHoAttempts can be set to 16 at the test stage and set to 1 to 3 in the actual application.





Impact on the Network Performancel The higher InterRATHoAttempts is, the higher the probability is for the UE performs

inter-RAT handovers.l The lower InterRATHoAttempts is, the smaller influence is on the network quality.

Unless in the test process, InterRATHoAttempts needs to be set to a comparatively lowvalue.


Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to queryInterRATHoAttempts.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify InterRATHoAttempts.

2.5.7 Inter-RAT Measurement Timer LengthThis describes the effective time length of the inter-RAT measurement. If no proper inter-RATcell is found, for example no 3C event report is received, till the timer expires, the system willstop inter-RAT measurement, disables the compressed mode, and waits for the triggering ofanother inter-RAT measurement.

IDInterRATMeasTime

Value Range0 to 512

Physical Scope0 means that the system does not start the inter-RAT measurement timer. 1 to 512 means 1 s to512 s.


InterRATMeasTime aims to prevent that the compressed mode is kept for a long time due tothe handover conditions are not available when the UE does not move or is moving in a lowspeed. The service quality is adversely affected and the total available capacity decreases if thecompressed mode is kept for a long time.

Most inter-RAT handovers can be finished in 60 s.

The compressed mode of coverage-based inter-RAT measurement can be closed by the 2F event,while the compressed mode of non-coverage-based inter-RAT measurement cannot be closedby the 2F event but by the measurement timer. Therefore, do not set the timer of the non-coverage-based inter-RAT measurement to 0 if possible.



2-79

Impact on the Network Performancel If InterRATMeasTime is excessively low, the UE cannot implement inter-RAT

handovers.l If InterRATMeasTime is excessively high, it has no effect on improvement of the service

quality.

For the actual network, statistics can be made to obtain the delay for a successful inter-RAThandover to get a proper value of InterRATMeasTime that satisfies most UEs.


Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to queryInterRATMeasTime.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify InterRATMeasTime.

2.5.8 Switch used to Send Load Information to 2GThis is a switch used to send load information to 2G, without direct impact on networkperformance. When it is set to ON, the RNC sends UMTS cell load information to the GSMduring the non-coverage based system relocation in or out process. When it is set to OFF, theRNC does not send UMTS cell load information to the GSM during the system relocation in orout process.

IDSNDLDINFO2GSMIND

Value RangeOFF, ON

Physical ScopeOFF, ON

SettingThe default value is ON.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter should be used with the WCDMA and GSM load balancing function.






Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to querySNDLDINFO2GSMIND.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify SNDLDINFO2GSMIND.

2.5.9 Switch for Non-Coverage Based Handover according to 2GLoad Information

This describes the switch for non-coverage based handover according to 2G load information.When it is set to ON, the RNC stops the non-coverage based system relocation out process ifthe GSM cell load exceeds the CS/PS dormain relocate GSM load Threshold.

IDNCOVHOON2GLDIND

Value RangeOFF, ON

Physical ScopeOFF, ON


Impact on the Network PerformanceWhen the switch is enabled, the loading of GSM network is taken into account in the WCDMAand GSM load balancing function, thus avoiding too much impact on the GSM network.


Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to queryNCOVHOON2GLDIND.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify NCOVHOON2GLDIND.

2.5.10 2G Load Threshold by Inter-Rat Handover in CS-DomainThis parameter specifies the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in CS-domain.

IDCSHOOUT2GLOADTHD



2-81

Value Range

0 to 100

Physical Scope

0% to 100%

Setting

The default value is 80, namely 80%.

This parameter defines the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in CS-domain.


The higher the parameter is, more easily to handover, but take much impact on the GSM cellload.

Related Commands

For the RNC-oriented non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:

Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to queryCSHOOUT2GLOADTHD.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify CSHOOUT2GLOADTHD.

2.5.11 2G Load Threshold by Inter-RAT Handover in PS-domainThis parameter specifies the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in PS-domain.

ID

PSHOOut2GloadThd

Value Range

0 to 100

Physical Scope

0% to 100%

Setting


This parameter defines the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in PS-domain.





Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the parameter is, more easily to handover, but take much impact on the GSM cellload.


Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to queryPSHOOut2GloadThd.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify PSHOOut2GloadThd.


IDPeriodFor3C

Value Range1 to 64


If the RNC fails to handover to all the target cells of the 3C event, the RNC periodically retriesto launch handover to the target cells failed by load cause.


Impact on the Network PerformanceThe lower the parameter is，the more easily handover to GSM cell，but the processing resourceof WCDMA cell will be increased.


Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to queryPeriodFor3C.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify PeriodFor3C.



2-83


IDAmntOfRpt3C

Value Range0 to 63



If the RNC fails to handover to all the target cells of the 3C event, the RNC periodically retriesto launch handover to the target cells failed by load cause for the 3C event maximum retry times.If the handover succeeds or the new 3C event report is received, the periodically retry processis stopped.


The higher the parameter is，the more easily handover to GSM cell，but the processing resourceof WCDMA cell will be increased.


Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to queryAmntOfRpt3C.


Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query,and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify AmntOfRpt3C.

2.5.14 Measurement Quantity of 3A Frequency in QoS HandoverThis parameter is used to configure the used frequency measurement quantity for the 3A event.

IDUsedFreqMeasQuantityForQos3A

Value RangeCPICH_Ec/No, CPICH_RSCP





Physical ScopeCPICH_Ec/No, CPICH_RSCP

SettingThe default value is CPICH_RSCP.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe precondition is that the UE is moving to the edge of the cell. If there is intra-frequency cell,the Ec/No changes faster than RSCP, so the quality of the cell should be measured by Ec/No. Ifthere is no intra-frequency cell, the RSCP changes faster than Ec/No, the quality of the cellshould be measured by RSCP. If the measurement quantity is improper, handovers may not bedelayed, and thus call drop occurs.

Related CommandsUse SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query UsedFreqMeasQuantityForQos3A.


IDDlRscpQosHyst

Value Range-15 to 15

Physical Scope-15 dB to 15 dB.


In event-trigger mode, the frequency threshold for the inter-frequency, inter-rat measurementtriggered due to downlink QoS causes, and RSCP measurement quantity adopts the frequencythreshold of coverage measurement configured on the daemon minus this parameter.


The greater the delay, the more likely to trigger the 2B/3A event，more easily handover to thetarget cell.

Related CommandsUse SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query DlRscpQosHyst.



2-85


IDDLQosMcTimerLen

Value Range0 to 512

Physical Scope0 s to 512 s.


After DownLink Qos measurement starts, if no handover is performed, when this timer expires,the Qos measurement is stopped.




Related CommandsUse SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query DLQosMcTimerLen.


IDULQosMcTimerLen

Value Range0 to 512

Physical Scope0 s to 512 s.





Setting


After UpLink Qos measurement starts, if no handover is performed, when this timer expires, theQos measurement is stopped.





Related Commands

Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query ULQosMcTimerLen.

2.6 Blind Handover Management ParametersThis describes the blink handover management parameters.

Table 2-15 List of blind handover management parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 BlindHoFlag

Blindhandover flag

OFF For inter-frequency handovers:Set: ADD INTERFREQNCELLQuery: LSTINTERFREQNCELLModify: MODINTERFREQNCELLFor inter-RAT handovers:Set: ADD GSMNCELLQuery: LST GSMNCELLModify: MOD GSMNCELL

NCell

2 BlindHOPrio

Blindhandoverpriority

-

3 DRDEcN0Threshhold

Ec/N0threshold fordirect retry

-9 dB



2-87

2.6.1 Blind Handover FlagThis describes the blind handover flag, which indicates whether the blind handover is performed.In a blind handover, the UE can directly hands over to the neighboring cell without anymeasurement.

2.6.2 Blind Handover PriorityThis describes the blind handover priority. If BlindHOFlag is TRUE, BlindHOPrio can beused to appoint the blind handover priority for the neighboring cell.

2.6.3 Ec/N0 Threshold for Direct RetryIn DRD, this parameter is used to judge whether the quality condition of blind handover is met.

2.6.1 Blind Handover FlagThis describes the blind handover flag, which indicates whether the blind handover is performed.In a blind handover, the UE can directly hands over to the neighboring cell without anymeasurement.

ID

BlindHoFlag

Value Range

FALSE, TRUE

Physical Scope

None.

Setting

The default value is FALSE.

For the concentric cells with different frequencies, BlindHoFlag can be set to TRUE.


Set the parameter according to actual network handover strategies. It may affect KPIperformance concerning the cells if the blind handover is allowed in related cells. Especially theemergency blind handovers have more impact.

Related Commands

For the inter-frequency handovers:

Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set, LST INTERFREQNCELL to query, and MODINTERFREQNCELL to modify BlindHoFlag.

For the inter-RAT handovers:

Use ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modifyBlindHoFlag.





2.6.2 Blind Handover PriorityThis describes the blind handover priority. If BlindHOFlag is TRUE, BlindHOPrio can beused to appoint the blind handover priority for the neighboring cell.

IDBlindHOPrio

Value Range0 to 30

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingTable 2-16 lists the meanings of different blind handover priorities.

Table 2-16 List of blind handover priority sets

Bind Handover Priority Set Priority Cell Type

Inter-frequency emergencyblind handover

0 to 30 Inter-frequency cell

Inter-frequency non-emergency blind handover

0 to 15 Inter-frequency cell

Inter-RAT emergency blindhandover

0 to 30 Inter-RAT cell

Inter-RAT non-emergencyblind handover

0 to 15 Inter-RAT cell

The configuration of the non-emergency blind handover priority (0–15) of cells must guaranteea reasonable handover success rate and avoid the high call drop rate. The scenarios of the non-emergency blind handover priority are concentric cells with different frequencies and macrocells that act as the neighboring cells of micro cells.

The cells with priority 16–30 have a lower requirement on the blind handover success rate,because the customer satisfaction is not directly affected. The scenarios of the cells with priority16–30 are the cells in the UE's moving direction and the inter-frequency cells with a highhandover probability.

The specific value in the value ranges is not strictly required, because it is used to flexibly controlthe preferable target cells of blind handovers. For the inter-frequency blind handover cells, youcan randomly select a value for the handover priority between 0 and 10, while you must carefullyselect a value range (either 0–15 or 16–30, which indicates non-emergency inter-frequency blindhandovers or emergency inter-frequency blind handovers) at first.



2-89

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the blind handovers are enabled, the traffic statistics indexes, such as the inter-frequency orinter-RAT handover success rate and call drop rate, are affected to a certain degree. Especiallythe emergency blind handovers have more impact.

Related CommandsFor the inter-frequency handovers:

Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set, LST INTERFREQNCELL to query, and MODINTERFREQNCELL to modify BlindHOPrio.


Use ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modifyBlindHOPrio.

2.6.3 Ec/N0 Threshold for Direct RetryIn DRD, this parameter is used to judge whether the quality condition of blind handover is met.

IDDRDEcN0Threshhold



SettingThe default value is -18, namely -9 dB.

This threshold is the minimum Ec/N0 value required for normal communications of UE. Inselecting the candidate cell of DRD, the cell whose Ec/N0 value is smaller than this thresholdof inter-frequency cells is filtered out.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter specifies the domain for inter-frequency blind handover. The higher theparameter, more easily to blind handover.

Related CommandsFor the inter-frequency handovers:

Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set, LST INTERFREQNCELL to query, and MODINTERFREQNCELL to modify DRDEcN0Threshhold.






Use ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modifyDRDEcN0Threshhold.

2.7 Cell Selection and Reselection ParametersThis describes the cell selection and reselection parameters.

Table 2-17 List of cell selection and reselection parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 IdleQhyst1sIdleQhyst2sConnQhyst1sConnQhyst2s

Measurement hysteresisparameters

Qhyst1s: 2 (4dB)Qhyst2s: 1 (2dB)

Set: ADD CELLSELRESELQuery: LSTCELLSELRESELModify: MODCELLSELRESEL

Cell

2 IdleQoffset1snIdleQoffset2snConnQoffset1snConnQoffset2snQoffset1sn

Load leveloffsets

0 dB For intra-frequency cells:Set: ADDINTRAFREQNCELLQuery: LSTINTRAFREQNCELLModify: MODINTRAFREQNCELLFor inter-frequency cells:Set: ADDINTERFREQNCELLQuery: LSTINTERFREQNCELLModify: MODINTERFREQNCELLFor inter-RAT cells:Set: ADD GSMNCELLQuery: LST GSMNCELLModify: MOD GSMNCELL

3 Qqualmin Minimumqualitycriterion

–18 dB Set: ADD CELLSELRESELQuery: LSTCELLSELRESEL



2-91

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

4 Qrxlevmin Minimumaccess level

Modify: MODCELLSELRESEL

–58, namely –115 dBm

5 IdleSintrasearchConnSintrasearchIdleSintersearchConnSintersearchSsearchRat

Cellreselectionstartthresholds

IdleSintrasearch andConnSintrasearch: 5,namely 10 dBIdleSintersearch andConnSintersearch: 4,namely 8 dBSsearchRat: 2,namely 4 dB

6 Treselections Reselectionhysteresistime

1 s

7 Qrxlevmin Minimumaccess levelfor GSMcells

–58, namely –115 dBm

Set: ADD GSMNCELLQuery: LST GSMNCELLModify: MOD GSMNCELL

NCell

8 Qsearch_I Levelthreshold for2G MS inidle mode tosearch for3G cells

7, namelyalways

N/A GSM

9 FDD_Qoffset 3G cellreselectionsignal leveloffset

0 dB

10

FDD_Qmin 3G cellreselectionsignal levelthreshold

–10 dB

2.7.1 Measurement Hysteresis Parameters





This describes the measurement hysteresis parameters: measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) andmeasurement hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s). The measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) and measurementhysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s) are used for the UE to measure the service cell CPICH RSCP (Qhyst1s)and CPICH Ec/No (Qhyst2s) respectively. IdleQhyst1s and IdleQhyst2s are used in the idlestate, ConnQhyst1s and ConnQhyst2s are used in the connecting state.

2.7.2 Cell Reselection OffsetThis describes the cell offset used for cell selection and reselection. In the processes of cellselection and cell reselection, the offset of the cells that use the CPICH Ec/No measurementvalue is QOffset2sn, the offset of the cells that use the CPICH RSCP measurement value isQOffset1sn.

2.7.3 Minimum Quality CriterionThis describes the minimum access threshold of PCPICH Ec/N0. The UE can reside in the cellonly when CPICH Ec/N0 measured by the UE is higher than this threshold.

2.7.4 Minimum Access LevelThis describes the minimum access threshold of PCPICH RSCP. The UE can reside in the cellonly when CPICH RSCP measured by the UE is higher than this threshold.

2.7.5 Cell Reselection Start ThresholdsThis describes the cell reselection start thresholds: intra-frequency cell reselection start threshold(Sintrasearch), inter-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Sintersearch), and inter-RATcell reselection start threshold (SsearchRat). IdleSintrasearch and IdleSintersearch are usedin idle state. ConnSintrasearch and ConnSintersearch are used in connecting state.

2.7.6 Reselection Hysteresis TimeThis describes reselection hysteresis time. If the quality of signals of a cell (CPICH Ec/Nomeasured by the UE) is better than that of the current cell where the UE is residing throughoutthe reselection hysteresis time, the UE reselects the cell as the next residing cell.

2.7.7 Minimum Access Level of Inter-RAT CellsThis describes the minimum access level threshold of inter-RAT cells, such as the GSM, DCS,or PCS cells. A UE can reside in a cell only when the signal strength measured by the UE ishigher than the threshold.

2.7.8 Signal Level Threshold for MS in 2G Idle Mode to Search for 3G CellsThis describes the signal level threshold for which a GSM MS in idle mode starts to search for3G cells.

2.7.9 Signal Level Offset for 3G Cell ReselectionThis describes the signal level offset for 3G cell reselection. A 3G cell can be reselected whenthe average signal level of the target 3G cell is higher than that of the current serving cell by atleast the amount defined by FDD_Qosffset.

2.7.10 Signal Level Threshold for 3G Cell ReselectionThis describes the signal level threshold for 3G cell reselection. Only when the signal level inthe target 3G cell is higher than the serving cell by at least the amount defined byFDD_Qmin, the target 3G cell may become a candidate cell for reselection.

2.7.1 Measurement Hysteresis ParametersThis describes the measurement hysteresis parameters: measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) andmeasurement hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s). The measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) and measurementhysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s) are used for the UE to measure the service cell CPICH RSCP (Qhyst1s)and CPICH Ec/No (Qhyst2s) respectively. IdleQhyst1s and IdleQhyst2s are used in the idlestate, ConnQhyst1s and ConnQhyst2s are used in the connecting state.



2-93

ID

IdleQhyst1s

IdleQhyst2s

ConnQhyst1s

ConnQhyst2s

Value Range

0 to 20, 255

Physical Scope

0 dB to 40 dB, with the step of 2 dB

When the value of measurement hysteresis is 255, the measurement hysteresis is invalid.

Setting

The default value of Qhyst1s is 2, namely 4 dB. The default value of Qhyst2s is 1, namely 2dB.

Qhyst2s is an optional configuration. If Qhyst2s is not configured, the value of the measurementhysteresis is that of Qhyst1s.

According to the R rule, the measurement value of the current serving cell plus the hysteresis isused in the cell reselection sequencing. The value of the measurement hysteresis is related tothe slow fading feature of the area where the cell is.

The measurement hysteresis aims to prevent the ping-pong effect of the cell reselection, whichis caused by the slow fading when the UE is on the edge of the cell. The ping-pong effect maytrigger frequent location updates (idle mode), URA updates (URA_PCH), or cell updates(CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH), and thus increase the load of network signaling and theconsumption of UE batteries.

Set a proper measurement hysteresis to reduce as much as possible effect of the slow fading aswell as ensuring timely cell updates of the UE. According to the CPICH RSCP emulation reportof inter-frequency hard handovers, the measurement hysteresis ranges 4 dBm to 5 dBm and isset to 4 dBm by default when the slow fading variance is 8 dB and the relative distance is 20 m.

In the cells the slow fading variance is big and the average moving speed of UEs is low, increasethe measurement hysteresis to reduce the ping-pong effect of the cell reselection.

In the cells where the slow fading variance is low and the average moving speed of UEs is high,for example the suburbs and countryside, reduce the measurement hysteresis to guarantee timelylocation updates of UEs.


The higher the measurement hysteresis is, the less likely it is for various types of cell reselectionsto occur, and the better the slow fading resistance capability is, but the slower the system reactsto the environment changes.





Related Commands

Use ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST CELLSELRESEL to query, and MODCELLSELRESEL to modify the measurement hysteresis.

2.7.2 Cell Reselection OffsetThis describes the cell offset used for cell selection and reselection. In the processes of cellselection and cell reselection, the offset of the cells that use the CPICH Ec/No measurementvalue is QOffset2sn, the offset of the cells that use the CPICH RSCP measurement value isQOffset1sn.

ID

IdleQoffset1sn

IdleQoffset2sn

ConnQoffset1sn

ConnQoffset2sn

Value Range

–50 to 50

Physical Scope

–50 dB to 50 dB

Setting


IdleQoffset1sn and IdleQoffset2sn are used in idle state. ConnQoffset1sn andConnQoffset2sn are used in connecting state. ConnQoffset1sn and ConnQoffset2sn are validonly when SIB12Ind is TRUE, namely that there are SIB12 system messages. In addition, inthe inter-RAT cell selection and reselection processes, there is no QOffset2sn but onlyQOffset1sn, and there is no difference as to Idle and Conn.

It is the offset for the CPICH measurement value of neighboring cells. QOffset1sn is used forthe RSCP measurement. The measurement value of neighboring cells minus the offset is usedin the cell reselection sequencing. QOffset2sn is used for the Ec/No measurement. Themeasurement value of neighboring cells minus the offset is used in the cell reselectionsequencing.

The cell reselection offset plays the role of shifting the cell boarder in the cell selection andreselection algorithm. It is configured by network planners according to the actual situation.


l The higher the cell reselection offset is, the lower probability that nearby cells are selected.

l The lower the cell reselection offset is, the higher probability that nearby cells are selected.



2-95

Related CommandsFor the intra-frequency cell selection and reselection:

Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to set, LST INTRAFREQNCELL to query, and MODINTRAFREQNCELL to modify the cell reselection offset.

For the inter-frequency cell selection and reselection:

Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set, LST INTERFREQNCELL to query, and MODINTERFREQNCELL to modify the cell reselection offset.

For the inter-RAT cell selection and reselection:

Use ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modifythe cell reselection offset.

2.7.3 Minimum Quality CriterionThis describes the minimum access threshold of PCPICH Ec/N0. The UE can reside in the cellonly when CPICH Ec/N0 measured by the UE is higher than this threshold.

IDQqualmin



SettingThe default value is –18.

For the FDD mode, the definition of cell selection S rule in 3GPP 25.304 is as follows:

Srxlev > 0 and Squal > 0

Where,

Squal = Qqualmeas – Qqualmin

Srxlev = Qrxlevmeas – Qrxlevmin – Pcompensation

l Qqualmeas is the quality measured for the cell and is represented by CPICH Ec/NO.

l Qrxlevmeas is RSCP of CPICH.

l Qrxlevmin is the minimum pilot signal reception power of the current cell.

l Pcompensation = max (UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH – P_MAX, 0)– UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH is the maximum uplink transmit power when the UE

accesses the cell, namely MaxAllowedULTxPower.– P_MAX is the maximum radio frequency output power of a UE.





Impact on the Network Performancel The higher Qqualmin is, the more difficult it is for the UE to reside in the cell.

l The lower Qqualmin is, the easier it is for the UE to reside in the cell, but it is possiblethat the UE cannot receive the system messages that are sent through the PCCPCH.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST CELLSELRESEL to query, and MODCELLSELRESEL to modify Qqualmin.

2.7.4 Minimum Access LevelThis describes the minimum access threshold of PCPICH RSCP. The UE can reside in the cellonly when CPICH RSCP measured by the UE is higher than this threshold.

IDQrxlevmin



–58 means –115 dBm; –57 means –113 dBm; …; –13 means 25 dBm.

SettingThe default value is –58, namely –115 dBm.

For the definition of Qrxlevmin, refer to 2.7.3 Minimum Quality Criterion.

The settings of Qrxlevmin and Qqualmin need to be considered comprehensively.

Impact on the Network Performancel The higher Qrxlevmin is, the more difficult it is for the UE to reside in the cell.

l The lower Qrxlevmin is, the easier it is for the UE to reside in the cell. But ifQrxlevmin is excessively low, it is possible that the UE cannot receive the system messagesthat are sent through the PCCPCH.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST CELLSELRESEL to query, and MODCELLSELRESEL to modify Qrxlevmin.

2.7.5 Cell Reselection Start ThresholdsThis describes the cell reselection start thresholds: intra-frequency cell reselection start threshold(Sintrasearch), inter-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Sintersearch), and inter-RAT



2-97

cell reselection start threshold (SsearchRat). IdleSintrasearch and IdleSintersearch are usedin idle state. ConnSintrasearch and ConnSintersearch are used in connecting state.

IDIdleSintrasearch

IdleSintersearch

ConnSintrasearch

ConnSintersearch

SsearchRat



Settingl The default values of IdleSintrasearch and ConnSintrasearch are 5, namely 10 dB.

l The default values of IdleSintersearch and ConnSintersearch are 4, namely 8 dB.

l The default value of Ssearchrat is 2, namely 4 dB.

In 3GPP 25.304, the cell reselection start threshold is defined as follows:

1. If Sx <= Sintrasearch, the UE implements the intra-frequency measurement and starts theintra-frequency cell reselection.

2. If Sx <= Sintersearch, the UE implements the inter-frequency measurement and starts theinter-frequency cell reselection.

3. If Sx <= SserachRAT, the UE implements the inter-RAT measurement and starts the inter-RAT cell reselection.

Where, Sx = UE measurement value – Qqualmin.

When the UE detects that the quality of serving cell (CPICH Ec/No measured by the UE) islower than the minimum quality standard (Qqualmin) plus the cell reselection start threshold,the UE starts the cell reselection process.

The intra-frequency cell reselection has a priority higher than the inter-frequency cell reselectionand inter-RAT cell reselection, the intra-frequency cell reselection start threshold should behigher than the inter-frequency cell reselection start threshold and inter-RAT cell reselectionstart threshold.

Impact on the Network Performancel If the cell reselection threshold is set to a comparatively high value, the UE may frequently

start cell reselections, and the battery of the UE may be largely consumed.





l If the cell reselection threshold is set to a comparatively low value, it is difficult for cellreselections to be started, and the UE may not timely reside in the cells with good quality,affecting the quality of communication between the UTRAN and the UE.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST CELLSELRESEL to query, and MODCELLSELRESEL to modify the cell reselection thresholds.

2.7.6 Reselection Hysteresis TimeThis describes reselection hysteresis time. If the quality of signals of a cell (CPICH Ec/Nomeasured by the UE) is better than that of the current cell where the UE is residing throughoutthe reselection hysteresis time, the UE reselects the cell as the next residing cell.

ID

Treselections

Value Range

0 to 31

Physical Scope

0 s to 31 s

Setting


Treselections prevents ping-pong reselections between cells.

NOTE

0 corresponds to the default value that is prescribed in the protocol, and does not mean 0 s.

When setting Treselections, comply with the following principles:

1. Ensure that the UE can reselect a cell when crossing the non-soft-switch area of the celland that the UE timely performs location updates, cell updates, or URA updates whennecessary.

2. Ensure that the UE does not reselect a cell when it is in the soft-switch area of the cell. Inthis way, the unnecessary location updates, cell updates, and URA updates are avoided.

3. When setting Treselections, consider the difference between cells that cover differentareas, for example the cells covering highways and cells covering densely populated areas.Treselections in densely populated areas can be set to a high value and Treselections inthe areas where the average moving speed of UEs is high can be set to a low value.


l If Treselections is set to a comparatively low value, the ping-pong reselections may becaused.



2-99

l If Treselections is set to a comparatively high value, the cell reselection delay may becomeexcessively high, and thus cell reselections may be affected.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST CELLSELRESEL to query, and MODCELLSELRESEL to modify Treselections.

2.7.7 Minimum Access Level of Inter-RAT CellsThis describes the minimum access level threshold of inter-RAT cells, such as the GSM, DCS,or PCS cells. A UE can reside in a cell only when the signal strength measured by the UE ishigher than the threshold.

IDQrxlevmin



–58 means –115 dBm; –57 means –113 dBm; …; –13 means 25 dBm.


Similar to the S rule, mobile stations in the GSM, DCS, or PCS system also need to meet a pathloss standard to reside in a GSM, DCS, or PCS cell. The standard requires that the factor (C1)of the path loss rule should be higher than 0. C1 is defined as follows:

C1 = (A Max (B, 0))

Where,l A = RLA_C RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN;

l B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH – P

For the DCS 1800 system

l B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH + POWER OFFSET P;

l RLA_C: The measured value of average received signal strength

l RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN: The minimum signal strength needed by the access system,namely Qrxlevmin

l MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH: The maximum allowed transmit power when the UE accessesthe system

l POWER OFFSET: The power offset parameter of UEs in the DCS 1800 system; and isused with MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH





l P: The maximum radio frequency output power of a UE


l The higher Qrxlevmin is, the more difficult it is for the UE to reside in the cell.

l The lower Qrxlevmin is, the easier it is for the UE to reside in the cell.

But if Qrxlevmin is excessively low, it is possible that the UE cannot receive the systemmessages and paging messages of the cell.

Related Commands

Use ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modifyQrxlevmin.

2.7.8 Signal Level Threshold for MS in 2G Idle Mode to Search for3G Cells

This describes the signal level threshold for which a GSM MS in idle mode starts to search for3G cells.

ID

Qsearch_I

Value Range

0 to 15

Physical Scope

l If the threshold ranges 0 to 6, the GSM MS starts searching for 3G cells when the signallevel is lower than the threshold.

l If the threshold ranges 8 to 14, the GSM MS starts searching for 3G cells when the signallevel is higher than the threshold.

l If the threshold is 7, the GSM MS is always searching for 3G cells.

l If the threshold is 15, the GSM MS never searches for the 3G cells.

0 = –98 dBm, 1 = –94 dBm, ..., 6 = –74 dBm, 7 = (always), 8 = –78 dBm, 9 = –74 dBm, ...,14 = –54 dBm, 15 = (never)

Setting

The default value is 7, which indicates that the GSM MS in idle mode always searches for 3Gcells.


The setting of this parameter depends on the customer policy. The 3G cell is preferable duringthe interoperation of 3G and 2G.



2-101

Related CommandsThe parameter is invalid in the 3G network.

2.7.9 Signal Level Offset for 3G Cell ReselectionThis describes the signal level offset for 3G cell reselection. A 3G cell can be reselected whenthe average signal level of the target 3G cell is higher than that of the current serving cell by atleast the amount defined by FDD_Qosffset.

IDFDD_Qoffset

Value Range0 to 15

Physical Scope0 = (always select a cell if acceptable), 1 = –28 dB, 2 = –24 dB, ..., 15 = 28 dB


Impact on the Network PerformanceThe setting of this parameter depends on the customer policy. The 3G cell is preferable duringthe interoperation of 3G and 2G.

Related CommandsThe parameter is invalid in the 3G network.

2.7.10 Signal Level Threshold for 3G Cell ReselectionThis describes the signal level threshold for 3G cell reselection. Only when the signal level inthe target 3G cell is higher than the serving cell by at least the amount defined byFDD_Qmin, the target 3G cell may become a candidate cell for reselection.

IDFDD_Qmin

Value Range0 to 7

Physical Scope0 = –20 dB, 1 = –6dB, 2 = –18 dB, 3 = –8 dB, 4 = –16 dB, 5 = –10 dB, 6 = –14 dB, 7 = –12 dB





Setting



The setting of this parameter depends on the customer policy. The 3G cell is preferable duringthe interoperation of 3G and 2G.

Related Commands

The parameter is invalid in the 3G network.

2.8 Neighboring Cell Management ParametersThis describes the neighboring cell management parameters.

Table 2-18 List of neighboring cell management parameters

SerialNo.

ID Meaning

DefaultConfiguration

MML Command Level

1 NPrioFlag

Neighboringcellpriorityflag

FALSE For intra-frequency cells:Set: ADD INTRAFREQNCELLModify: MOD INTRAFREQNCELLFor inter-frequency cells:Set: ADD INTERFREQNCELLModify: MOD INTERFREQNCELLFor inter-RAT cells:Set: ADD GSMNCELLModify: MOD GSMNCELL

NCell

2 NPRIO

Neighboringcellpriority

-

2.8.1 Neighboring Cell Priority FlagThis describes the neighboring cell priority flag.

2.8.2 Neighboring Cell PriorityThis describes the neighboring cell priority.

2.8.1 Neighboring Cell Priority FlagThis describes the neighboring cell priority flag.



2-103

ID

NPrioFlag

Value Range

FALSE, TRUE

Physical Scope

False, true

Setting

The default value of is FALSE.

This parameter is unnecessary for a new network.

To swap the network that is configured with neighboring cell priority, use the neighboring cellpriority of the existing network and set NPrioFlag to TRUE.


An improper neighboring cell priority may result in missed configuration of neighboring cells.

Related Commands

For intra-frequency cells:

Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to set and MOD INTRAFREQNCELL to modifyNPrioFlag.

For inter-frequency cells:

Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set and use MOD INTERFREQNCELL to modifyNPrioFlag.

For inter-RAT cells:

Use ADD GSMNCELL to set and MOD GSMNCELL to modify NPrioFlag.

2.8.2 Neighboring Cell PriorityThis describes the neighboring cell priority.

ID

NPrio

Value Range

0 to 30 (for intra-frequency neighboring cells)

0 to 63 (for inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells)





Physical ScopeNone.

SettingThe lower NPrio is, the higher the neighboring cell priority is.

Impact on the Network PerformanceAn improper neighbor priority may result in missed configuration of neighboring cells.

Related CommandsFor intra-frequency cells:

Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to set and MOD INTRAFREQNCELL to modifyNPrioFlag.

For inter-frequency cells:

Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set and use MOD INTERFREQNCELL to modifyNPrioFlag.

For inter-RAT cells:

Use ADD GSMNCELL to set and MOD GSMNCELL to modify NPrioFlag.



2-105

3 Admission Control Parameters

About This Chapter

This describes the admission control parameters that can be modified by network planners.

Table 3-1 List of admission control parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 ULBETraffInitBitRateDLBETraffInitBitRate

Initial uplinkand downlinkaccess rates ofBE services

64, namely 64Kbit/s

Set or modify: SET FRCQuery: LST FRC

RNC

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 3 Admission Control Parameters


3-1

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

2 IU_Qos_Neg_SwitchRAB_Downsizing_SwitchQueueAlgoSwitchPeemptAlgoSwitch

Intelligentadmissionalgorithmswitch

l IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH: 0

l RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH: 1

l QUEUEALGOSWITCH: OFF

l PREEMPTALGOSWITC: OFF

IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH andRAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCHSet or modify: SETCORRMALGOSWITCHQuery: LSTCORRMALGOSWITCHQUEUEALGOSWITCH andPREEMPTALGOSWITCSet or modify: SETQUEUEPREEMPTQuery: LSTQUEUEPREEMPT

RNC

3 UlTotalEqUserNum

Total numberof uplinkequivalentsubscribers

80 Set: ADD CELLCACQuery: LST CELLCACModify: MOD CELLCAC

Cell

4 DlTotalEqUserNum

Total numberof downlinkequivalentsubscribers

80

5 UlNonCtrlThdForAMR

AMR voiceuplinkthreshold ofconversationalservices

75, namely75%

Set: ADD CELLCACQuery: LST CELLCACModify: MOD CELLCAC

Cell

6 UlNonCtrlThdForNonAMR

Non-AMRvoice uplinkthreshold ofconversationalservices

75, namely75%

7 DlConvAMRThd

AMR voicedownlinkthreshold ofconversationalservices

80, namely80%

3 Admission Control ParametersRAN




SerialNo.


MML Command Level

8 DlConvNonAMRThd

Non-AMRvoice downlinkthreshold ofconversationalservices

80, namely80%

9 UlNonCtrlThdForOther

Uplinkadmissionthreshold ofother services

60, namely60%

10

DlOtherThd

Downlinkadmissionthreshold ofother services

75, namely75%

11

UlNonCtrlThdForHo

Uplinkthreshold ofhandovers,used for theuplinkadmission ofhandover UEs

80, namely80%

12

DlHOThd Downlinkthreshold ofhandovers,used for thedownlinkadmission ofhandover UEs

85, namely85%

13

UlCellTotalThd

Total uplinkpowerthreshold of thecell

83, namely83%

14

DLCELLTOTALTHD

Total downlinkpowerthreshold of thecell

90, namely90%



3-3

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

15

UlHoCeResvSf

Reserved SF ofthe uplinkcredit resourcesfor handovers

SF16 Set: ADD CELLCACQuery: LST CELLCACModify: MOD CELLCAC

Cell

16

DlHoCeCodeResvSf

Reserved SF ofthe downlinkcredit resourcesfor handovers

SF32

17

ULCCHLOADFACTORDLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF

Load factor (%)of uplinkcommonchannelsReserved loadcoefficient (%)of downlinkcommonchannels

0

3.1 Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE ServicesThis describes the uplink and downlink initial access rates when BE services are set up.

3.2 Intelligent Admission Algorithm SwitchThis describes the intelligent admission algorithm switch. The intelligent admission algorithmswitch consists of four subordinate algorithm switches: the maximum rate negotiation switch(IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH), the initial rate selecting switch(RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH), the queuing algorithm (QUEUEALGOSWITCH), andthe preemption algorithm (PREEMPTALGOSWITCH).

3.3 Uplink Total Equivalent User NumberThis describes the uplink total equivalent user number. When algorithm 2 is used, this parameterdefines the total equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% uplink load.

3.4 Downlink Total Equivalent User NumberThis describes the downlink total equivalent user number. When algorithm 2 is used, thisparameter defines the total equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% downlink load.

3.5 AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation ServiceThe uplink threshold for the conversation service is used for the uplink admission of conversationservice users.

3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation Service





This parameter is the uplink threshold of non AMR voice service in the conversation serviceand used for uplink admission for non AMR voice user in the conversation service.

3.7 AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversational ServicesThis describes the AMR-voice downlink thresholds of conversational services, based on whichthe downlink admission of AMR-voice subscribers of conversational services is implemented.

3.8 Non-AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversational ServicesThis describes the non-AMR-voice downlink thresholds of conversational services, based onwhich the downlink admission of non-AMR-voice subscribers of conversational services isimplemented.

3.9 Uplink Threshold for Other ServicesThis parameter is the uplink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It is usedfor uplink admission of other services.

3.10 Downlink Admission Threshold of Other ServicesThis describes the downlink admission threshold of other services, based on which the downlinkadmission of subscribers of non conversational services is implemented.

3.11 Uplink Handover Admission ThresholdThe uplink handover threshold is used for uplink admission of handover users. The parameteris only useful for uplink inter-frequency handover. Do not do the admission judgment in theuplink soft handover.

3.12 Downlink Handover Admission ThresholdThis describes the downlink handover admission threshold, based on which the downlinkadmission of handover subscribers is implemented.

3.13 Uplink Total Power ThresholdThe total uplink power threshold of the cell is used for admission of HSPA uplink powerresource.

3.14 Downlink Total Power ThresholdThis describes the total downlink power threshold of the cell (PR99 + GBP), which is used forthe admission of HSPA downlink power resource.

3.15 Reserved SF of the Uplink Credit Resource for HandoversThis describes the reserved threshold for the uplink credit handover. The threshold is used forthe admission of uplink credit for new subscribers.

3.16 Reserved SF of the Downlink Credit Resource and Channel Code Resource for HandoversThis describes the spreading factor (SF) threshold of the downlink code resources and CEresources reserved for the handover. This parameter is used for the admission of downlink coderesources and credit for new subscribers.

3.17 Resources Reserved for Common Channel LoadThis describes the uplink common channel load factor and the downlink common channel loadfactor. ULCCHLOADFACTOR is used to reserve the resource for the uplink common channel,and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF is used to reserve the resource for the downlink commonchannel.



3-5

3.1 Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE ServicesThis describes the uplink and downlink initial access rates when BE services are set up.

IDULBeTraffInitBitrate

DLBeTraffInitBitrate

Value RangeULBeTraffInitBitrate: Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D608, D1024,D1450, D2048)

DLBeTraffInitBitrate: Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D768, D1024,D1536, D1800, D2048)

Physical ScopeULBeTraffInitBitrate: Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384, 608, 1024, 1450, 2048) kbit/s

DLBeTraffInitBitrate: Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384, 768, 1024, 1536, 1800, 2048)kbit/s

SettingThe default value is D64.

To save the system resources and promote the admission success rate, the UE needs not to accesswith the maximum expected rate but implement the initial access with a comparatively low ratewhen the BE services are being set up. After the access, the rate can be increased when the trafficrequires a higher rate and the system resources meet the demand.

When the DCCC function is enabled, the values are the uplink and downlink initial access rateswhen the BE services are set up if the value is lower than the maximum bit rate. If the initialaccess rates do not meet the demand of the current load, the actual initial access rate is obtainedthrough negotiation on the basis of the uplink and downlink initial access rates when the BEservices are set up.

NOTE

When the uplink and downlink load is in initial congestion state, or the Iub transmission resources is incongestion state, the current intelligent admission algorithm uses the minimum rate (generally 8 kbit/s) inthe set of optional rates for the BE service as the access rate instead of gradually decreasing the initialaccess rate through negotiation. When either the uplink load or the downlink load is in congestion, the UEaccess is rejected without any process of decreasing the rate.

Impact on the Network Performancel If ULBeTraffInitBitrate and DLBeTraffInitBitrate are set to comparatively higher

values, the access rate of the BE services needs a shorter time to reach the maximum value,but the rate is more easily to be decreased through negotiation when the system is incongestion, so it is improper to set the access rate to an excessively high value.





l If ULBeTraffInitBitrate and DLBeTraffInitBitrate are set to comparatively lowervalues, the BE services can access with the rate more easily, but it takes a long time for therate to increase to the rate required by some services.

Related CommandsUse SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query ULBeTraffInitBitrate andDLBeTraffInitBitrate.

3.2 Intelligent Admission Algorithm SwitchThis describes the intelligent admission algorithm switch. The intelligent admission algorithmswitch consists of four subordinate algorithm switches: the maximum rate negotiation switch(IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH), the initial rate selecting switch(RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH), the queuing algorithm (QUEUEALGOSWITCH), andthe preemption algorithm (PREEMPTALGOSWITCH).

IDIU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH

RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH

QUEUEALGOSWITCH

PREEMPTALGOSWITCH

Value RangeIU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH: Enum (0, 1)

QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC: ON, OFF

Physical ScopeIU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH: 0 means disabled, 1 meansenabled.

QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC: ON means enabled, OFF meansdisabled.

SettingThe default value of IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH is 0, and the default value ofRAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH is 1.

The default values of QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC are OFF.

The descriptions of the sub algorithms are as follows:l Maximum rate negotiation: At the RAB assignment setup, RAB assignment modification,

and RAB transition, the real-time services or non-real-time services (BE) at the PS domainrequires rate negotiation based on the UE supported capability to get the maximum expectedrate of a proper service QoS request. This negotiation result should be sent to the CN. Forthe BE service, it is the maximum rate that can be reached through adjustment by its DCCC.



3-7

l RAB downsizing: At the RAB assignment setup, RAB assignment modification, and RABtransition, the real-time or non-real-time (BE) service of PS domain requires selection ofa proper initial rate from the typical rates that are smaller than or equal to the maximumexpected rate after negotiation and bigger than or equal to the lowest guaranteed rateaccording to the cell load information before application for cell resources. The bandwidthis configured on the basis of the selected initial rate.

l Preemption: At the service setup, modification, hard handover, and transition-in, if servicerequest supports preemption capability (configured in CN) when an application for cellresources fails, the system implements preemption and releases the resources of lower-priority users that can be preempted to have the service request be set up.

l Queuing: At the service setup, modification, hard handover and transition-in, if servicerequests do not support preemption capability but supports the queuing capability or thepreemption switch is closed when an application for cell resources fails, a queuing processis implemented. When the heartbeat timer of queuing is in the timeout state, the systemattempts to allocate resources to the service request with the minimum metric in the queue.


IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH are set based on the actualdemand and the supporting capacity of the core network.

Preemption may increase the admission success rate of subscribers with high priority, but thepreemption also may make the preempted subscriber be released. Queuing may increase theadmission success rate of RAB, but the queuing also may increase the admission time delay ofqueuing subscribers.

Related Commands

Use SET CORRMALGOSWITCH to set or modify and LST CORRMALGOSWITCH toquery IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH.

Use SET QUEUEPREEMPT to set or modify and LST QUEUEPREEMPT to queryQUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITCH.

3.3 Uplink Total Equivalent User NumberThis describes the uplink total equivalent user number. When algorithm 2 is used, this parameterdefines the total equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% uplink load.

ID

UlTotalEqUserNum

Value Range

0 to 200

Physical Scope

0 to 200, with the step of 1






When algorithm 2 is used, the actual admission equivalent user number is equal to the admissionthreshold multiplied by the equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% load. Thisparameter defines the equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% load.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter should be considered with the admission threshold. It should be set according tothe actual network condition.

l If UlTotalEqUserNum is excessively high, the system load after admission probablybecomes excessively high, which affects the system stability and results in systemcongestion.

l If UlTotalEqUserNum is excessively low, the subscribers are more likely to be rejected,and some resources are idled and wasted.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyUlTotalEqUserNum.

3.4 Downlink Total Equivalent User NumberThis describes the downlink total equivalent user number. When algorithm 2 is used, thisparameter defines the total equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% downlink load.

IDDlTotalEqUserNum

Value Range0 to 200

Physical Scope0 to 200, with the step of 1


When the algorithm 2 is used, the actual admission equivalent user number is equal to theadmission threshold multiplied by the equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% load.This parameter defines the equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% load.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter should be considered with the admission threshold. It should be set according tothe actual network condition.



3-9

l If DlTotalEqUserNum is excessively high, the system load after admission probablybecomes excessively high, which affects the system stability and results in systemcongestion.

l If DlTotalEqUserNum is excessively low, the subscribers are more likely to be rejected,and some resources are idled and wasted.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyDlTotalEqUserNum.

3.5 AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation ServiceThe uplink threshold for the conversation service is used for the uplink admission of conversationservice users.

Parameter ID

UlNonCtrlThdForAMR

Value Range

0 to 100


0 to 100%, step 1%

Parameter Setting

The default value is 75, that is 75%.

Based on the current load factor of the system and the service properties of the call requestingfor admission, the uplink admission control algorithm predicts the load factor of the system afterthe new call is admitted, uses the sum of the predicted load factor value and the common channeluplink load factor as the predicted value of the new load factor, and then compares the predictedvalue of the load factor with the load factor threshold. If the predicted load factor value is notbigger than the load factor threshold, the call will be admitted; otherwise it is rejected.

The uplink load thresholds include this parameter and uplink threshold for conversation non-AMR service, uplink threshold for other services and uplink handover admissionthreshold. According to the relations among these four parameters, the proportions of theconversation service and other services in the cell can be limited. These parameters can be alsoused to ensure the priorities of handover users and the conversation service access.


If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission probably is too high, which affectsthe system stability and results in system congestion; if it is too low, the users are more likelyto be rejected, and some resources are idled and wasted.





This parameter, uplink threshold for conversation non-AMR service, uplink threshold forother services and uplink handover admission threshold should be considered together withthe network planning results.

l If this parameter is too high, the target coverage in the network planning is influenced.

l If it is too low, the target capacity cannot be satisfied.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modifyit through MOD CELLCAC.

3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of ConversationService

This parameter is the uplink threshold of non AMR voice service in the conversation serviceand used for uplink admission for non AMR voice user in the conversation service.

Parameter IDUlNonCtrlThdForNonAMR

Value Range0 to 100

Physical Value Range0 to 100%, step 1%

Parameter SettingThe default value is 75, that is 75%.

The uplink admission control algorithm predicts the system load factor after admission of newcall according to the load factor of current system and service feature of admission request call.It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the uplink load factor of public channel asthe new load factor predicted value, and then compares the load factor predicted value with theload factor threshold. If the load factor predicted value is not bigger than the load factor threshold,this call is admitted, or else it is refused.

Uplink load thresholds include this parameter, AMR voice uplink threshold of conversationservice, Uplink thresholds of other services and Uplink handover admission threshold. Youcan restrict the proportion of conversation to other services in cell based on relations of the fourparameters or use them to ensure the priority of handover user and conversation service access.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf this parameter is set too high, the system load after admission may be overly heavy to affectthe system stability, resulting in system congestion. If this parameter is too low, the users aremore likely to be rejected, and some resources may be left idle.



3-11

This parameter, AMR voice uplink threshold of conversation service, Uplink thresholds ofother services and Uplink handover admission threshold should be considered together withthe planning result of network optimization to avoid over-big set target coverage affectingnetwork optimization, or too-small coverage that can not reach the target capacity.


3.7 AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of ConversationalServices

This describes the AMR-voice downlink thresholds of conversational services, based on whichthe downlink admission of AMR-voice subscribers of conversational services is implemented.

IDDlConvAMRThd

Value Range0 to 100

Physical Scope0% to 100%, with the step of 1%

SettingThe default value of DlConvAMRThd is 80, namely 80%.

According to the load factor of current system and service feature of admission request call, thedownlink admission control algorithm predicts the system load factor after admission of newcalls. It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the downlink load factor of publicchannel as the new load factor predicted value, and then compares the load factor predicted valuewith the load factor threshold. If the load factor predicted value is not bigger than the load factorthreshold, this call is admitted, or else it is rejected.

The downlink load thresholds are the AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services,non-AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, and downlink threshold forother services. You can restrict the proportion of voice services to other services in the cell basedon relations of the four parameters or use them to guarantee the access priority of voice services.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe setting of DlConvAMRThd is related to the settings of cell radius and the maximum celltransmit power.

l If DlConvAMRThd is set to an excessively high value, the downlink coverage of the cellis reduced, the neighboring cells are interfered seriously, and the system stability is affectedwhen the cell coverage is very small.





l If DlConvAMRThd is set to an excessively low value, the system resources may be idled,and the target capacity of the network planning cannot be reached.

The AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, non-AMR-voice downlinkthreshold of conversational services, downlink threshold for other services, and downlinkhandover admission threshold are set on the basis of the network planning result.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyDlConvAMRThd.

3.8 Non-AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold ofConversational Services

This describes the non-AMR-voice downlink thresholds of conversational services, based onwhich the downlink admission of non-AMR-voice subscribers of conversational services isimplemented.

ID

DlConvNonAMRThd

Value Range

0 to 100

Physical Scope

0% to 100%, with the step of 1%

Setting

The default value of DlConvNonAMRThd is 80, namely 80%.

According to the load factor of current system and service feature of admission request call, thedownlink admission control algorithm predicts the system load factor after admission of newcalls. It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the downlink load factor of publicchannel as the new load factor predicted value, and then compares the load factor predicted valuewith the load factor threshold. If the load factor predicted value is not bigger than the load factorthreshold, this call is admitted, or else it is rejected.

The downlink load thresholds are the AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services,non-AMR-voice downlink threshold conversational services, and downlink threshold for otherservices. You can restrict the proportion of voice services to other services in the cell based onrelations of the four parameters or use them to guarantee the access priority of voice services.


The setting of DlConvNonAMRThd is related to the settings of cell radius and the maximumcell transmit power.



3-13

l If DlConvNonAMRThd is set to an excessively high value, the downlink coverage of thecell is reduced, the neighboring cells are interfered seriously, and the system stability isaffected when the cell coverage is very small.

l If DlConvNonAMRThd is set to an excessively low value, the system resources may beidled, and the target capacity of the network planning cannot be reached.

The AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, non-AMR-voice downlinkthreshold of conversational services, downlink threshold for other services, and downlinkhandover admission threshold are set on the basis of the network planning result.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyDlConvNonAMRThd.

3.9 Uplink Threshold for Other ServicesThis parameter is the uplink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It is usedfor uplink admission of other services.

Parameter ID

UlNonCtrlThdForOther

Value Range

0 to 100


0 to 100%, step 1%

Parameter Setting


For the descriptions of this parameter, refer to 3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold ofConversation Service.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission is probably too high, which

affects the system stability and results in system congestion.l If it is too low, the users are more likely to be rejected, and some resources may be idled

and wasted.

This parameter, with uplink threshold for conversation service and uplink handoveradmission threshold should be considered together with the network planning results.

l If it is too high, the object coverage in the network planning is influenced.

l If it is too low, the target capacity cannot be satisfied.





Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modifyit through MOD CELLCAC.

3.10 Downlink Admission Threshold of Other ServicesThis describes the downlink admission threshold of other services, based on which the downlinkadmission of subscribers of non conversational services is implemented.

ID

DlOtherThd

Value Range

0 to 100

Physical Scope


Setting

The default value of DlOtherThd is 75, namely 75%.

For the description of DlOtherThd, refer to 3.9 Uplink Threshold for Other Services.


l If DlOtherThd is set to an excessively high value, the downlink coverage of the cell isreduced, the neighboring cells are interfered seriously, and the system stability is affectedwhen the cell coverage is very small.

l If DlOtherThd is set to an excessively low value, the system resources may be idled, andthe target capacity of the network planning cannot be reached.

The downlink admission threshold for other services, AMR voice downlink threshold ofconversational services, non-AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, anddownlink handover admission threshold are set on the basis of the network planning result.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyDlOtherThd.

3.11 Uplink Handover Admission ThresholdThe uplink handover threshold is used for uplink admission of handover users. The parameteris only useful for uplink inter-frequency handover. Do not do the admission judgment in theuplink soft handover.



3-15

Parameter ID

UlNonCtrlThdForHo

Value Range

0 to 100


0 to 100%, step 1%

Parameter Setting


Based on the current load factor of the system and the service properties of the call requestingfor admission, the uplink admission control algorithm predicts the system load factor after thenew service is admitted, uses the sum of the predicted value of the load factor and the uplinkload factor of the common channel as the predicted value of the new load factor, and comparesthe predicted load factor value with the load factor threshold. If the predicted load factor valueis not greater than the load factor threshold, the call is admitted; otherwise it is rejected.

The uplink load thresholds include this parameter, uplink threshold for other services anduplink threshold for conversation services. According to the relations among these threeparameters, the proportions of the conversation service and other services in the cell can belimited. These parameters can also be used to guarantee the priority of the handover users andthe conversation service access. Uplink handover admission threshold must be smaller thanuplink OLC trigger threshold for smart load control.

This parameter is to reserve resources for handover and to ensure the handover performance;the value of this parameter must be greater than uplink threshold for conversation services.

This parameter has effects only on inter-frequency handover; it has no influence on intra-frequency handover.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission probably is too heavy, which

influences the system stability and results in the system congestion.

l If it is too low, the probability that users are rejected is high, and some resources may beidle and wasted.

This parameter should be considered together with the uplink threshold for the conversationservice and the uplink thresholds for other services. The restriction is described as following:

l ULOLCTRIGTHD ≥ ULCELLTOTALTHD ≥ ULNONCTRLTHDFORHO >ULNONCTRLTHDFORAMR, ULNONCTRLTHDFORNONAMR >ULNONCTRLTHDFOROTHER ≥ ULLDRTRIGTHD ≥ ULLDRRELTHD;

l DLOLCTRIGTHD ≥ DLCELLTOTALTHD ≥ DLHOTHD >DLCONVAMRTHD, DLCONVNONAMRTHD > DLOTHERTHD ≥DLLDRTRIGTHD ≥ DLLDRRELTHD;






3.12 Downlink Handover Admission ThresholdThis describes the downlink handover admission threshold, based on which the downlinkadmission of handover subscribers is implemented.

IDDLHOThd

Value Range0 to 100


SettingThe default value of DLHOThd is 85, namely 85%.

CAUTIONThe downlink handover admission threshold must be smaller than the downlink OLC triggerthreshold for smart load control and not smaller than the downlink threshold for conversationalservices.

According to the load factor of current system and service feature of admission request call, thedownlink admission control algorithm predicts the system load factor after admission of newcalls. It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the uplink load factor of publicchannel as the new load factor predicted value, and then compares the load factor predicted valuewith the load factor threshold. If the load factor predicted value is not bigger than the load factorthreshold, this call is admitted, or else it is rejected.

The downlink handover admission threshold aims to reserve handover resources and guaranteea good handover performance.

Impact on the Network Performancel If DLHOThd is set to an excessively high value, the downlink coverage of the cell is

reduced, the neighboring cells are interfered seriously, and the system stability is affectedwhen the cell coverage is very small.

l If DLHOThd is set to an excessively low value, the system resources may be idled.

The downlink handover admission threshold needs to be considered with the downlink thresholdfor conversational services and downlink threshold for other services.



3-17

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyDLHOThd.

3.13 Uplink Total Power ThresholdThe total uplink power threshold of the cell is used for admission of HSPA uplink powerresource.

Parameter ID

ULCELLTOTALTHD

Value Range

0 to 100


0 to 100%, step 1%

Parameter Setting

The default value is 83, that is, 83%.

The setting of this parameter needs to consider the target load of uplink scheduling. Due to thescheduling mechanism of HSUPA, the total load of uplink always fluctuates around the targetload. Therefore, some margin is added to the target load of uplink scheduling to serve as thebasis of setting this parameter.

Relationship with other parameters: UlOlcTrigThd > UlCellTotalThd >UlNonCtrlThdForHo


l If this parameter is too high, the system loads after admission maybe too high, which leadsto the system congestion, and makes the system unstable.

l If it is too low, the possibility of subscribers rejected increases, part of hardware resourceis idle and wasted.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modify itthrough MOD CELLCAC.

3.14 Downlink Total Power ThresholdThis describes the total downlink power threshold of the cell (PR99 + GBP), which is used forthe admission of HSPA downlink power resource.





ID

DlCellTotalThd

Value Range

0 to 100

Physical Scope


Setting

The default value of DlCellTotalThd is 90, namely 90%.


l If DlCellTotalThd is excessively high, the system loads after admission maybe too high,which leads to the system congestion, and makes the system unstable.

l If DlCellTotalThd is excessively low, the possibility of subscribers rejected increases, andpart of hardware resource is idle and wasted.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyDlCellTotalThd.

3.15 Reserved SF of the Uplink Credit Resource forHandovers

This describes the reserved threshold for the uplink credit handover. The threshold is used forthe admission of uplink credit for new subscribers.

ID

UlHoCeResvSf

Value Range

SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256, SFOFF

Physical Scope


Setting

The default value is SF16.



3-19

SFOFF indicates that no resource is reserved for the handover. If the remaining cell uplinkresources cannot satisfy this parameter after a new service is admitted, this new service isrejected.

The reserved SF of the uplink credit resources for handovers aims to reserve resources for theUEs who perform the handover and to guarantee the handover performance. The parametershould be higher than or equal to the uplink LDR credit reserved SF threshold.


The lower UlHoCeResvSf is, the less credit resource is reserved for UEs that perform thehandover, and the higher the probability of handover subscriber admission rejection is.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyUlHoCeResvSf.

3.16 Reserved SF of the Downlink Credit Resource andChannel Code Resource for Handovers

This describes the spreading factor (SF) threshold of the downlink code resources and CEresources reserved for the handover. This parameter is used for the admission of downlink coderesources and credit for new subscribers.

ID

DlHoCeCodeResvSf

Value Range


Physical Scope


Setting

The default value is SF32.

SFOFF indicates that no resource is reserved for the handover. If the remaining cell downlinkresources cannot satisfy this parameter after a new service is admitted, this new service isrejected.

To reserve resources for UEs who perform handovers and to guarantee a good handoverperformance, the SF of downlink code resources and CE resources reserved for the handovershould be higher than both the threshold of the SF reserved for the cell LDR and the thresholdof the SF reserved for the cell LDR.





Impact on the Network PerformanceThe lower DlHoCeCodeResvSf is, the less credit resource is reserved for UEs that perform thehandover, and the higher the probability of handover subscriber admission rejection is.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyDlHoCeCodeResvSf.

3.17 Resources Reserved for Common Channel LoadThis describes the uplink common channel load factor and the downlink common channel loadfactor. ULCCHLOADFACTOR is used to reserve the resource for the uplink common channel,and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF is used to reserve the resource for the downlink commonchannel.

IDULCCHLOADFACTOR

DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF

Value Range0 to 100



The CAC is implemented only for dedicated channels, and also reserve some resource forcommon channels.

Based on the current load factor of the system and the service properties of the call admissionrequest, the uplink admission control algorithm predicts the load factor of the system after thenew call is admitted, uses the sum of the predicted load factor value and the common channeluplink load factor as the new predicted value of the load factor, and then compares the newpredicted value of the load factor with the load factor threshold. If the predicted load factor valueis not higher than the load factor threshold, the call will be admitted. If the predicted load factorvalue is higher than the load factor threshold, the call is rejected.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher ULCCHLOADFACTOR and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF are, the more powerresources are consumed, which may decrease the system capacity. IfULCCHLOADFACTOR and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF are excessively low, the powerresources can be fully utilized, but the coverage may become poor when the resources areinsufficient.



3-21

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyULCCHLOADFACTOR and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF.





4 Load Control Parameters

About This Chapter

This describes the load control parameters that can be modified by network planners.

4.1 Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters are listed here.

4.2 Cell Overload Congestion Control ParametersThis describes the overload congestion control (OLC) parameters that can be modified bynetwork planners.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 4 Load Control Parameters


4-1

4.1 Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters are listed here.

Table 4-1 List of cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters


Default Value RelevantCommand

Level

1 LdrPeriodTimerLen LDR periodtimer length

10 s Set ormodify:SETLDCPERIODQuery:LSTLDCPERIOD

RNC

2 UlLdrTrigThdUlLdrRelThdDlLdrTrigThdDlLdrRelThd

Uplink ordownlinkLDR triggerand releasethreshold

UlLdrTrigThd:55%DlLdrTrigThd:70%UlLdrRelThd: 45%DlLdrRelThd: 60%

Set:ADDCELLLDM

Query:LSTCELLLDM

Modify:MODCELLLDM

Cell

3 UlLdrFirstActionUlLdrSecondActionUlLdrThirdActionUlLdrFourthActionUlLdrFifthActionUlLdrSixthActionUlLdrSeventhActionUlLdrEighthActionDlLdrFirstActionDLLDRSecondActionDLLDRThirdActionDLLDRFourthActionDLLDRFifthActionDlLdrSixthActionDlLdrSeventhActionDlLdrEighthActionDlLdrNinthActionDlLdrTenthAction

Uplink ordownlinkLDR action

ULLDRFirstAction: CODEADJULLDRFirstAction andDLLDRSecondAction:INTERFREQLDHOULLDRSecondAction andDLLDRTHIRDAction:BERATEREDOthers: NOACT

Set:ADDCELLLDRQuery:LSTCELLLDRModify:MODCELLLDR

Cell

4 Load Control ParametersRAN






Level

4 ULLDRBERateReductionRabNumULLDRPSRTQosRenegRabNumULCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUMULCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUMULPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUMULPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUMULLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUMDLLDRBERateReductionRabNumDLLDRPSRTQosRenegRabNumDLCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUMDLCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUMDLPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUMDLPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUMMAXUSERNUMCODEADJDLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM

Number ofusersprocessed byuplink/downlinkLDR action

ULCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM,ULCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM andULLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM are set to3 by default; othersare set to 1 bydefault.DLCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM,DLCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM andDLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM are set to3 by default ; othersare set to 1 bydefault.



4-3



Level

5 ULINTERFREQHOCELLLOADSPACETHDDlInterFreqHoCell-LoadSpaceThd

UL or DLinter-frequencycell loadhandoverload spacethreshold

20

6 UlInterFreqHoBWThdDlInterFreqHoBWThd

UL or DLinter-frequencycell loadhandovermaximumbound width

20,000 bit/s

7 CellSfResThd Cell SFreservedthreshold

SF8

8 DlCreditSfResThdUlCreditSfResThd

UL or DLcredit SFreservedthreshold

SF8

9 LdrCodePriUseInd LDR codepriorityindicator

FALSE

10 CodeCongSelInter-FreqHoInd

Codecongestionselect inter-frequencyindication

FALSE

11 LdrCodeUsedSpaceThd

Inter-Frequencyhandovercode usedratio spacethreshold

13%

12 GoldUserLoadCon-trolSwitch

Gold userload controlswitch

OFF







Level

13 MbmsDecPowerRabThd

MBMSpowercontrolserviceprioritythreshold

1

4.1.1 LDR Period Timer LengthThis describes the LDR timer length. When the preliminary congestion happens, the LDM (LoadMonitoring) module sends period of preliminary congestion indication (namely LDR executionperiod) to LDR.

4.1.2 Uplink or Downlink LDR Trigger Threshold and Release ThresholdThis describes the uplink and downlink load thresholds for the system to determine entering intoor being released from the preliminary congestion status. The uplink LDR trigger threshold andrelease threshold are UlLdrTrigThd and UlLdrRelThd respectively. The downlink LDRtrigger threshold and release threshold are UlLdrTrigThd and UlLdrRelThd respectively.

4.1.3 Uplink or Downlink LDR ActionsThis describes the settings of uplink or downlink LDR actions. The parameters are used to setthe sequence of uplink or downlink LDR actions.

4.1.4 Number of Subscribers for Uplink or Downlink LDR ActionsThis describes the number of subscribers selected for uplink or downlink LDR actions.

4.1.5 Cell Load Space Threshold for Uplink or Downlink Inter-Frequency HandoverThis describes the cell load space threshold for uplink or downlink inter-frequency handovers.A blind handover target cell can serve as the target cell of inter-frequency handover only whenthe current uplink load space of the cell is higher than the uplink inter-frequency handover cellload space threshold, namely UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd . A blind handover target cellcan serve as the target cell of inter-frequency handover only when the current downlink loadspace of the cell is higher than the downlink inter-frequency handover cell load space threshold,namely DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd. This parameter value is relative to the target cellLDR threshold.

4.1.6 Upper Threshold of Bandwidth for Uplink or Downlink Inter-frequency Cell LoadHandoverA subscriber can serve as the target subscriber of an inter-frequency load handover only whenthe uplink RB bandwidth of the R99 subscriber is lower than UlInterFreqHoBWThd or theuplink GBR of the HSUPA subbscriber is lower than UlInterFreqHoBWThd. A subscribercan serve as the target subscriber of an inter-frequency load handover only when the downlinkRB bandwidth of the R99 subscriber is lower than DlInterFreqHoBWThd or the downlinkGBR of the HSDPA subscriber is lower than DlInterFreqHoBWThd.

4.1.7 Cell SF Reserved ThresholdThis describes the cell SF reserved threshold. The code adjusting could be done only when theminimum available SF of a cell is higher than this threshold.

4.1.8 Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved Threshold



4-5

This describes the uplink or downlink credit SF reserved threshold. The uplink or downlinkcredit LDR could be triggered only when the SF factor corresponding to the uplink or downlinkreserved credit is higher than the uplink or downlink credit SF reserved threshold.

4.1.9 LDR Code Priority IndicatorThis describes the LDR code priority indicator, which indicates whether the priority of code isconsidered during the code reshuffling.

4.1.10 Code Congestion Select Inter-Frequency IndicationThis describes the code congestion select inter-frequency handover indication. If the parameteris set toTURE, subscribers can be selected for inter-frequency load handover in the case of coderesource congestion. If the parameter is set to FALSE, subscribers can not be selected for inter-frequency load handover in the case of code resource congestion.

4.1.11 Inter-Frequency Handover Code used Ratio Space ThresholdIf the space threshold of code used ratio between the source cell and the destination cell is largerthan this parameter, then start inter-frequency handover.

4.1.12 Gold User Load Control SwitchThis switch is used to decide whether the load control measures will be taken for gold user inthe case of resource congestion or not.

4.1.13 MBMS Power Control Service Priority ThresholdThis describes the MBMS power control service priority threshold. When the MBMS servicepriority is higher than the threshold, the preliminary congestion status of a cell can be releasedthrough the decrease of power.

4.1.1 LDR Period Timer LengthThis describes the LDR timer length. When the preliminary congestion happens, the LDM (LoadMonitoring) module sends period of preliminary congestion indication (namely LDR executionperiod) to LDR.

IDLdrPeriodTimerLen


Physical Scope1 s to 86400 s, with the step of 1 s


The LDR period timer length is used by the LDM module. Upon detecting the preliminarycongestion of uplink or downlink of the cell, the LDM module sends preliminary congestionindications regularly with the interval of the LDR period. In addition, to reduce the messageinteractions between modules, the uplink and downlink share the same period, that is, eachpreliminary congestion indication sent by the LDM module indicates whether the uplink,downlink, or both the uplink and the downlink have preliminary congestion.





The LDR algorithm aims to slowly reduce the cell load and control the load below the admissionthreshold, each LDR action takes a period (for example the inter-RAT load handover needs adelay of about 5 s if the compressed mode is needed), and there is a delay for the LDM moduleresponds to the load decreasing (the delay is about 3 s when the L3 filter coefficient is set to 6),so LdrPeriodTimerLen should be higher than 8.

Impact on the Network Performancel The lower LdrPeriodTimerLen is, the more frequently the LDR action is executed, which

decreases the load quickly. If LdrPeriodTimerLen is excessively low, an LDR action mayoverlap the previous one before the previous result is displayed in LDM.

l The higher LdrPeriodTimerLen is, the more likely this problem can be prevented. IfLdrPeriodTimerLen is excessively high, the LDR action may be executed rarely, failingto lower the load timely.

Related CommandsUse SET LDCPERIOD to set and LST LDCPERIOD to query LdrPeriodTimerLen.

4.1.2 Uplink or Downlink LDR Trigger Threshold and ReleaseThreshold

This describes the uplink and downlink load thresholds for the system to determine entering intoor being released from the preliminary congestion status. The uplink LDR trigger threshold andrelease threshold are UlLdrTrigThd and UlLdrRelThd respectively. The downlink LDRtrigger threshold and release threshold are UlLdrTrigThd and UlLdrRelThd respectively.

IDUlLdrTrigThd

UlLdrRelThd

DlLdrTrigThd

DlLdrRelThd

Value Range0 to 100


Settingl The default value of ULLDRTrigThd is 55, namely 55%.

l The default value of DLLDRTrigThd is 70, namely 70%.

l The default value of ULLDRRelThd is 45, namely 45%.

l The default value of DLLDRRelThd is 60, namely 60%.



4-7

CAUTIONThe uplink and downlink LDR trigger thresholds must be higher than the uplink and downlinkLDR release thresholds.

When the uplink or downlink preliminary congestion is triggered, the system starts the uplinkor downlink LDR action. The LDR control aims to reserve a space for the admission and increasethe admission success rate. Therefore, according to the current strategy, the LDR triggerthreshold should be lower and close to the index of the admission threshold in concern. Forexample, if the carrier is concerned about the access success rate of the voice service, the LDRtrigger threshold can be set to a value lower than and close to the admission threshold of thevoice service but higher than the admission threshold of the data service.

After the preliminary congestion state of the cell load is released, the system no longerimplements the LDR action. Because the load fluctuates, the difference between the LDR releasethreshold and trigger threshold should be higher than 10%. The ping-pong effect of thepreliminary congestion state may occur.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe lower the LDR trigger and release thresholds are, the easier the system enters the preliminarycongestion status, the harder it is released from this status, the easier the LDR action is triggered,and the more likely the users are affected. But, the admission success rate becomes higher sincethe resources are preserved. The carrier shall make a trade-off between these factors.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLLDM to set, LST CELLLDM to query, and MOD CELLLDM to modify theuplink or downlink LDR trigger threshold and release threshold.

4.1.3 Uplink or Downlink LDR ActionsThis describes the settings of uplink or downlink LDR actions. The parameters are used to setthe sequence of uplink or downlink LDR actions.

IDThe first to the eighth actions of the uplink are set as follows:

UlLdrFirstAction

UlLdrSecondAction

UlLdrThirdAction

UlLdrFourthAction

UlLdrFifthAction

UlLdrSixthAction

UlLdrSeventhAction

UlLdrEighthAction

The first to the tenth actions of the downlink are set as follows:





DlLdrFirstAction

DLLDRSecondAction

DLLDRThirdAction

DLLDRFourthAction

DLLDRFifthAction

DlLdrSixthAction

DlLdrSeventhAction

DlLdrEighthAction

DlLdrNinthAction

DlLdrTenthAction

Value Range

Uplink Enum {NOACT, INTERFREQLDHO, BERATERED, QOSRENEGO,CSINTERRATLDHO, PSINTERRATLDHO, AMRRATERED}

Downlink Enum {NOACT, INTERFREQLDHO, BERATERED, QOSRENEGO,CSINTERRATLDHO, PSINTERRATLDHO, AMRRATERED}

Physical Scope

NOACT: No load reshuffling action is taken.

INTERFREQLDHO: The inter-frequency load handover is performed.

BERATERED (BE service rate decreasing): Channels are reconfigured for the BE service.

QOSRENEGO: The renegotiation on the QoS of the uncontrollable real-time service isperformed.

CSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO: The inter-RAT SHOULDBE load handover of the CSdomain is performed.

CSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBELDHO: The inter-RAT SHOULDNOTBE load handover ofthe CS domain is performed.

CSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO: The inter-frequency SHOULDBE load handover of the CSdomain is performed.

PSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBELDHO: The inter-frequency SHOULDNOTBE loadhandover of the PS domain is performed.

AMRRATERED (AMR service rate decreasing): The setting of the TFC subset and thenegotiation of the service rate can be performed for the AMR voice service.

MBMSDECPOWER (MBMS power limiting): The MBMS service is configured with themaximum power.

CODEADJ (code tree reshuffling): The fragments of the downlink code tree are arranged.



4-9

Settingl The default value of DlLdrFirstAction is CODEADJDL.

l The default values of ULLdrFirstAction and DLLdrSecondAction areINTERFREQLDHO.

l The default values of ULLdrSecondAction and DLLdrThirdAction areBERATERED.

l The default values of other parameters are NOACT.

The preceding parameters can be set to determine whether or not an action is taken in the LDRand the sequence of the LDR actions.

The LDR takes the actions in the preset sequence and judges whether each action is successful.If an action is unsuccessful, the LDR turns to the next action. If an action is successful, or anaction is set to NOACT, or all the preceding actions are taken, the LDR is finished, and thesystem waits for the next triggering of the LDR.

Because each action is performed by an algorithm module, the LDR algorithm only selects usersand delivers control messages, the execution result of each action can be obtained after a delay,and the LDR algorithm cannot wait for a long time, so the LDR can only judge whether theactions succeed by whether candidate users are found.

The inter-frequency load handover have no impact on the QoS of users and can balance the cellload, so the inter-frequency load handover usually serves as the first action.

The BE service rate decreasing is effective only when the DCCC algorithm is enabled.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe uplink or downlink LDR actions are set on the basis of the actual needs and RNP (radionetwork planning) strategy.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modify thesettings of uplink or downlink LDR actions.

4.1.4 Number of Subscribers for Uplink or Downlink LDR ActionsThis describes the number of subscribers selected for uplink or downlink LDR actions.

Parameter IDULLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (uplink LDR-BE service rate reduction RABnumber)

ULLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM (uplink LDR uncontrollable real-time servicenegotiation RAB number)

ULCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM (uplink LDR-CS domain inter-systemSHOULDBE load handover user number)

ULCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM (uplink LDR-CS domain inter-systemSHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)





ULPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM (uplink LDR-PS domain inter-systemSHOULDBE load handover user number)

ULPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM (uplink LDR-PS domain inter-systemSHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)

ULLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM(uplink LDR-AMR service reduction RABnumber)

MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ (downlink channel code maximum reshuffled user number)

DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (downlink LDR-BE service reduction RABnumber)

DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM (downlink LDR uncontrollable real-time servicenegotiation RAB number)

DLCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM (downlink LDR-CS domain inter-systemSHOULDBE load handover user number)

DLCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM (downlink LDR-CS domain inter-systemSHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)

DLPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM (downlink LDR-PS domain inter-systemSHOULDBE load handover user number)

DLPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM(downlink LDR-PS domain inter-systemSHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)

DLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (downlink LDR-AMR service reduction RABnumber)

Value Range1 to 10

Physical Value RangeNone

Parameter SettingThe following parameters are set to 1 by default:l ULLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM

l ULLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM

l ULPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM

l ULPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM

l MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ

l DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM

l DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM

l DLPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM

l DLPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM

The other parameters are set to 3 by default.



4-11

l Uplink/Downlink LDR-BE service rate reduction user number: This parameter can beconfigured according to the actual user distribution. If the proportion of high-rate users islarge, you need to set a smaller value for this parameter. If the proportion of high-rate usersis small, you need to set a greater value. Because the preliminary congestion controlalgorithm is designed to slowly decrease cell load, you need to set a small value for thisparameter.

l Uplink/Downlink uncontrollable real-time service negotiation user number: The targetusers of this parameter are the PS real-time service users. The setting of this parameter isanalogous to the setting of BE service reduction user number. Because the number of usersperforming QoS renegotiation may be smaller than the value of this parameter, for example,the candidate users selected for downlink LDR do not meet the QoS renegotiationconditions, you must leave some margin when setting this parameter to ensure the successof load reengineering.

l Uplink/Downlink CS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number: Thetarget users of this parameter are the CS domain users. Because the CS domain users aresession users in general and they have little impact on load, you can set a slightly big valuefor this parameter.

l Uplink/Downlink CS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number:The target users of this parameter are the CS domain users. Because the CS domain usersare session users in general and they have little impact on load, you can set a slightly bigvalue for this parameter.

l Uplink/Downlink PS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number: Thetarget users of this parameter are the PS domain users. The setting of this parameter isanalogous to the setting of BE service rate reduction user number.

l Uplink/Downlink PS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number:The target users of this parameter are the PS domain users. The setting of this parameter isanalogous to the setting of BE service rate reduction user number.

l Downlink channel code maximum reshuffling user number: Code reshuffling has a greatimpact on user feelings. In addition, the reshuffled users occupy two code resources duringcode reshuffling. Thus, you must set a small value for this parameter.

For each user, during a life cycle of preliminary congestion, a type of uplink/downlink LDRaction can be selected only once. After a type of uplink/downlink LDR action is selected by auser, the uplink/downlink LDR marks the user. If this type of action is triggered again, this useris not selected as the candidate user. Note that an action is performed separately in the uplinkand downlink directions. That is, the same action is performed one time in both the uplinkdirection and the downlink action.

Impact on Network PerformanceThe greater the values of this set of parameters are, the more significant the load of the local cellis reduced. This, however, may affect user feeling or cause traffic congestion in the target cell.The smaller the values of this set of parameters are, the smaller the load range are adjusted bythe LDR. This, however, more probably ensures users' QoS and balances traffic load.

Relevant CommandsUse the ADD CELLLDR command for configuration, the LST CELLLDR command forquery, and the MOD CELLLDR command for modification.





4.1.5 Cell Load Space Threshold for Uplink or Downlink Inter-Frequency Handover

This describes the cell load space threshold for uplink or downlink inter-frequency handovers.A blind handover target cell can serve as the target cell of inter-frequency handover only whenthe current uplink load space of the cell is higher than the uplink inter-frequency handover cellload space threshold, namely UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd . A blind handover target cellcan serve as the target cell of inter-frequency handover only when the current downlink loadspace of the cell is higher than the downlink inter-frequency handover cell load space threshold,namely DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd. This parameter value is relative to the target cellLDR threshold.

IDUlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd

DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd

Value Range0 to 100

Physical Scope0% to 100%

SettingThe default value is 20, namely 20%.

Impact on the Network Performancel The lower UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd and DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd

are, the easier it is to find a qualified target cell for the blind handover. Excessively smallvalues of the parameters, however makes the target cell easily enter the congestion status.

l The higher UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd andDlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd are, the more difficult it is for the inter-frequencyblind handover occurs, and the easier it is to guarantee the stability of the target cell.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modifyUlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd and DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd.

4.1.6 Upper Threshold of Bandwidth for Uplink or Downlink Inter-frequency Cell Load Handover

A subscriber can serve as the target subscriber of an inter-frequency load handover only whenthe uplink RB bandwidth of the R99 subscriber is lower than UlInterFreqHoBWThd or theuplink GBR of the HSUPA subbscriber is lower than UlInterFreqHoBWThd. A subscribercan serve as the target subscriber of an inter-frequency load handover only when the downlink



4-13

RB bandwidth of the R99 subscriber is lower than DlInterFreqHoBWThd or the downlinkGBR of the HSDPA subscriber is lower than DlInterFreqHoBWThd.

IDUlInterFreqHoBWThd

DlInterFreqHoBWThd


Physical Scope0 bit/s to 400000 bit/s

SettingThe default value is 200000, namely 200000 bit/s.

Impact on the Network Performancel The higher UlInterFreqHoBWThd and DlInterFreqHoBWThd are, the higher the

service rate of the user in handover is, and the more obviously the cell load is decreased.But high values of UlInterFreqHoBWThd and DlInterFreqHoBWThd give rise to thefluctuation and congestion of the target cell load.

l The lower UlInterFreqHoBWThd and DlInterFreqHoBWThd are, the smalleramplitude of the load decreases as a result of the inter-frequency load handover, and theeasier it is to maintain the stability of the target cell load.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modifyUlInterFreqHoBWThd and DlInterFreqHoBWThd.

4.1.7 Cell SF Reserved ThresholdThis describes the cell SF reserved threshold. The code adjusting could be done only when theminimum available SF of a cell is higher than this threshold.

IDCellLdrSfResThd

Value RangeSF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256

Physical ScopeNone.





SettingThe default value is SF8.

This parameter indicates the condition how code resource trigger the load reshuffling algorithm.When the downlink residually least SF code is lower than CellLdrSfResThd, the cell is indownlink code resource congestion state. At this time LDR action begins to work. The LDRcontrol aims to reserve the code resource to improve the admission success rate of newlyaccessing subscribers.

The restriction of setting this parameter is as following:

DlHoCeCodeResvSf ≥ CellLdrSfResThd

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe lower the code resource LDR trigger threshold is, the easier the downlink code resourceenters the initial congestion status, the easier the LDR action is triggered, and the easier thesubscriber perception is affected. But a lower code resource LDR trigger threshold causes ahigher admission success rate because the resource is reserved. The parameter should be setbased on the operator's requirement.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modifyCellLdrSfResThd.

4.1.8 Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved ThresholdThis describes the uplink or downlink credit SF reserved threshold. The uplink or downlinkcredit LDR could be triggered only when the SF factor corresponding to the uplink or downlinkreserved credit is higher than the uplink or downlink credit SF reserved threshold.

IDUlLdrCreditSfResThd

DlLdrCreditSfResThd

Value RangeSF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingThe default value is SF8.

This parameter indicates the condition how CE resource trigger the load reshuffling algorithm.When the downlink residually CE resource corresponding SF code is higer thanDlLdrCreditSfResThd, the cell is in downlink code resource congestion state. At this time



4-15

LDR action begins to work. The LDR control aims to reserve the code resource to improve theadmission success rate of newly accessing subscribers.

The restriction of setting this parameter is as following:

UlHoCeResvSf ≥ UlLdrCreditSfResThd

DlHoCeCodeResvSf ≥ DlLdrCreditSfResThd

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the SF corresponding to the current UL/DL remaining credit resource is higher than thethreshold defined by this parameter, the UL/DL credit LDR could be performed and the relatedhandling actions are taken.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modifyUlLdrCreditSfResThd and DlLdrCreditSfResThd.

4.1.9 LDR Code Priority IndicatorThis describes the LDR code priority indicator, which indicates whether the priority of code isconsidered during the code reshuffling.

IDLdrCodePriUseInd

Value RangeFALSE, TRUE

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingThe default value is FALSE.

FALSE means not considering the code priority during the code reshuffling. TRUE meansconsidering the code priority during the code reshuffling.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf LdrCodePriUseInd is TRUE, the codes with high priority are reserved during the codereshuffling. It is good for the code resource dynamic sharing, which is a function used for theHSDPA service.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modifyLdrCodePriUseInd.





4.1.10 Code Congestion Select Inter-Frequency IndicationThis describes the code congestion select inter-frequency handover indication. If the parameteris set toTURE, subscribers can be selected for inter-frequency load handover in the case of coderesource congestion. If the parameter is set to FALSE, subscribers can not be selected for inter-frequency load handover in the case of code resource congestion.

Parameter ID

CodeCongSelInterFreqHoInd

Value Range

FALSE, TRUE


None.

Parameter Setting

The default value is FALSE.

The setting of this parameter needs to refer to usage of network resources. In the case of multi-frequency coverage, if code resource is the bottleneck (such as for the indoors), it isrecommended that the parameter be set as True.


When the setting is True, subscribers can be selected for inter-frequency load handover in thecase of code resource congestion to eliminate code congestion more easily and to use multi-frequency resource effectively. However, inter-frequency blind handover will also introduce therisk of call drops.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through ADD CELLLDR, query it through LST CELLLDR, and modify itthrough MOD CELLLDR.

4.1.11 Inter-Frequency Handover Code used Ratio Space ThresholdIf the space threshold of code used ratio between the source cell and the destination cell is largerthan this parameter, then start inter-frequency handover.

Parameter ID

LdrCodeUsedSpaceThd

Value Range

0 to 100



4-17

Physical Value Range0 to 100%, step is 1%.

Parameter SettingThe default value is 13, namely 13%.

The setting of this parameter needs to consider the bandwidth of inter-frequency handoversubscribers. It should be avoided as much as possible to cause the destination cell congested bysubscribers’handover.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe smaller the setting, the more likely to find blind handover target cells that meet LDRconditions is. However, an extremely small setting is likely to cause the target cell congested.The greater the setting, the less likely to incur inter-frequency blind handover is, but the morelikely to ensure the reliability of the target cell is.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter through ADD CELLLDR, query it through LST CELLLDR, and modify itthrough MOD CELLLDR.

4.1.12 Gold User Load Control SwitchThis switch is used to decide whether the load control measures will be taken for gold user inthe case of resource congestion or not.

Parameter IDGoldUserLoadControlSwitch

Value RangeON, OFF

Physical Value RangeNone.

Parameter SettingThe default value is OFF.

The setting is based on the policy of operators towards VIP subscribers. If service quality is tobe ensured in resource congestion, this parameter is not enabled.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf this parameter is enabled, load control measures such as down-speeding and handover will betaken for VIP subscribers in the case of resource congestion in the cell, thus affecting servicequality of VIP subscribers. Otherwise, no measures will be taken for VIP subscribers in the caseof resource congestion.





Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through ADD CELLLDR, query it through LST CELLLDR, and modify itthrough MOD CELLLDR.

4.1.13 MBMS Power Control Service Priority ThresholdThis describes the MBMS power control service priority threshold. When the MBMS servicepriority is higher than the threshold, the preliminary congestion status of a cell can be releasedthrough the decrease of power.

ID

MbmsDecPowerRabThd

Value Range

1 to 15

Physical Scope

1 to 15

Setting


When the priority of the RAB of MBMS services exceeds this threshold, reconfigure the MBMSpower to the minimum power.


l The lower MbmsDecPowerRabThd is, the bigger the scope for selecting the MBMSservices is, the more cell load is decreased, the more effect there is on the MBMS service.At the same time, the cell overload is significantly decreased while the impact on the MBMSservices becomes bigger.

l The higher MbmsDecPowerRabThd is, the smaller the scope for selecting the MBMSservices is, the less cell load is decreased, the more effect there is on the MBMS services,and the quality of services with high priority, however, can be guaranteed.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modifyMbmsDecPowerRabThd.

4.2 Cell Overload Congestion Control ParametersThis describes the overload congestion control (OLC) parameters that can be modified bynetwork planners.



4-19

Table 4-2 List of overload congestion control parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 OlcPeriodTimerLen

OLC periodtimer length

3000,namely 3 s

Set or modify: SETLDCPERIODQuery: LST LDCPERIOD

RNC

2 UlOlcTrigThdDlOlcTrigThdUlOlcRelThdDlOlcRelThd

Uplink ordownlinkOLC triggerthreshold andreleasethreshold

l UlOlcTrigThd:95%

l DlOlcTrigThd:95%

l UlOlcRelThd: 80%

l DlOlcRelThd: 80%

Set: ADD CELLLDMQuery: LST CELLLDMModify: MOD CELLLDM

Cell

3 UlOlcFTFRstrctTimesDlOlcFTFRstrctTimes

Uplink ordownlinkOLC fast TFrestrictiontimes

3 Set: ADD CELLOLCQuery: LST CELLOLCModify: MOD CELLOLC

4 UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNumDlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum

Number ofRABs selectedfor the uplinkor downlinkOLC fast TFrestriction

3

5 RateRstrctTimerLenRateRecoverTimerLen

OLC fast TFrestrict datarate restrictiontimer lengthand recoverytimer length

RateRstrctTimerLen:3000 (3 s),RateRecoverTimerLen:5000 (5 s)

6 RateRstrctCoef

Data raterestrictioncoefficient forOLC fast TFrestriction

68, namely68%





SerialNo.


MML Command Level

7 UlOlcTraffRelRabNumDlOlcTraffRelRabNum

Number ofRABs releasedfor the uplinkor downlinktraffic

0

4.2.1 OLC Period Timer LengthThis describes the period of the OLC timer. When this period is up, OLC executes once and thenrestarts automatically. The period of the timer is the period of the OLC action. The uplink OLCand downlink OLC share the same timer.

4.2.2 Uplink or Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and Release ThresholdThis describes the thresholds for the system to determine that the uplink or downlink entersoverload status and the threshold for the system to determine that the uplink or downlink overloadis released.

4.2.3 Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction TimesThis describes the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times, which indicate the numberof times for which the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction is executed. The number ofuplink OLC fast TF restriction times is UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes, and the number of downlinkOLC fast TF restriction times is DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes.

4.2.4 Number of RABs Selected for the Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF RestrictionThis describes the number of RABs selected for an uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction.The number of RABs selected for an uplink OLC fast TF restriction isUlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum, and the number of RABs selected for a downlink OLC fast TFrestriction is DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum.

4.2.5 OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Timer Length and Recover Timer LengthThis describes the OLC fast TF data rate restriction timer length and recover timer length.RateRstrctTimerLen specifies the period for which the MAC applies TF restriction to BEsubscribers in a downlink fast TF restriction. RateRecoverTimerLen specifies the period forwhich the MAC applies TF recovery to BE subscribers when the downlink overload is released.

4.2.6 OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction CoefficientThis describes the data rate restriction coefficient for OLC fast TF restriction. The data raterestriction coefficient indicates the degree of the rate restriction.

4.2.7 Number of RABs Released by the Uplink or Downlink Traffic ReleaseThis describes the number of RABs that are released by an uplink or downlink traffic release.The number of RABs released by an uplink traffic release is UlOlcTraffRelRabNum, and thenumber of RABs released by a downlink traffic release is DlOlcTraffRelRabNum.



4-21

4.2.1 OLC Period Timer LengthThis describes the period of the OLC timer. When this period is up, OLC executes once and thenrestarts automatically. The period of the timer is the period of the OLC action. The uplink OLCand downlink OLC share the same timer.

ID

OlcPeriodTimerLen

Value Range

100 to 86400000

Physical Scope

100 ms to 86400 s, with the step of 1 ms

Setting

The default value of OlcPeriodTimerLen is 3000, namely 3 s.

In the current overload control algorithm, all the uplink/downlink OLC actions (TF restrictionand user release) are executed in the period of the OLC timer.

When the uplink or downlink has overload, the system implements overload control and checkswhether the OLC period timer is started in the current cell. If the OLC period timer is not started,the system starts the timer. If the OLC period timer is started, the system shares the timer.

When the OLC timer times out, the system checks the overload state of the cell. If the uplink ordownlink has overload, the system implement overload control of the uplink or downlink. Ifboth the uplink and the downlink have overload, the system implements the overload controlbased on a comprehensive decision. When implementing the overload control, the system resetsthe OLC timer. The system implements the overload control until both the uplink and thedownlink has no overload.

NOTE

When setting OlcPeriodTimerLen, consider the hysteresis for which the load monitoring responds to theload change. For example, when the layer 3 filter coefficient is 6, the hysteresis for which the loadmeasurement responds to the step-function signals is about 2.8 s, namely that the system can trace the loadcontrol effect about 3 s later after each load control. In this case, the OLC period timer length cannot besmaller than 3 s.

OlcPeriodTimerLen along with ULOLCFTFRstrctUserNum,DLOLCFTFRstrctUserNum, ULOLCFTFRSTRCTTimes, DLOLCFTFRSTRCTTimes,ULOLCTraffRelUserNum, and DLOLCTraffRelUserNum determine the time it takes torelease the uplink/downlink overload.


l If the OLC period is excessively long, the system may respond very slowly to overload.

l If the OLC period is excessively short, unnecessary adjustment may occur before theprevious OLC action has taken effect, and therefore the system performance is affected.





Related CommandsUse SET LDCPERIOD to set and LST LDCPERIOD to query OlcPeriodTimerLen.

4.2.2 Uplink or Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and ReleaseThreshold

This describes the thresholds for the system to determine that the uplink or downlink entersoverload status and the threshold for the system to determine that the uplink or downlink overloadis released.

IDUlOlcTrigThd

DlOlcTrigThd

UlOlcRelThd

DlOlcRelThd

Value Range0 to 100


SettingThe default values of UlOlcTrigThd and DlOlcTrigThd are 95 (95%). The default values ofUlOlcRelThd and DlOlcRelThd are 80 (80%).

CAUTIONThe OLC trigger threshold must be not higher than the OLC release threshold.

The system judges whether the uplink or downlink is in overload status on the basis of the uplinkor downlink OLC trigger threshold. If the cell load is higher than the threshold for consecutivepre-determined times, the system is already in overload status for a long time. In this case, thesystem performs operations of the OLC algorith, including fast TF restriction or even userrelease, if the cell OLC switch is enabled.

The uplink handover admission threshold guarantees the stability of the system, soUlOlcTrigThd must be higher than UlHOThd, and DlOlcTrigThd must be higher thanDlHOThd.

UlOlcRelThd and DlOlcRelThd indicates that the uplink and downlink have recovered to thenormal state (the overload is released). When the cell load is lower than the UlOlcRelThd andDlOlcRelThd within a hysteresis, the system has already entered the normal state and stops theuplink and downlink OLC. The uplink or downlink OLC release threshold must guarantee the



4-23

system stability. To ensure that the overload can be released after the system implements theoverload algorithm to limit the rate of BE services, the value of the uplink or downlink OLCrelease threshold should not be much lower than or close to the OLC trigger threshold, or thesystem state may have a ping-pong effect. The recommended difference between the OLCrelease threshold and the OLC trigger threshold is higher than 10%.

Impact on the Network Performancel The lower the OLC trigger threshold is, the easier the system is in the overload status. Since

OLC ultimately uses extreme method like releasing users to lower the load, an excessivelylow value of the OLC trigger threshold is very detrimental to the system performance.

l The lower the OLC release threshold is, the harder the system releases the overload.

Since the consequence of overload is not as severe as expected, it is desirable to set the twoparameters a bit higher given that the difference between OLC trigger threshold and OLC releasethreshold is fixed.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLLDM to set, LST CELLLDM to query, and MOD CELLLDM to modify theuplink or downlink OLC trigger threshold and release threshold.

4.2.3 Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction TimesThis describes the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times, which indicate the numberof times for which the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction is executed. The number ofuplink OLC fast TF restriction times is UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes, and the number of downlinkOLC fast TF restriction times is DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes.

IDUlOlcFTFRstrctTimes

DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes

Value Range0 to 100

Physical Scope0 to 100 times


After the uplink or downlink overload is triggered, the RNC immediately executes OLC by firstexecuting uplink/downlink fast TF restriction. The internal counter is incremented by 1 witheach execution. If the number of overloads does not exceed the OLC action threshold, the systemlowers the BE service rate by lowering TF to relieve the overload. If the number of overloadsexceeds the OLC action threshold, the previous operation has no obvious effect on alleviatingthe overload and the system has to release users to solve the overload problem.






The lower the parameters are, the more likely the users are released, resulting in negative effecton the system performance. If the parameters are excessively high, the overload status is releasedslowly.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLOLC to set, LST CELLOLC to query, and MOD CELLOLC to modify theuplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times.

4.2.4 Number of RABs Selected for the Uplink or Downlink OLCFast TF Restriction

This describes the number of RABs selected for an uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction.The number of RABs selected for an uplink OLC fast TF restriction isUlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum, and the number of RABs selected for a downlink OLC fast TFrestriction is DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum.

ID

UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum

DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum

Value Range

1 to 10

Physical Scope

None.

Setting


The OLC selects RABs on the basis of comprehensive priorities. It considers the service priority,the value of ARP, and the bearer priority indication, and selects the RABs with lower priorities.In the actual system, UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum and DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum can be set onthe basis of the actual circumstances.

l If the high-rate subscribers occupy a high proportion, set UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum andDlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum to comparatively low values.

l If the high-rate subscribers occupy a low proportion, set UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum andDlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum to comparatively high values.


The higher the parameters are, the more users are involved in fast TF restriction under the sameconditions, the quicker the cell load decreases, and the more user QoS is affected.



4-25

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLOLC to set, LST CELLOLC to query, and MOD CELLOLC to modify thenumber of RABs selected for the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction.

4.2.5 OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Timer Length and RecoverTimer Length

This describes the OLC fast TF data rate restriction timer length and recover timer length.RateRstrctTimerLen specifies the period for which the MAC applies TF restriction to BEsubscribers in a downlink fast TF restriction. RateRecoverTimerLen specifies the period forwhich the MAC applies TF recovery to BE subscribers when the downlink overload is released.

IDRateRstrctTimerLen

RateRecoverTimerLen


Physical Scope1 ms to 65535 ms

Settingl The default value of RateRstrctTimerLen is 3000, namely 3 s.

l The default value of RateRecoverTimerLen is 5000, namely 5 s.

Once the MAC layer receives an instruction to perform the fast TF restriction on a subscriber,it periodically uses the rate restriction coefficient to restrict the maximum available TF of thesubscriber until it receives an overload release instruction. Therefore, every period specified byRateRstrctTimerLen, apart from the new OLC-selected users who are TF restricted, thepreviously selected users are also fast-TF restricted in an effort to release the overload morequickly. In order to timely adjust the BE service rate according to the load, the value ofRateRstrctTimerLen shall be slightly higher than the system load response time after rateadjustment and the period of overload detection.

To avoid the fast TF restriction on the same user and guarantee the QoS of a single user, setRateRstrctTimerLen to the maximum value (65535).

Upon receiving the overload release instruction, the MAC layer periodically recovers themaximum available TF of the previously restricted BE users according to the period specifiedby RateRecoverTimerLen, and raises the maximum available TF to the superior level eachtime.





CAUTIONRateRstrctTimerLen and RateRecoverTimerLen are effective only to the downlink. Theuplink fast TF restriction is performed by the UE. For the uplink fast TF restriction, the RNConly delivers a new TFCS and randomly selects a comparatively bigger time length in thesignaling value scope. As soon as the time length selected by the RNC comes to an end, the UEautomatically releases the TF restriction.


The higher RateRstrctTimerLen is, the more slowly the BE service rate decreases. The lowerRateRstrctTimerLen is, the harder it is to receive the overload release instruction.

The higher RateRecoverTimerLen is, the more slowly the BE service rate recovers, while thelower probability that the overload is triggered again in a short period. The lowerRateRecoverTimerLen is, the more quickly the BE service rate is recovered, but moreoverloads occur.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLOLC to set, LST CELLOLC to query, and MOD CELLOLC to modifyRateRstrctTimerLen and RateRecoverTimerLen.

4.2.6 OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction CoefficientThis describes the data rate restriction coefficient for OLC fast TF restriction. The data raterestriction coefficient indicates the degree of the rate restriction.

ID

RateRstrctCoef

Value Range

1 to 99

Physical Scope


Setting

The default value of RateRstrctCoef is 68, namely 68%.

When configuring RateRstrctCoef, comply with the following principles:

Guaranteee the rate control effect on the high speed services, such as the 384 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s,and 144 kbit/s services.

When there are more than two transport blocks, the restriction on the biggest transport blockmust be effective, that is, the rate of the transport block must decrease by at lest one level.



4-27

For the 384 kbit/s service, TTI = 10 MS, and the TB set is {0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 12}. Consuming thatthe rate restriction coefficient is x, the restriction rules are as follows:

l 8<12x<12

l 4<12x2<8

l 2<12x3<4

Through calculation on the basis of the preceding rules, x can be set to 0.68.

Impact on Network PerformanceThe lower the parameter is, the more severe the rate is restricted. An excessive lowRateRstrctCoef, however, may affect the BE transmission delay. A high RateRstrctCoefmeans loose restriction, which may be ineffective in alleviating the overload.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLOLC to set, LST CELLOLC to query, and MOD CELLOLC to modifyRateRstrctCoef.

4.2.7 Number of RABs Released by the Uplink or Downlink TrafficRelease

This describes the number of RABs that are released by an uplink or downlink traffic release.The number of RABs released by an uplink traffic release is UlOlcTraffRelRabNum, and thenumber of RABs released by a downlink traffic release is DlOlcTraffRelRabNum.

IDUlOlcTraffRelRabNum

DlOlcTraffRelRabNum

Value Range0 to 10

Physical ScopeNone.


The number of RABs that are released by an uplink or downlink traffic release should beconsidered together with the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times and the numberof RABs selected for the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction.

When the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times exceed the threshold set byUlOlcFTFRstrctTimes or DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes, the OLC starts releasing users. For theusers of a single service, the releasing of RABs means the complete releasing of the users. Thereleasing of RABs causes call drops, so UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes or DlOlcFTFRstrctTimesshould be set to a low value.





Impact on the Network PerformanceHigher values of these parameters get the cell load to decrease more obviously, but the QoS willbe affected.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLOLC to set, LST CELLOLC to query, and MOD CELLOLC to modify thenumber of RABs released by an uplink or downlink traffic release.



4-29

5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters

About This Chapter

This describes the PS service rate control parameters: the service-related thresholds, DCCCparameters, link stability parameters, state transfer parameters, PS active parameters, and so on.

5.1 BE Service Related Threshold ParametersThe common configurable BE service related threshold parameters are listed here.

5.2 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on TrafficThis describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on traffic.

5.3 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on ThroughputThis describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on throughput.

5.4 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Link QualityThis describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on link quality.

5.5 State Transition ParametersThis describes the state transition parameters.

5.6 PS InactiveThe common configurable PS inactive parameters are listed here.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters


5-1

5.1 BE Service Related Threshold ParametersThe common configurable BE service related threshold parameters are listed here.

Table 5-1 List of BE service related threshold parameters


DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 BeBitRateThd BE servicehandover ratethreshold

D384, that is,384 kbit/s

Set or Modify:SETHOCOMMQuery:LSTHOCOMM

RNC

5 PS Service Rate Control ParametersRAN





DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

2 R99GoldIAVUlGBRR99GoldIAVDlGBRR99SilverIAVUlGBRR99SilverIAVDlGBRR99CopperIAVUlGBRR99CopperIAVDlGBRHSPAGoldIAVUlGBRHSPAGoldIAVDlGBRHSPASilverIAVUlGBRHSPASilverIAVDlGBRHSPACopperIAVUlGBRHSPACopperIAVDlGBRR99GoldBGDUlGBRR99GoldBGDDlGBRR99SilverBGDUlGBRR99SilverBGDDlGBRR99CopperBGDUlGBRR99CopperBGDDlGBRHSPAGoldBGDUlGBRHSPAGoldBGDDlGBRHSPASilverBGDUlGBRHSPASilverBGDDlGBR

Uplink anddownlink BE

D64, namely64 kbit/s

Set or modify: SETUSERGBRQuery: LSTUSERGBR



5-3


DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

HSPACopperBGDUlGBRHSPACopperBGDDlGBR

serviceguarantee bitrate

3 UlStrTransModeOnHsupa

StreamingserviceHSUPAtransmissionmode

Non-Scheduled

Set or modify:SETFRCQuery:LST FRC

5.1.1 BE Service Handover Rate ThresholdThis describes the Best Effort (BE) service handover rate threshold. The BE service handoverrate threshold is used to determine whether to perform soft handovers for the BE service on theDCH. When the maximum rate of the transmission channel of the BE service is lower than orequal to the BE service handover rate threshold, the system has the subscriber perform a softhandover to guarantee the service quality of the subscriber. When the maximum rate of thetransmission channel of the BE service exceeds the BE service handover rate threshold, thesystem has the subscriber perform an intra-frequency hard handover to reduce the impact uponthe system capacity.

5.1.2 Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured RateThis describes the insured bit rate configured for BE services with different priorities. DCH andH share a set of parameters.

5.1.3 Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission ModeThis describes the HSUPA transmission mode switch for streaming services. The parameter isused to control the E-DCH data transmission mode of the streaming service and is valid onlywhen the mapping from the streaming service to E-DCH is available.

5.1.1 BE Service Handover Rate ThresholdThis describes the Best Effort (BE) service handover rate threshold. The BE service handoverrate threshold is used to determine whether to perform soft handovers for the BE service on theDCH. When the maximum rate of the transmission channel of the BE service is lower than orequal to the BE service handover rate threshold, the system has the subscriber perform a softhandover to guarantee the service quality of the subscriber. When the maximum rate of thetransmission channel of the BE service exceeds the BE service handover rate threshold, thesystem has the subscriber perform an intra-frequency hard handover to reduce the impact uponthe system capacity.

ID

BeBitRateThd

Value Range

Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)





Physical ScopeEnum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s

SettingThe default value is D384, namely 384 kbit/s.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher BeBitRateThd is, the more resources are consumed, but the better the QoS becomes.

Related CommandsUse SET HOCOMM to set and LST HOCOMM to query BeBitRateThd.

5.1.2 Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured RateThis describes the insured bit rate configured for BE services with different priorities. DCH andH share a set of parameters.

Parameter IDR99GoldIAVUlGBR

R99GoldIAVDlGBR

R99SilverIAVUlGBR

R99SilverIAVDlGBR

R99CopperIAVUlGBR

R99CopperIAVDlGBR

HSPAGoldIAVUlGBR

HSPAGoldIAVDlGBR

HSPASilverIAVUlGBR

HSPASilverIAVDlGBR

HSPACopperIAVUlGBR

HSPACopperIAVDlGBR

R99GoldBGDUlGBR

R99GoldBGDDlGBR

R99SilverBGDUlGBR

R99SilverBGDDlGBR

R99CopperBGDUlGBR

R99CopperBGDDlGBR

HSPAGoldBGDUlGBR



5-5

HSPAGoldBGDDlGBR

HSPASilverBGDUlGBR

HSPASilverBGDDlGBR

HSPACopperBGDUlGBR

HSPACopperBGDDlGBR

Value RangeD8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, and D384

Physical Value Range8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, and 384 (unit: kbit/s)

Parameter SettingThe default value is D64, which stands for 64 kbit/s.

Impact on Network PerformanceYou can assign different GBRs to the users with different priorities to show servicedifferentiation. The QoS of the users with higher priorities is better. The user access, however,becomes more difficult.

Relevant CommandsUse the SET USERGBR command for configuration and use the LST USERGBR commandfor query.

5.1.3 Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission ModeThis describes the HSUPA transmission mode switch for streaming services. The parameter isused to control the E-DCH data transmission mode of the streaming service and is valid onlywhen the mapping from the streaming service to E-DCH is available.

IDUlStrTransModeOnHsupa

Value RangeScheduled, Non-Scheduled

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingThe default setting is Non-Scheduled.






None.

Related Commands

For the RNC level, use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query UlStrTransModeOnHsupa.

5.2 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based onTraffic

This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on traffic.

Table 5-2 List of dynamic channel configuration parameters

No.

ParameterID

ParameterMeaning


Level

1 Event4aThd Traffic upperthreshold

D1024, that is,1024 bytes

Set: ADDTYPRABDCCCMCQuery: LSTTYPRABModify: MODTYPRABDCCCMC

RNC

2 Event4bThd Traffic lowerthreshold

D128, that is, 128bytes

3 TimetoTrigger4A

Time to triggerevent 4A

D240, that is, 240ms

4 TimetoTrigger4B

Time to Triggerevent 4B

D2560, that is,2.56 s

5 UlDcccRateThd

Uplink DCCCrate thresholds

D64 (64 kbit/s) Set or modify: SETDCCCQuery: LST DCCC

RNC

6 DlDcccRateThd

Downlink DCCCrate thresholds

D64 (64 kbit/s)

7 UlMidRateThd

Uplink middlerate thresholds

D128 (128 kbit/s)

8 DlMidRateThd

Downlink middlerate thresholds

D128 (128 kbit/s)

9 UlMidRateCalc

Uplink middlerate calculatemethod

HAND_APPOINT

10 DlMidRateCalc

Downlink middlerate calculatemethod

HAND_APPOINT

11 UlRateUpAdjLevel

Uplink rateincrease adjustlevel

3_Rates



5-7

No.

ParameterID

ParameterMeaning


Level

12 DlRateUpAdjLevel

Downlinkincrease adjustlevel

3_Rates

13 UlRateDnAdjLevel

Uplink ratedecrease adjustlevel

3_Rates

14 DlRateDnAdjLevel

Downlink ratedecrease adjustlevel

3_Rates

15 LittleRateThd

Low activitybitrate threshold

D64, that is, 64kbit/s

5.2.1 Traffic Upper ThresholdThis describes the upper threshold of the traffic, which is used to check whether there is anydata to be transmitted.

5.2.2 Traffic Lower ThresholdThis describes the lower threshold of the traffic. If the RLC buffer payload is lower than thelower threshold of the traffic for a certain period, the system reports the 4B event. The 4B eventis implemented to detect for the decreasing of traffic. When the traffic transport is about to befinished, the traffic in the buffer soon decreases to zero.

5.2.3 Time to Trigger Event 4AThis describes the time to trigger the 4A event. When the traffic exceeds the upper threshold fora certain period, the system reports the 4A event.

5.2.4 Time to Trigger Event 4BThis describes the time to trigger the 4B event. When the traffic is lower than the lower thresholdfor a certain period, the system reports the 4B event.

5.2.5 Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust LevelsThese parameters are used to judge uplink and downlink 2 rates or 3 rates adjusting in DCCC.

5.2.6 Uplink or Downlink DCCC Rate ThresholdWhen the uplink or downlink maximum rate applied for the BE service is not higher than theuplink or downlink DCCC rate threshold, the system does not reconfigure channels accordingto the uplink or downlink traffic.

5.2.7 Uplink or Downlink Middle Rate Calculate MethodThis describes the uplink or downlink middle rate calculate method which can be set toHAND_APPOINT or AUTO_CALC.

5.2.8 Uplink or Downlink DCCC Middle RateThis describes the uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate. The uplink or downlink DCCC middlerate is configured when 3 rate adjusting in DCCC is used and the middle rate computing methodis HAND_APPOINT. If the uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate is not configured, the middlerate equals half of the maximum rate.

5.2.9 Low Activity Rate Threshold





This describes the low activity rate threshold. When the PS BE service rate has reduced to therate threshold of DCCC, but the UE cannot transfer to the CELL_FACH state for some reasons(for example: PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH is off; UE has CS service), the PS BE servicerate is reduced to the low activity rate threshold if the PS BE service satisfies the requirementof D2F.

5.2.1 Traffic Upper ThresholdThis describes the upper threshold of the traffic, which is used to check whether there is anydata to be transmitted.

IDEvent4aThd

Value RangeEnum (D16, D32, D64, D128, D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D3k, D4k, D6k, D8k, D12k, D16k,D24k, D32k, D48k, D64k, D96k, D128k, D192k, D256k, D384k, D512k, D768k)

Physical ScopeEnum (16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2k, 3k, 4k, 6k, 8k, 12k, 16k, 24k, 32k, 48k, 64k, 96k,128k, 192k, 256k, 384k, 512k, 768k) bytes

SettingThe default value is D1024, namely 1024 bytes. The parameter is set separately in downlink anduplink.

Impact on the Network PerformanceEvent 4A: The transmission channel traffic (which is the buffered traffic in DCCC) exceeds anabsolute threshold. When this event occurs, data transmission is accelerated through the increaseof channel transmission bandwidth.

The setting of the traffic upper threshold is used to check whether there are data to be transmitted.Therefore, to quickly satisfy the demand of data transmission, Event4AThd can be configuredto a comparatively low value. If Event4AThd is excessively low, the channel reconfigurationmay be triggered to increase bandwidth even when users have no enough data to be transmitted.

Related CommandsFor service-oriented parameters:

Use ADD TYPRABDCCCMC to set, MOD TYPRABDCCCMC to modify, and LSTTYPRAB to query Event4AThd.

5.2.2 Traffic Lower ThresholdThis describes the lower threshold of the traffic. If the RLC buffer payload is lower than thelower threshold of the traffic for a certain period, the system reports the 4B event. The 4B eventis implemented to detect for the decreasing of traffic. When the traffic transport is about to befinished, the traffic in the buffer soon decreases to zero.



5-9

IDEvent4BThd

Value RangeEnum (D8, D16,D32, D64, D128,D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D3k, D4k, D6k, D8k, D12k, D16k,D24k, D32k, D48k, D64k, D96k, D128k, D192k, D256k, D384k, D512k)

Physical ScopeEnum (8, 16,32, 64, 128,256, 512, 1024, 2k, 3k, 4k, 6k, 8k, 12k, 16k, 24k, 32k, 48k, 64k, 96k,128k, 192k, 256k, 384k, 512k) bytes

SettingThe default value is D128(rate < 128k), D256(rate >= 128k). The parameter is set separately indownlink and uplink.

Impact on the Network PerformanceEvent 4B: The transmission channel traffic (which is the buffered traffic in DCCC) becomeslower than an absolute threshold. When this event occurs, the channel transmission bandwidthis reduced to avoid resource waste.

The 4B event is used to check whether the traffic becomes lighter. When the service transmissionis about to finish, the traffic in the buffer decreases rapidly until it becomes zero. Therefore,Event4BThd can be set to a low value. In addition, when the service has a stable but low sourcerate, Event4BThd can be set to a proper value to detect the low source rate and decrease thechannel bandwidth. The tests on the FTP service and services with low source rates prove thatEvent4BThd can be set to a value close to the size of the transport block to detect the demandof decreasing the bandwidth caused by the FTP service and services with low source rates.


Use ADD TYPRABDCCCMC to set, MOD TYPRABDCCCMC to modify, and LSTTYPRAB to query Event4BThd.

5.2.3 Time to Trigger Event 4AThis describes the time to trigger the 4A event. When the traffic exceeds the upper threshold fora certain period, the system reports the 4A event.

IDTimetoTrigger4A






Physical ScopeEnum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280,2560,5000) ms

SettingThe default value is D240, namely 240 ms. The parameter is set separately in uplink anddownlink.

Impact on the Network PerformanceTimetoTrigger4A can be properly set to avoid the unnecessary triggering of traffic eventscaused by the unstable traffic.

If TimetoTrigger4A is set to an excessively high value, the reporting of the 4A event will bedelayed, and the performance of the traffic measurement report to trace the transmissionrequirements for service source data is poor. Before setting TimetoTrigger4A, you need analyzethe changes of buffer traffic when there are data to be transmitted.


Use ADD TYPRABDCCCMC to set, MOD TYPRABDCCCMC to modify, and LSTTYPRAB to query TimetoTrigger4A.

5.2.4 Time to Trigger Event 4BThis describes the time to trigger the 4B event. When the traffic is lower than the lower thresholdfor a certain period, the system reports the 4B event.

IDTimetoTrigger4B



SettingThe default value is D2560, namely 2560 ms. The parameter is set separately in uplink anddownlink.

The TimetoTrigger4B is used to prevent frequent triggering caused by small fluctuation of thetraffic. This parameter indicates the time from the moment when the traffic volume exceeds thelower threshold to the moment when an event 4B is triggered. This parameter is used to avoidunnecessary reports triggered by traffic fluctuation



5-11

Impact on the Network PerformanceTimetoTrigger4B can be properly set to avoid the unnecessary triggering of traffic eventscaused by the unstable traffic.

Before setting TimetoTrigger4B, you need analyze the changes of buffer traffic when there aredata to be transmitted. You can set TimetoTrigger4B to a comparatively high value to guaranteea good performance of service transmission.

The higher the parameter value is, the harder it is to trigger event 4B. In this case frequentadjustments of the BE service rate can be avoided. An extremely high value, however, may leadto slow system responses. The lower the parameter value is, the easier it is to trigger event 4B.A low value, however, may lead to frequent event triggering under small fluctuation of the traffic.


Use ADD TYPRABDCCCMC to set, MOD TYPRABDCCCMC to modify, and LSTTYPRAB to query TimetoTrigger4B.

5.2.5 Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust LevelsThese parameters are used to judge uplink and downlink 2 rates or 3 rates adjusting in DCCC.

Parameter IDUlRateUpAdjLevel

UlRateDnAdjLevel

DlRateUpAdjLevel

DlRateDnAdjLevel

Value RangeEnum(2_Rates, 3_Rates)

Physical Value Range1, 2

Parameter SettingThe default values are both 3_Rates.


Relevant CommandsThe RNC-oriented parameters: set them through SET DCCC and query them through LSTDCCC.





5.2.6 Uplink or Downlink DCCC Rate ThresholdWhen the uplink or downlink maximum rate applied for the BE service is not higher than theuplink or downlink DCCC rate threshold, the system does not reconfigure channels accordingto the uplink or downlink traffic.

IDUlDcccRateThd

DlDcccRateThd

Value RangeEnum(D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)


SettingThe default value of the uplink or downlink DCCC rate threshold is D64, namely 64 kbit/s.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe uplink DCCC rate threshold cannot be set to an excessively low value, and it should behigher than the minimum rate of the reverse bandwidth required by the 384 kbit/s service. Inthis way, the uplink measurement reports can be effectively reduced.

To set the downlink DCCC rate threshold, consider the gain of code resource.

l If the downlink DCCC rate threshold is excessively low, the DCCC algorithm is alsoimplemented even when the applied bandwidth is rather small, and there is only a lowalgorithm gain.

l If the downlink DCCC rate threshold is excessively high, the DCCC algorithm cannot beimplemented for some high bandwidth rates, and the code resource is wasted.

Related CommandsFor RNC-oriented parameters:

Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query UlDcccRateThd and DlDcccRateThd.

5.2.7 Uplink or Downlink Middle Rate Calculate MethodThis describes the uplink or downlink middle rate calculate method which can be set toHAND_APPOINT or AUTO_CALC.

IDUlMidRateCalc

DlMidRateCalc



5-13

Value RangeAUTO_CALC, HAND_APPOINT

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingThe default value is HAND_APPOINT.

This parameter is used to decide the uplink/downlink middle bite rate calculation method thatapplies when uplink/downlink Rate increase adjust level or uplink/downlink Rate decreaseadjust level is 3_Rates.

If uplink/downlink middle bite rate calculate method is set to AUTO_CALC, the value of uplink/downlink middle bite rate threshold is automatically calculated by the system. The value ofuplink/downlink middle bite rate threshold is equal to the RB rate closest to the highest ratedivided by two.



Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query UlMidRateCalc and DlMidRateCalc.

5.2.8 Uplink or Downlink DCCC Middle RateThis describes the uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate. The uplink or downlink DCCC middlerate is configured when 3 rate adjusting in DCCC is used and the middle rate computing methodis HAND_APPOINT. If the uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate is not configured, the middlerate equals half of the maximum rate.

IDUlMidRateThd

DlMidRateThd

Value RangeEnum (D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)

Physical ScopeEnum (16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s






UlMidRateThd and DlMidRateThd are needed only when UlMidRateCalc andDlMidRateCal (the uplink or downlink rate calculating method) are set toHAND_APPOINT.



Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query UlMidRateThd and DlMidRateThd.

5.2.9 Low Activity Rate ThresholdThis describes the low activity rate threshold. When the PS BE service rate has reduced to therate threshold of DCCC, but the UE cannot transfer to the CELL_FACH state for some reasons(for example: PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH is off; UE has CS service), the PS BE servicerate is reduced to the low activity rate threshold if the PS BE service satisfies the requirementof D2F.

IDLittleRateThd

Value RangeEnum (D0, D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384).





Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query LittleRateThd.

5.3 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based onThroughput

This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on throughput.



5-15

Table 5-3 List of DCCC parameters

No.

Parameter ID ParameterMeaning


Level

1 HsupaDcccStg HSUPA DCCCstrategy

RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH

Set:SET DCCCQuery:LSTDCCC

RNC

2 EdchRateAdjustSet

HSUPA UpLinkrate adjust set

Rate_128Kbps,Rate_256Kbps,Rate_608Kbps

Set:SETEDCHRATEADJUSTSETQuery:LSTEDCHRATEADJUSTSET

3 HsupaInitialRate Initial rate ofHSUPA BE traffic

D64 Set:SET FRCQuery:LST FRC

5.3.1 HSUPA DCCC StrategyThis describes the parameter used to set the HSUPA DCCC strategy.

5.3.2 HSUPA UpLink Rate Adjust SetThis describes the parameter used to set the HSUPA uplink rate adjust set.

5.3.3 Initial Rate of HSUPA BE RrafficThis describes the parameter used to set the initial rate of HSUPA BE traffic.

5.3.1 HSUPA DCCC StrategyThis describes the parameter used to set the HSUPA DCCC strategy.

ID

HsupaDcccStg

Value Range

RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH, RATE_UP_ONLY_ON_EDCH

Physical Scope

EDCH rate up and rate down, EDCH rate up

Setting

The default value is RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH.





Impact on the Network PerformanceThe RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH strategy means that the rate can be both downsizedand upsized.

The RATE_UP_ONLY_ON_EDCH strategy means that the rate can only be upsized.

This means UE can transit to CELL_FACH state from CELL_EDCH state at any rate.


Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query HsupaDcccStg.

5.3.2 HSUPA UpLink Rate Adjust SetThis describes the parameter used to set the HSUPA uplink rate adjust set.

IDEdchRateAdjustSet

Value RangeRate_8Kbps, Rate_16Kbps, Rate_32Kbps, Rate_64Kbps, Rate_128Kbps, Rate_144Kbps,Rate_256Kbps, Rate_384Kbps, Rate_608Kbps, Rate_1450Kbps, Rate_2890Kbps,Rate_5760Kbps

Physical Scope8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s, 608 kbit/s,1450 kbit/s, 2890 kbit/s, 5760 kbit/s

SettingRate_8Kbps: Unselected

Rate_16Kbps: Unselected



Rate_128Kbps: Selected










5-17



The more rate levels selected, the longer time subscribers reach to MBR. Subscribers feel badbut the network resource utilization increase.

The less rate levels selected, the shorter time subscribers reach to MBR. Subscribers feel goodbut the network resource utilization decrease.

Related Commands

For RNC-oriented parameters:

Use SET EDCHRATEADJUSTSET to set and LST EDCHRATEADJUSTSET to queryEdchRateAdjustSet.

5.3.3 Initial Rate of HSUPA BE RrafficThis describes the parameter used to set the initial rate of HSUPA BE traffic.

ID

HsupaInitialRate

Value Range

D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D608, D1450, D2048, D2890, D5760

Physical Scope

8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s, 608 kbit/s,1450 kbit/s, 2890 kbit/s, 5760 kbit/s

Setting

The default value is D64, namely 64 kbit/s.

When DCCC algorithm switch and HSUPA DCCC algorithm switch are enabled, the uplinkinitial bit rate will be set to this value if the uplink maximum bit rate is higher than the initial bitrate.


The feel of subscribers and network resource utilization are considered in setting this parameter.

Related Commands


Use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query HsupaInitialRate.





5.4 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based onLink Quality

This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on link quality.

Table 5-4 List of DCCC parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 BeUlEvTrigIndBeUlQos6A1McSwitchBeUlQos5AMcSwitchBeUlQos6DMcSwitch

Uplink qualitymeasurementswithes

BeUlEvTrigInd:SINGLEBeUlQos6A1McSwitch:YESBeUlQos5AMcSwitch:YESBeUlQos6DMcSwitch:YES

Set:SET QOSACTQuery:LST QOSACT

RNC

2 UlThd6A1UlThd6A2UlThd6B1UlThd6B2

Uplink qualitytransmit powermeasurementthreshold

UlThd6A1 和UlThd6B1: 2 dBUlThd6A2 和UlThd6B2: 10dB

Set or modify or remove:ADDTYPRABQUALITYMEAS,MODTYPRABQUALITYMEAS,RMVTYPRABQUALITYMEASQuery:LSTTYPRABQUALITYMEAS

RAB

3 StaBlkNum5AThd5A

Uplink qualityblock error ratemeasurementthreshold

StaBlkNum5A:500Thd5A:280



5-19

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

4 SrncBeDlRlcQosSwitchDrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch

Downlink qualitymeasurementswithes

NO Set:SET QOSACTQuery:LST QOSACT

RNC

5 ThdEaThdEb

Downlink qualitycode transmitpowermeasurementthreshold

2 (1 dB) Set or modify or remove:ADDTYPRABQUALITYMEAS,MODTYPRABQUALITYMEAS,RMVTYPRABQUALITYMEASQuery:LSTTYPRABQUALITYMEAS

RAB

6 EventAThredEventBThred

Downlink qualitydownlink RLCmeasurementthreshold

EventAThred:160(16%)EventBThred:80(8%)

Set or modify or remove:ADDTYPRABRLC, MODTYPRABRLC, RMVTYPRABRLCQuery：LST TYPRABRLC

RAB

7 UlFullCvrRate

Uplink fullcoverage rate

64kbit/s RNC level:Set:SET DCCCQuery:LST DCCCCell level:Set:ADD CELLDCCCQuery:LST CELLDCCC

RNC/CELL8 DlFullCvr

RateDownlink fullcoverage rate

32kbit/s

5.4.1 Uplink Quality Measurement SwitchesThis describes the parameters used to specify the strategy of uplink quality measurement.

5.4.2 Uplink Quality Transmit Power Measurement ThresholdThe parameters and UE maximum transmit power specify the threshold of 6A1, 6A2, 6B1, and6B2 event.

5.4.3 Uplink Quality Block Error Rate Measurement ThresholdThis describes the uplink quality block error rate 5A event threshold.





5.4.4 Downlink Quality Measurement SwithesThis parameters are used to specify the strategy of downlink quality measurement.

5.4.5 Downlink Quality Code Transmit Power Measurement ThresholdThis describes relative threshold of the Ea event. The parameter and the maximum transmitpower determine the event Ea/Eb/Fa/Fb threshold of the DL DPCCH power.

5.4.6 Downlink Quality Downlink RLC Measurement ThresholdThis describes the parametes, EventAThred and EventBThred.

5.4.7 Uplink Full Coverage RateThis describes the uplink full coverage rate.

5.4.8 Downlink Full Coverage RateThis describes the downlink full coverage rate.

5.4.1 Uplink Quality Measurement SwitchesThis describes the parameters used to specify the strategy of uplink quality measurement.

ID

BeUlEvTrigInd

BeUlQos6A1McSwitch

BeUlQos5AMcSwitch

BeUlQos6DMcSwitch

Value Range

BeUlEvTrigInd: SINGLE, COMBINE

BeUlQos6A1McSwitch, BeUlQos5AMcSwitch and BeUlQos6DMcSwitch: YES, NO

Physical Scope

BeUlEvTrigInd: SINGLE, COMBINE.

BeUlQos6A1McSwitch, BeUlQos5AMcSwitch and BeUlQos6DMcSwitch: YES, NO

Setting

The default value of BeUlEvTrigInd is: SINGLE

The default value of BeUlQos6A1McSwitch, BeUlQos5AMcSwitch and BeUlQos6DMcSwitchare: YES


It specifies the strategy of uplink quality measurement by UE uplink transmit power, or uplinkBLER, or both UE uplink transmit power and uplink BLER. The COMBIN type is recommendedto ensure the stability of link, but the scope is smaller than the SINGLE type.



5-21

Related Commands


Use SET QOSACT to set and LST QOSACT to query the parameters.

5.4.2 Uplink Quality Transmit Power Measurement ThresholdThe parameters and UE maximum transmit power specify the threshold of 6A1, 6A2, 6B1, and6B2 event.

ID

UlThd6A1

UlThd6A2

UlThd6B1

UlThd6B2

Value Range

0 to 82

Physical Scope

0 to 82 dB, step: 1 dB

Setting

The default value of UlThd6A1 and UlThd6B1 is: 2 dB

The default value of UlThd6A2 and UlThd6B2 is: 10 dB


The higher UlThd6A1 and UlThd6B1, more sooner to trigger 6A1 and 6B1 event, more easilyto down-speeding, so that keep the stability of link but the scope is smaller.

The higher UlThd6A2 and UlThd6B2, more sooner to trigger 6A2 and 6B2 event, more easilyto not up-speeding, so that keep the stability of link but the scope is smaller.

Related Commands

For service-oriented parameters:

Set or modify or remove: ADD TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, MODTYPRABQUALITYMEAS, RMV TYPRABQUALITYMEAS. query: LSTTYPRABQUALITYMEAS.

5.4.3 Uplink Quality Block Error Rate Measurement ThresholdThis describes the uplink quality block error rate 5A event threshold.





ID

StaBlkNum5A

Thd5A

Value Range

1 to 512

Physical Scope

1 to 512

Setting

The default value of StaBlkNum5A is 500.

This parameter defines the length of slide window.

The default value of Thd5A is 280.

This parameter sets the threshold for the number of wrong blocks of uplink CRC. If the numberof wrong blocks statisticized within the length of one slide window is larger than the threshold,5A event is reported.


The larger the threshold is, the more difficult to trigger 5A event, and the easier to cause a calldrop. The smaller the threshold is, the easier to trigger 5A event and cause unnecessary down-speeding and handover, thus affecting the QoS.

Related Commands


Set or modify or remove: ADD TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, MODTYPRABQUALITYMEAS, RMV TYPRABQUALITYMEAS. query: LSTTYPRABQUALITYMEAS.

5.4.4 Downlink Quality Measurement SwithesThis parameters are used to specify the strategy of downlink quality measurement.

ID

SrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch

DrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch

Value Range

YES, NO



5-23

Physical ScopeYES, NO

SettingThe default value of SrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch and DrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch are NO.

The parameters specify that downlink RLC is necessary or not.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe combination of downlink code transmit power and downlink RLC can make themeasurement more strictly to ensure the stability of link, but make the scope be smaller.


Use SET QOSACT to set and LST QOSACT to query the parameters.

5.4.5 Downlink Quality Code Transmit Power MeasurementThreshold

This describes relative threshold of the Ea event. The parameter and the maximum transmitpower determine the event Ea/Eb/Fa/Fb threshold of the DL DPCCH power.

IDThdEa

ThdEb

Value Range

ThdEa, ThdEb：0 to 111

Physical ScopeThdEa, ThdEb: 0 dB to 55.5 dB, with the step of 0.5 dB

SettingThe default value of ThdEa and ThdEb is 2, namely 1 dB.

Impact on the Network Performancel The higher EventEaThd is, the lower the absolute threshold for event Ea is, and it is easy

to trigger event Ea and it is useful for link stability. On the other hand, the service coverageplanning is much influenced by a high EventEaThd.

l The lower EventEaThd is, the more likely it is to guarantee the link stability and the lessservice coverage planning is affected.





Related CommandsThdEa and ThdEb:


Set or modify or remove: ADD TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, MODTYPRABQUALITYMEAS and RMV TYPRABQUALITYMEAS. Query: LSTTYPRABQUALITYMEAS.

5.4.6 Downlink Quality Downlink RLC Measurement ThresholdThis describes the parametes, EventAThred and EventBThred.

IDEventAThred

EventBThred


Physical Scope0 to 100%, step: 0.1%.

SettingThe default value of EventAThred is 160, namely 16％.

The default value of EventBThred is 80, namely 8％.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe lower EventAThred is, it is easier to trigger event A and it is useful for link stability. Onthe other hand, the service coverage planning is much influenced by a low EventAThred. Thehigher EventAThred is, the more likely it is to guarantee the link stability and the less servicecoverage planning is affected.

Related CommandsFor Service-oriented parameters:

Set or modify or remove: ADD TYPRABRLC, MOD TYPRABRLC and RMVTYPRABRLC. Query: LST TYPRABRLC.

5.4.7 Uplink Full Coverage RateThis describes the uplink full coverage rate.

IDULFullCvrRate



5-25

Value Range

Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)

Physical Scope

Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s

Setting



The uplink full coverage rate is the maximum uplink service rate that is reached when a cell istotally covered under some bearer.

If the maximum rate of a BE service is excessively low, the DCCC algorithm cannot easilycontrol the rate and requires more handling workload. Therefore, only the BE services with anuplink maximum rate higher than the threshold rate can perform the uplink coverage-basedDCCC algorithm control.

Related Commands


Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query ULFullCvrRate.

For cell-oriented parameters:

Use ADD CELLDCCC to set, LST CELLDCCC to query, and MOD CELLDCCC to modifyULFullCvrRate.

5.4.8 Downlink Full Coverage RateThis describes the downlink full coverage rate.

ID

DLFullCvrRate

Value Range

Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)

Physical Scope

Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s

Setting






Impact on the Network PerformanceThe downlink full coverage rate is the maximum downlink service rate that is reached when thecell is totally covered. If the current rate is higher than the full coverage rate, lower the rate tothe full coverage rate after the downlink TCP is limited. If the current rate is lower than or equalto the full coverage rate, lower the rate to the minimum guaranteed rate. If the Ea event is reportedagain, disconnect the links.

If the maximum rate of a BE service is excessively low, the DCCC algorithm cannot easilycontrol the rate and requires more handling workload. Therefore, the downlink coverage-basedDCCC algorithm control can be implemented for only the BE services of which the downlinkmaximum rate is higher than the threshold rate.


Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query DLFullCvrRate.

For cell-oriented parameters:

Use ADD CELLDCCC to set, LST CELLDCCC to query, and MOD CELLDCCC to modifyDLFullCvrRate.

5.5 State Transition ParametersThis describes the state transition parameters.

Table 5-5 List of state transition parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 FtoDTVMThdRtFtoDHTvmThdBeFtoHTvmThdFtoETvmThd

FACH to DCH trafficreport threshold

D1024,namely1024bytes

Set or modify: SETUESTATETRANSQuery: LSTUESTATETRANS

RNC



5-27

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

2 FtoDTvmTimeToTrigRtFtoDHTvmTimeToTrigBeFtoHTvmTimeToTrigFtoETvmTimeToTrig

FACH to DCH traffictime totrigger

D240,namely240 ms

3 DtoFStateTransTimerRtDH2FStateTransTimerBeH2FStateTransTimerE2FStateTransTimer

DCH to FACH statetransition timer

5 s

4 D2F2PTVMTHDBeH2FTvmThdRtDH2FTvmThdE2FThrouThd

DCH to FACH trafficreport threshold

D64,namely64bytesE2FThrouThd:8 kbps





SerialNo.


MML Command Level

5 D2FTvmTimeToTrigRtDH2FTvmTimeToTrigBeH2FTvmTimeToTrigE2FThrouTimeToTrig

DCH to FACH traffictime totrigger

D2FTvmTimeToTrig,BeH2FTvmTimeToTrig, andE2FThrouTimeToTrig:D0,namly 0msRtDH2FTvmTimeToTrig:D240,namely240 ms

6 FtoPStateTransTimer

FACH to PCH statetransition timer

180 s

7 CellReSelectTimer

Cell Reselectiontimer

180 s

5.5.1 FACH to DCH Traffic Report ThresholdThis describes the upper threshold of 4A traffic in the CELL_FACH state to trigger statetransition from FACH to DCH. If the parameter is excessively high, congestion may occur incommon channels.

5.5.2 FACH to DCH Traffic Time to triggerThis describes the time to trigger the traffic transition from the FACH to the DCH. For UEs inthe CELL_FACH state, if the traffic exceeds the report threshold throughout the time lengthspecified by this parameter, the event 4A report is triggered, causing state transition to theCELL_DCH state.

5.5.3 DCH to FACH State Transition TimerThis describes the DCH to FACH state transition timer. The parameter checks whether the usersin the CELL_DCH state are stably in low activity to determine whether there is a need for statetransition from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH.



5-29

5.5.4 DCH to FACH Traffic Report ThresholdThe parameter helps judge whether a UE is in the low activity state. Every time when a UE inthe CELL_DCH state reports the 4B traffic event, 1 is added to the low activity detection timer.

5.5.5 DCH to FACH Traffic Time to triggerWhen the traffic volume is smaller than the lower threshold and lasts a time length, the UE reportevent 4B.

5.5.6 FACH to PCH State Transition TimerThis describes the FACH to PCH state transition timer. The parameter checks whether thesubscribers in the CELL_FACH state are stably in low activity to determine whether there is aneed for state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH.

5.5.7 Cell Reselection TimerThis describes the cell reselection timer. The cell reselection timer and CellReSelectCounterjointly check the status of the UE that frequently performs cell reselection to determine whetherthere is a need of state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH.

5.5.1 FACH to DCH Traffic Report ThresholdThis describes the upper threshold of 4A traffic in the CELL_FACH state to trigger statetransition from FACH to DCH. If the parameter is excessively high, congestion may occur incommon channels.

ID

FtoDTVMThd

RtFtoDHTvmThd

BeFtoHTvmThd

FtoETvmThd

Value Range

Enum (D16, D32, D64, D128, D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D3k, D4k, D6k, D8k, D12k, D16k,D24k, D32k, D48k, D64k, D96k, D128k, D192k, D256k, D384k, D512k, D768k)

Physical Scope

Enum (16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2k, 3k, 4k, 6k, 8k, 12k, 16k, 24k, 32k, 48k, 64k, 96k,128k, 192k, 256k, 384k, 512k, 768k) bytes

Setting

The default value is D1024, namely 1024 bytes.


This threshold is set to check whether there is data to be transmitted so that the UE moves to theCELL_DCH substate. To avoid common channel congestion, this parameter should not be settoo high.





Related Commands


Use SET UESTATETRANS to set and LST UESTATETRANS to query FtoDTVMThd.

5.5.2 FACH to DCH Traffic Time to triggerThis describes the time to trigger the traffic transition from the FACH to the DCH. For UEs inthe CELL_FACH state, if the traffic exceeds the report threshold throughout the time lengthspecified by this parameter, the event 4A report is triggered, causing state transition to theCELL_DCH state.

ID

FtoDTvmTimeToTrig

RtFtoDHTvmTimeToTrig

BeFtoHTvmTimeToTrig

FtoETvmTimeToTrig

Value Range


Physical Scope

Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000 ) ms

Setting

The default value of RtFtoDHTvmTimeToTrig is D240, namely 240 ms. The default value ofFtoDTvmTimeToTrig, BeFtoHTvmTimeToTrig, and FtoETvmTimeToTrig is D0, namely0 ms.


FtoDTvmTimeToTrig can be properly set to avoid the unnecessary triggering of traffic eventscaused by the unstable traffic. An excessively high FtoDTvmTimeToTrig may delay thereporting of the 4A event and result in congestion of the common channel.

Related Commands


Use SET UESTATETRANS to set and LST UESTATETRANS to queryFtoDTvmTimeToTrig.



5-31

5.5.3 DCH to FACH State Transition TimerThis describes the DCH to FACH state transition timer. The parameter checks whether the usersin the CELL_DCH state are stably in low activity to determine whether there is a need for statetransition from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH.

IDDtoFStateTransTimer

RtDH2FStateTransTimer

BeH2FStateTransTimer

E2FStateTransTimer


Physical Scope1 s to 65535 s


Impact on the Network Performancel If DtoFStateTransTimer is excessively low, it may hard to judge whether the subscriber

is in relatively stable low activity status.l If DtoFStateTransTimer is excessively high, dedicated channel resources may be wasted.

DtoFStateTransTimer needs to be set on the basis of the BE service model.


Use SET UESTATETRANS to set and LST UESTATETRANS to query the parameters.

5.5.4 DCH to FACH Traffic Report ThresholdThe parameter helps judge whether a UE is in the low activity state. Every time when a UE inthe CELL_DCH state reports the 4B traffic event, 1 is added to the low activity detection timer.

IDD2F2PTVMTHD

BeH2FTvmThd

RtDH2FTvmThd

E2FThrouThd





Value RangeD2F2PTVMTHD, BeH2FTvmThd, RtDH2FTvmThd: D8 to D768K

E2FThrouThd: 0 to 384

Physical Scope8bytes to 768K bytes

0 to 384 kbit/s

SettingThe default value of D2F2PTVMTHD, BeH2FTvmThd and RtDH2FTvmThd is D64, namely64 bytes.

The default value of E2FThrouThd is 8, namely 8 kbit/s.




5.5.5 DCH to FACH Traffic Time to triggerWhen the traffic volume is smaller than the lower threshold and lasts a time length, the UE reportevent 4B.

IDD2FTvmTimeToTrig

RtDH2FTvmTimeToTrig

BeH2FTvmTimeToTrig

E2FThrouTimeToTrig


Physical ScopeEnum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000 ) ms

SettingThe default value is D240, namely 240 ms.



5-33


None.

Related Commands



5.5.6 FACH to PCH State Transition TimerThis describes the FACH to PCH state transition timer. The parameter checks whether thesubscribers in the CELL_FACH state are stably in low activity to determine whether there is aneed for state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH.

ID

FtoPStateTransTimer

Value Range

1 to 65535

Physical Scope

1 s to 65535 s

Setting



l If FtoPStateTransTimer is excessively low, it may hard to judge whether the user is inrelatively stable low activity status.

l If FtoPStateTransTimer is excessively high, common channel resources may be wasted.

FtoPStateTransTimer needs to be set on the basis of the BE service model.

Related Commands



5.5.7 Cell Reselection TimerThis describes the cell reselection timer. The cell reselection timer and CellReSelectCounterjointly check the status of the UE that frequently performs cell reselection to determine whetherthere is a need of state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH.





ID

CellReSelectTimer

Value Range

1 to 65535

Physical Scope

1 s to 65535 s

Setting

The default value is 180, 180 s.


l If CellReSelectTimer is excessively low, it is hard to judge whether the users are inrelatively stable low activity.

l If CellReSelectTimer is excessively high, no state transition occurs for a long time.

For a UE in CELL_PCH, if the number of cell reselection is larger than or equal toCellReSelectCounter within the CellReSelectTimer, it can be considered that the UE is in thestate of frequent cell reselection. The target state will be set to URA_PCH when the timer expired,and if the UE initiates cell update again, RNC will enable it to transit to URA_PCH through themessage CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM to UE.

Related Commands


Use SET UESTATETRANS to set and LST UESTATETRANS to queryCellReSelectTimer.

5.6 PS InactiveThe common configurable PS inactive parameters are listed here.

Table 5-6 List of PS inactive parameters

No. Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 PsInactTmrForCon

Conversational service T1

20 s Set or modify: SETPSINACTTIMERQuery: LSTPSINACTTIMER

RNC

2 PsInactTmrForStr

Streamingservice T1

20 s

3 PsInactTmrForInt

Interactiveservice T1

20 s



5-35

No. Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

4 PsInactTmrForBac

Backgroundservice T1

20 s

5.6.1 PS Inactive TimerThis describes the timer T1 for conversational, streaming, interactive and background services.When no data is transferred during this timer for the PS interactive subscribers, then the PDCPlayer requests the RRC layer to release the connection.

5.6.1 PS Inactive TimerThis describes the timer T1 for conversational, streaming, interactive and background services.When no data is transferred during this timer for the PS interactive subscribers, then the PDCPlayer requests the RRC layer to release the connection.

ID

PsInactTmrForCon

PsInactTmrForStr

PsInactTmrForInt

PsInactTmrForBac

Value Range

0 to 14400

Physical Scope

0 s to 14400 s

Setting



PsInactTmrForInt can be set to have the resource of the access layer be released for the PSinteractive service if no data is transmitted for the PS interactive service for a period to promotethe utilization of the cell resource.

l The higher PsInactTmrForInt is, the more resource is occupied when no data istransferred.

l The lower PsInactTmrForInt is, the more frequently the timer is started and the moresignaling messages are transferred when data transfer is unstable.





Related CommandsFor RNC-oriented parameters, use SET PSINACTTIMER to set and LSTPSINACTTIMER to query PsInactTmrForInt.



5-37

6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters

About This Chapter

This describes the special topic parameters, including parameters for cell channel powerdistribution, paging, RRC connection setup, synchronization, and location updating.

6.1 Cell Channel Power Distribution ParametersThis describes the cell channel power distribution parameters that can be modified by networkplanners.

6.2 Paging ParametersThis describes the paging parameters that can be modified by network planners.

6.3 RRC Connection Setup ParametersThis describes the RRC connection setup parameters that can be configured by network planners.

6.4 Synchronization ParametersThis describes the synchronization parameters that can be modified by network planners.

6.5 Location Update ParametersThis describes the location update parameters that can be modified by network planners.

6.6 User Priority ParametersThis describes the user priority parameters that can be modified by network planners.

6.7 Bearer Channel Type ParametersThis describes the bearer channel type parameters.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters


6-1

6.1 Cell Channel Power Distribution ParametersThis describes the cell channel power distribution parameters that can be modified by networkplanners.

Table 6-1 List of cell channel power distribution parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 MaxTxPower

Maximum celltransmitpower

430,namely43 dBm

Set: ADD CELLSETUPModify: MOD CELLSETUP

Cell

2 PCPICHPower

PCPICHtransmitpower

330,namely33 dBm

Set: ADD PCPICHQuery: LST PCPICHModify: MOD CELL

3 PSCHPowerSSCHPower

Transmitpower ofPSCH andSSCH

-50,namely -5dB

PschPowerSet: ADD PSCHQuery LST PSCHModify: MOD CELLSschPower Set: ADD SSCHQuery: LST SSCHModify: MOD CELL

4 BCHPower BCH transmitpower

-20,namely -2dB

Set: ADD BCHQuery: LST BCHModify: MOD CELL

5 MaxFachPower

MaximumFACHtransmitpower

10,namely 1dB

Set: ADD FACHQuery: LST FACHModify: MOD SCCPCH

FACH

6 PCHPower PCH transmitpower

20 dB Set: ADD PCHQuery: LST PCHModify: MOD SCCPCH

Cell

6 Miscellaneous Topic ParametersRAN




SerialNo.


MML Command Level

7 PICHPowerOffset

PICH transmitpower

-3 dB Set: ADD CHPWROFFSETQuery: LST PICHModify: MODPICHPWROFFSET

8 AICHPowerOffset

AICHtransmitpower

-6 dB Set: ADD CHPWROFFSETQuery: LST AICHModify: MODAICHPWROFFSET

6.1.1 Maximum Cell Transmit PowerThis describes the maximum downlink transmit power of the NodeB.


6.1.3 PSCH and SSCH Transmit PowerThis describes the transmit powers of the P-SCH and S-SCH relative to the PCPICH.

6.1.4 BCH Transmit PowerThis describes the transmit power of the PCCPCH bearing the BCH compared with the PCPICH.

6.1.5 Maximum FACH Transmit PowerThis describes the maximum FACH transmit power MaxFachPower relative to the PCPICH.

6.1.6 PCH Transmit PowerThis describes the transmit power of the PCH relative to the PCPICH.

6.1.7 PICH Transmit PowerThis describes the transmit power of the PICH relative to the PCPICH.

6.1.8 AICH Transmit PowerThis describes the transmit power of the AICH relative to the PCPICH.

6.1.1 Maximum Cell Transmit PowerThis describes the maximum downlink transmit power of the NodeB.

ID

MaxTxPower



6-3

Value Range

0 to 500

Physical Scope

0 dBm to 50 dBm, with the step of 0.1 dBm

Setting

The default value is 430, namely 43 dBm.

This parameter defines the sum of the maximum transmit powers of all the downlink channelsin the cell at the same time. It should be set according to the NodeB capability, cell range andcapacity. The parameter is set on the basis of network planning.


If MaxTxPower is excessively low, the downlink capacity and the coverage is limited.MaxTxPower, however, should not exceed the actual processing capability of the NodeB.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLSETUP to set and MOD CELLSETUP to modify MaxTxPower.


ID

PCPICHPower

Value Range

–100 to 500

Physical Scope

–10 dBm to 50 dBm, with the step of 0.1 dBm

Setting

The default value of PCPICHPower is 330, namely 33 dBm.

For a cell with large coverage, PCPICHPower should be set to a comparatively high value; fora cell with small coverage, PCPICHPower should be set to a comparatively low value. In aplanned multi-cell environment, the minimum value of PCPICHPower is definite. If the valueof PCPICHPower is lower than the allowed minimum value, coverage holes may occur whenthe cells are under heavy load.





Impact on the Network Performancel If PCPICHPower is excessively low, the downlink pilot coverage range is directly

affected.l If PCPICHPower is excessively high, the downlink interference increases and the transmit

power allocated to the service is reduced, and thus the downlink capacity is affected.

In addition, the configuration of PCPICHPower also has direct influence on the distribution ofhandover areas.

Related CommandsUse ADD PCPICH to set, LST PCPICH to query, and MOD CELL to modifyPCPICHPower.

6.1.3 PSCH and SSCH Transmit PowerThis describes the transmit powers of the P-SCH and S-SCH relative to the PCPICH.

IDPSCHPower

SSCHPower




These two parameters can be adjusted through measurement in the actual environment so thatthe transmit powers of the synchronization channels just satisfy the UE receiving demodulationrequirement. Specifically, when UEs receive signals at different locations within the range ofthe cell, the transmit power should be enough to ensure that the UE can implement fastsynchronization in most areas at the verge of the cell. Neither PSCH nor SSCH has come throughchannel code spectrum spread, so they produce more serious interference than other channelsdo, especially for near-end users. Therefore, PSCHPower and SSCHPower should not beexcessively high.

Impact on the Network Performancel If PSCHPower and SSCHPower are excessively low, users at the verge of cells fail in

network searching, resulting in influence on coverage of the downlink common channel.This finally affects the cell coverage.

l If PSCHPower and SSCHPower are excessively high, the power resources are wasted,and other channels are interfered seriously, thus the cell capacity is influenced.



6-5

Related Commandsl Use ADD PSCH to set and use LST PSCH to query PschPower.

l Use ADD SSCH to set and use LST SSCH to query SschPower.

After the cell setup, both PschPower and SschPower can be modified with MOD CELL.

6.1.4 BCH Transmit PowerThis describes the transmit power of the PCCPCH bearing the BCH compared with the PCPICH.

IDBCHPower



SettingThe default value is –20, namely –2 dB.

This parameter can also be adjusted and optimized through measurement in the actualenvironment. When UEs receive signals at different locations within the range of the cell, thetransmit power should be enough to ensure the correct demodulation of the information carriedon the channel in most areas at the verge of the cell. BCHPower should not be excessively high,so as to avoid unnecessary waste of the transmit power.

Impact on the Network Performancel If BCHPower is excessively low, users at the verge of cells fail in receiving the system

information, resulting in the influence on the coverage of the downlink common channel,which finally affects cell coverage.

l If BCHPower is excessively high, other channels are interfered seriously, and thus the cellcapacity is influenced.

Related CommandsUse ADD BCH to set, LST BCH to query, and MOD CELL to modify BCHPower.

6.1.5 Maximum FACH Transmit PowerThis describes the maximum FACH transmit power MaxFachPower relative to the PCPICH.

IDMaxFachPower








If the FACH power is excessively low, the UE fails to receive the FACH data packets or the UEreceives error packets in a large portion; if the FACH power is excessively high, the power iswasted. Set the maximum FACH transmit power to an appropriate value that is just enough toensure the target BLER.

Impact on the Network Performancel If MaxFachPower is excessively low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive correctly

the services and signaling borne over the FACH, resulting in the influence on the downlinkcommon channel coverage and the cell coverage.

l If MaxFachPower is excessively high, other channels are interfered, the downlink powerresources are occupied, and consequently the cell capacity is influenced.

Related CommandsUse ADD FACH to set, LST FACH to query, and MOD SCCPCH to modifyMaxFachPower.

NOTE

In the MOD SCCPCH command, the maximum transmit powers of the two FACH channels arerespectively FACH1MaxPower and FACH2MaxPower.

6.1.6 PCH Transmit PowerThis describes the transmit power of the PCH relative to the PCPICH.

IDPCHPower






6-7

If the PCH power is excessively low, the UE fails to receive the PCH data packets or the UEreceives wrong packets, which may increase the retransmission times of paging packets,resulting in the paging failure or the paging delay increase. If the PCH power is excessively high,the power is wasted.

Impact on the Network Performancel If PCHPower is excessively low, users at the verge of cells fail in receiving the system

information, resulting in the influence on the coverage of the downlink common channel,which finally affects cell coverage.

l If PCHPower is excessively high, other channels are interfered seriously, the downlinkpower is occupied, and thus the cell capacity is influenced.

Related CommandsUse ADD PCH to set, LST PCH to query, and MOD SCCPCH to modify PCHPower.

6.1.7 PICH Transmit PowerThis describes the transmit power of the PICH relative to the PCPICH.

IDPICHPowerOffset




An appropriate transmit power value should be set for PICH to ensure that all the users at thecell verge can receive the paging indications. The transmit power, however, should not beexcessively high, or the power is wasted.

Impact on the Network Performancel If PICHPowerOffset is excessively low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive paging

messages correctly, resulting in mis-operation in reading PCH channel and waste of theUE battery, and the downlink common channel coverage and cell coverage may be affected.

l If PICHPowerOffset is excessively high, other channels are interfered seriously, thedownlink power is occupied, and thus the cell capacity is influenced.

Related CommandsUse ADD CHPWROFFSET to set, LST PICH to query, and MOD PICHPWROFFSET tomodify PICHPowerOffset.





6.1.8 AICH Transmit PowerThis describes the transmit power of the AICH relative to the PCPICH.

IDAICHPowerOffset



SettingThe default value is –6, namely -6 dB.

An appropriate transmit power value should be set for the AICH to ensure that all the users atthe cell verge can receive the paging indications. The transmit power, however, should not beexcessively high to avoid power waste.

Impact on the Network Performancel If AICHPowerOffset is excessively low, users at the verge of cells fail in receiving the

system information, resulting in the influence on the coverage of the downlink commonchannel, which finally affects cell coverage.

l If AICHPowerOffset is excessively high, other channels are interfered seriously, thedownlink transmit power is occupied, and thus the cell capacity is influenced.

Related CommandsUse ADD CHPWROFFSET to set, LST AICH to query, and MOD AICHPWROFFSET tomodify AICHPowerOffset.

6.2 Paging ParametersThis describes the paging parameters that can be modified by network planners.



6-9

Table 6-2 List of paging parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 DRXCycleLenCoef

Paging cyclecoefficient

6 Set or modify: SET FRC and MODCNDOMAINQuery: LST FRC or LST CNDOMAIN

RNC

2 MaccPageRepeatTimes

Number of RNCpagingrepetitions

1 Set or modify: SET DPUCFGDATAQuery: LST DPUCFGDATA

6.2.1 Paging Cycle CoefficientThis describes the paging cycle coefficient. The parameter is the discontinuous receiving (DRX)cycle coefficient, and it is a parameter of paging type 1. The paging cycle coefficient falls intotwo categories: DRX cycle coefficient of the UTRAN domain and DRX cycle coefficient of theCN domain.

6.2.2 Number of RNC Paging RepetitionsThis describes the number of RNC paging repetitions. If the number of paging messagesretransmitted by the system exceeds the parameter and there is still no response to the pagings,the system no longer transmits the paging.

6.2.1 Paging Cycle CoefficientThis describes the paging cycle coefficient. The parameter is the discontinuous receiving (DRX)cycle coefficient, and it is a parameter of paging type 1. The paging cycle coefficient falls intotwo categories: DRX cycle coefficient of the UTRAN domain and DRX cycle coefficient of theCN domain.

ID

DRXCycleLenCoef

Value Range

UTRAN domain: 3 to 9

CN domain: 6 to 9

Physical Scope

None.





SettingThe default values of both the DRX cycle coefficients of the UTRAN domain and the CN domainare 6.

In the idle mode, the UE can receive the paging indication in the DRX mode to reduce the powerconsumption. In this case, the UE needs to detect only one paging indication in a paging occasionwithin each DRX cycle. The DRX cycle length of UTRAN domain is obtained by substitutingthis parameter into the formula DRX cycle = 2K × PBP frames.

Where, K is the paging cycle coefficient, and PBP is the number of paging block periods (Inthe FDD mode, PBP = 1).

Impact on the Network Performancel If DRXCycleLenCoef is excessively low, the UE detects the paging channel frequently,

and thus the battery is consumed fast.l If DRXCycleLenCoef is excessively high, the UE reacts very slowly to paging indications,

and the system may repeatedly page the UE, resulting in increased downlink interference.

Related Commandsl Use SET FRC to set the DRX cycle coefficient of the UTRAN domain.

l Use ADD CNDOMAIN to set and MOD CNDOMAIN to modify the DRX cyclecoefficient of the CN domain.

The DRX cycle coefficients of both the UTRAN domain and the CN domain must be set. UseLST FRC and LST CNDOMAIN to respectively query the DRX cycle coefficient of theUTRAN domain and the DRX cycle coefficient of the CN domain.

6.2.2 Number of RNC Paging RepetitionsThis describes the number of RNC paging repetitions. If the number of paging messagesretransmitted by the system exceeds the parameter and there is still no response to the pagings,the system no longer transmits the paging.

IDMaccPageRepeatTimes

Value Range0 to 2



In order to increase the paging success rate, the CN and RNC both repeat paging messages. Thepaging repetition, however, has negative effects: it increases the paging messages, especially in



6-11

the condition of downlink common channel congestion on the air interface; therefore, thedownlink channel resources are wasted and new paging messages cannot be timely delivered.

If the RNC continuously transmits two paging messages of Type 1, the interval of the two pagingmessages is a paging period.

To guarantee a high paging success rate and high paging efficiency, the number and time intervalof paging repetitions of the CN must be set on the basis of the number of UTRAN pagingrepetitions. If the UTRAN retransmits the paging message once, the time interval for CN pagingrepetitions should be longer than two DRX periods.

The CN cannot retransmit the next paging message until the UTRAN finishes transmitting andretransmitting the previous paging message. Therefore, the number and time interval of RNCpaging repetitions, the number of UTRAN paging repetitions, and DRX paging period need tobe adjusted together.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf MaccPageRepeatTimes is excessively high, the system repeatedly pages UEs, the downlinkcommon channel resources are wasted, and the downlink interference increases.

Related CommandsUse SET DPUCFGDATA to set and LST DPUCFGDATA to queryMaccPageRepeatTimes.

6.3 RRC Connection Setup ParametersThis describes the RRC connection setup parameters that can be configured by network planners.

Table 6-3 List of RRC connection setup parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 T300N300

T300 timerN300 constant

T300: D2000 (2s)N300: 3

Set: SETIDLEMODETIMERQuery: LSTIDLEMODETIMER

RNC

6.3.1 T300 and N300This describes the T300 timer and the constant N300. The UE starts the T300 timer after sendingthe RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message and stops the T300 timer upon receiving the RRCCONNECTION SETUP message. If the T300 timer times out and the number of retransmittedRRC CONNECTION REQUEST messages is smaller than N300, the UE continues to retransmit





the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message. If the T300 timer times out and the number ofretransmitted RRC CONNECTION REQUEST messages exceeds N300, the UE enters idlemode.

6.3.1 T300 and N300This describes the T300 timer and the constant N300. The UE starts the T300 timer after sendingthe RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message and stops the T300 timer upon receiving the RRCCONNECTION SETUP message. If the T300 timer times out and the number of retransmittedRRC CONNECTION REQUEST messages is smaller than N300, the UE continues to retransmitthe RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message. If the T300 timer times out and the number ofretransmitted RRC CONNECTION REQUEST messages exceeds N300, the UE enters idlemode.

IDT300

N300

Value RangeT300: Enum (D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000, D1200, D1400, D1600, D1800, D2000,D3000, D4000, D6000, D8000)

N300: 0 to 7

Physical ScopeT300: Enum (100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000,8000) ms

N300: None

SettingThe default value of T300 is D2000, namely 2 s. The default value of N300 is 3.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe setting of timer T300 should be considered together with the UE and UTRAN processingdelay and the propagation delay. The higher T300 is, the longer the UE waits. The higherN300 is, the higher success probability of the RRC connection setup is, and the longer RRCsetup time it takes. If N300 is excessively high, it is likely that a UE repeats access attempts andconnection setup requests, and consequently other UEs are influenced seriously.

Related CommandsUse SET IDLEMODETIMER to set and LST IDLEMODETIMER to query T300 andN300.

6.4 Synchronization ParametersThis describes the synchronization parameters that can be modified by network planners.



6-13

Table 6-4 List of synchronization parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 NInsyncInd

Number of successivein-sync indications

5 Set: ADD CELLSETUPQuery: LST CELLModify: MOD CELL

Cell

2 NOutsyncInd

Number of successiveout-of-syncindications

50

3 TRLFailure

Radio link failuretimer duration

50 (5 s)

4 N312T312

When the UE starts toset up the dedicatedchannel, it starts thetimer T312, and afterthe UE detects N312in-sync indicationsfrom L1, it stops thetimer T312. Once thetimer expires, thephysical channel setupfails.

l N312:D1

l T312: 6s

Set or modify: SETIDLEMODETIMERQuery: LSTIDLEMODETIMER

RNC

5 N313N315T313

After the UE detectsN313 successive out-of-sync indicationsfrom L1, it starts thetimer T313. After theUE detects N315successive in-syncindications from L1, itstops timer T313.

l N313:D50

l N315:D1

l T313: 3s

Set or modify: SETCONNMODETIMERQuery: LSTCONNMODETIMER

6.4.1 Number of Successive In-Sync IndicationsThis describes the number of successive in-sync indications.

6.4.2 Number of Successive Out-of-Sync IndicationsThis describes the number of successive out-of-sync indications.

6.4.3 Radio Link Failure Timer DurationThis describes the duration of the radio link failure timer. When the radio link set is in thesynchronized state, the NodeB starts the timer TRlFailure after it receives successive out-of-sync indications of the number defined by NOutsyncInd. The NodeB shall stop and reset thetimer TRlFailure after receiving successive in-sync indications of the number defined by





NInsyncInd. When the timer TRlFailure expires, the NodeB triggers the radio link failureprocess, and indicates which radio link set is out-of-sync.

6.4.4 T312 and N312This describes the T312 timer and the constant N312. When the UE starts to set up the dedicatedchannel, it starts the timer T312, and after the UE detects N312 in-sync indications from L1, itstops the timer T312. Once the timer expires, the physical channel setup fails.

6.4.5 N313, N315, and T313This describes the constants N313 and N315 and the timer T313. After detecting a certain number(the number is defined by N313) of successive out-of-sync indications from L1, the UE startsthe timer T313. After detecting a certain number (the number is defined by N315) of successivein-sync indications from L1, the UE stops the timer T313. Once the timer expires, the radio linkis disconnected.

6.4.1 Number of Successive In-Sync IndicationsThis describes the number of successive in-sync indications.

ID

NInsyncInd

Value Range

1 to 256

Physical Scope

None.

Setting


This parameter defines the of successive in-sync indications required for the NodeB to triggerthe radio link recovery process. The radio link set remains in the initial state until it has receiveda certain number (the number is defined by NInsyncInd) of successive in-sync indications fromL1, and then the NodeB triggers the radio link recovery process, which indicates that the radiolink set has been synchronized. Once the radio link recovery process is triggered, the radio linkset is considered to be in the synchronized state.


l The higher NInsyncInd is, the stricter the synchronization process becomes, and the moredifficult the synchronization occurs.

l The lower NInsyncInd is, the easier the synchronization occurs.

If the link quality is poor, a simple synchronization requirement leads to waste of the UE powerand increase of uplink interference. In the radio link maintenance process, NInsyncInd is usedtogether with the successive out-of-sync indication counter.



6-15

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLSETUP to set, LST CELL to query, and MOD CELL to modifyNInsyncInd.

6.4.2 Number of Successive Out-of-Sync IndicationsThis describes the number of successive out-of-sync indications.

IDNOutsyncInd

Value Range1 to 256

Physical ScopeNone.


NOutsyncInd defines the number of successive out-of-sync indications required to receivebefore starting the timer TRlFailure. When the radio link set is in synchronized state, the NodeBstarts the timer TRlFailure after it receives successive out-of-sync indications of the numberdefined by NOutsyncInd. The NodeB shall stop and reset the timer TRlFailure after receivingsuccessive in-sync indications of the number defined by NInsyncInd. When the timerTRlFailure expires, the NodeB triggers the radio link failure process, and indicates which radiolink set is out-of-sync.

Impact on the Network Performancel If NOutsyncInd is excessively high, the link out-of-sync decision is likely to happen.

l If NOutsyncInd is excessively low, the link out-of-sync decision is not likely to happen.But if the link quality is poor, it may result in a waste of the UE power and increased uplinkinterference.

In the radio link maintenance process, this parameter is used together with the successive in-sync indication counter.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLSETUP to set, LST CELL to query and MOD CELL to modifyNOutsyncInd.

6.4.3 Radio Link Failure Timer DurationThis describes the duration of the radio link failure timer. When the radio link set is in thesynchronized state, the NodeB starts the timer TRlFailure after it receives successive out-of-sync indications of the number defined by NOutsyncInd. The NodeB shall stop and reset the





timer TRlFailure after receiving successive in-sync indications of the number defined byNInsyncInd. When the timer TRlFailure expires, the NodeB triggers the radio link failureprocess, and indicates which radio link set is out-of-sync.

IDTRLFailure

Value Range0 to 255

Physical Scope0 s to 25.5 s, with the step of 0.1 s


Impact on the Network Performancel If TRLFailure is excessively low, there are few chances for the radio link to get

synchronized.l If TRLFailure is excessively high, the radio link failure process is probably delayed, and

the downlink interference increases.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLSETUP to set, use LST CELL to query and use MOD CELL to modifyTRLFailure.

6.4.4 T312 and N312This describes the T312 timer and the constant N312. When the UE starts to set up the dedicatedchannel, it starts the timer T312, and after the UE detects N312 in-sync indications from L1, itstops the timer T312. Once the timer expires, the physical channel setup fails.

IDT312

N312

Value RangeT312: 1 to 15

N312: Enum (D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000)

Physical ScopeT312: 1 s to 15 s



6-17

N312: Enum (1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000)

SettingThe default value of N312 is D1, namely 1, and the default value of T312 is 6, namely 6 s.

Impact on the Network Performancel The higher N312 is, the more difficult the dedicated channel synchronization becomes.

l The higher T312 is, the higher the synchronization probability is, but the longer thesynchronization time it takes.

Related CommandsIdle mode:

Use SET IDLEMODETIMER to set and LST IDLEMODETIMER to query N312 andT312.

Connected mode:

Use SET CONNMODETIMER to set and LST CONNMODETIMER to query N312 andT312.

6.4.5 N313, N315, and T313This describes the constants N313 and N315 and the timer T313. After detecting a certain number(the number is defined by N313) of successive out-of-sync indications from L1, the UE startsthe timer T313. After detecting a certain number (the number is defined by N315) of successivein-sync indications from L1, the UE stops the timer T313. Once the timer expires, the radio linkis disconnected.

IDN313

N315

T313

Value RangeN313: Enum (D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200)

N315: Enum (D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000)

T312: 1 to 15

Physical ScopeN313: Enum (1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200)

N315: Enum (1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000)

T312: 1 s to 15 s





SettingThe default value of N313 is D50; the default value of N315 is D1; the default value of T313 is3, namely 3 s.

Impact on the Network Performancel The higher N313 is, the more difficult it is to start the timer T313, and the lower the out-

of-sync probability is.l The lower N315 is, the longer T313 is, and the higher the link recovery probability is.

Related CommandsUse SET CONNMODETIMER to set and LST CONNMODETIMER to query N313,N315, and T313.

6.5 Location Update ParametersThis describes the location update parameters that can be modified by network planners.

Table 6-5 List of location update parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 T3212

Periodiclocationupdate timer

10, that is,1 hour

Set: ADD CNDOMAINQuery: LST CNDOMAINModify: MOD CNDOMAIN

RNC

6.5.1 Periodical Location Update TimerThis describes the time duration of the periodical location update timer.

6.5.1 Periodical Location Update TimerThis describes the time duration of the periodical location update timer.

IDT3212

Value Range0 to 255



6-19

Physical Scope0 to 1530 minutes, with the step of 6 minutes

SettingThe default value is 10, namely 1 hour.

If T3212 is 0, no location update is needed. T3212 is valid only when the CN domain identifieris CS_DOMAIN.

If the timer T3212 is not started, the system starts the timer T3212 when the UE enters NORMALSERVICE or ATTEMPTing TO UPDATE sub-mode of MM IDLE mode, and then the UEsends the LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message. If the UE receives the LOCATIONUPDATING ACCEPT, LOCATION UPDATING REJECT, or AUTHENTICATIONREJECT message, the system stops and initializes the timer T3212. Then the system starts alocation update again after the UE enters NORMAL SERVICE or ATTEMPTing TOUPDATE mode. If the timer T3212 expires, the system initializes the timer and starts a locationupdate again.

Impact on the Network Performancel If T3212 is excessively low, the UE performs location updates frequently, resulting in a

large number of location update messages on the Uu and Iu interfaces.l If T3212 is excessively high, the UE location information may not be updated timely.

Related CommandsUse ADD CNDOMAIN to set, LST CNDOMAIN to query, and MOD CNDOMAIN to modifyT3212.

6.6 User Priority ParametersThis describes the user priority parameters that can be modified by network planners.





Table 6-6 List of user priority parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 ARP1PriorityARP2PriorityARP3PriorityARP4PriorityARP5PriorityARP6PriorityARP7PriorityARP8PriorityARP9PriorityARP10PriorityARP11PriorityARP12PriorityARP13PriorityARP14Priority

User prioritiescorresponding toallocation orretention priority1 to 14

None. Set: SETUSERPRIORITYQuery: LSTUSERPRIORITY

RNC

2 PriorityReference Integratedpriorityconfigurationreference

ARP

3 CarrierTypePriorInd Indicator ofcarrier typepriority

DCH

6.6.1 User Priorities Corresponding to Allocation or Retention Priority 1 to 14This describes the user priorities corresponding to allocation or retention priority 1 to 14.

6.6.2 Intergated Priority Configuration ReferenceThis describes the reference used to determine which priority is arranged at the first in the prioritysequence.

6.6.3 Indication of Carrier Type PriorityThis describes the indication that indicates which carrier type (DCH or HSPA) has the higherpriority when both carrier types have the same priority of ARP and TrafficClass.



6-21

6.6.1 User Priorities Corresponding to Allocation or RetentionPriority 1 to 14

This describes the user priorities corresponding to allocation or retention priority 1 to 14.

ID

ARP1Priority

ARP2Priority

ARP3Priority

ARP4Priority

ARP5Priority

ARP6Priority

ARP7Priority

ARP8Priority

ARP9Priority

ARP10Priority

ARP11Priority

ARP12Priority

ARP13Priority

ARP14Priority

Value Range

Gold, Sliver, Copper

Physical Scope

1, 2, 3

Setting

None.


None.

Related Commands

Use SET USERPRIORITY to set and LST USERPRIORITY to query the user prioritiescorresponding to the allocation or retention priorities.





6.6.2 Intergated Priority Configuration ReferenceThis describes the reference used to determine which priority is arranged at the first in the prioritysequence.

IDPriorityReference

Value RangeARP, TrafficClass

Physical Scope1, 2

SettingThe default value is ARP.


Related CommandsUse SET USERPRIORITY to set and LST USERPRIORITY to query PriorityReference.

6.6.3 Indication of Carrier Type PriorityThis describes the indication that indicates which carrier type (DCH or HSPA) has the higherpriority when both carrier types have the same priority of ARP and TrafficClass.

IDCarrierTypePriorInd

Value RangeNONE, DCH, HSPA

Physical Scope0, 1, 2

SettingThe default value is NONE.




6-23

Related CommandsUse SET USERPRIORITY to set and LST USERPRIORITY to queryCarrierTypePriorInd.

6.7 Bearer Channel Type ParametersThis describes the bearer channel type parameters.

Table 6-7 List of bearer channel type parameters

SerialNO.


MML Command Level

1 VoipChlType Priority type ofthe bearerchannel for theVoIP

DCH Set: SETFRCCHLTYPEPARAQuery: LSTFRCCHLTYPEPARA

RNC

2 ImsChlType Priority type ofthe bearerchannel for theIMS signaling

DCH

3 SrbChlType Priority type ofthe bearerchannel for theSRB

DCH

4 SrbChlTypeRrcEffect-Flag

Flag of effectingSrbChlType atthe RRC stage

FALSE

5 DlStrThsOnHsdpa Downlinkstreaming trafficthreshold onHSDPA

64kbit/s

6 DlBeTraffThsOnHsd-pa

Downlink BEtraffic thresholdon HSDPA

64kbit/s

7 UlStrThsOnHsupa Uplink streamingtraffic thresholdon HSUPA

256kbit/s





SerialNO.


MML Command Level

8 UlBeTraffThsOnHsu-pa

Uplink BE trafficthreshold onHSUPA

608kbit/s

9 UlBeTraffDecThsDlBeTraffDecThs

Uplink anddownlink BEtraffic decisionthreshold onDCH

8 kbit/s

Set: SETFRCCHLTYPEPARA/ADD CELLFRCQuery: LSTFRCCHLTYPEPARA/LST CELLFRC

10

ImsBearEnhanced-Switch

Enhanced switchof the IMSsignaling bearer

OFF Set: SET FRCQuery: LST FRC

11

ImsInitialAccessRate Initial access rateof the IMSsignaling

32kbit/s

6.7.1 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the VoIPThis parameter indicates the type of the VoIP bearer channel.

6.7.2 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the IMS SignalingThis parameter indicates the type of the IMS signaling.

6.7.3 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the SRBThis parameter indicates the type of the SRB.

6.7.4 Flag of Effecting SrbChlType at the RRC StageThis parameter indicates whether SrbChlType takes effect when the RRC connection isestablished and at other stages, or takes effect only at other stages.

6.7.5 Downlink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSDPAThe rate decision threshold of Downlink PS domain streaming service to be carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum Downlink service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, theservice will be carried on HS-DSCH. Otherwise, on DCH.

6.7.6 Downlink BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPAThe rate decision threshold of Downlink PS domain background or interactive service to becarried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service rate is greater than or equal to thisthreshold, the service will be carried on HS-DSCH. Otherwise, on DCH.

6.7.7 Uplink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPA



6-25

The rate decision threshold of Uplink PS domain streaming service to be carried on E-DCH.When the maximum Uplink service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the servicewill be carried on E-DCH.

6.7.8 Uplink BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPAThe rate decision threshold of UL PS domain background or interactive service to be carried onE-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the servicewill be carried on E-DCH.

6.7.9 Uplink and Downlink BE Traffic Decision Threshold on DCHThe default rate decision threshold of uplink and downlink PS domain background or interactiveservice to be carried on DCH. If the FRC parameters of the best cell cannot be obtained, thisdefault value will be used. When the uplink and downlink service rate is greater than or equalto this threshold, the service will be set up on DCH. Otherwise, on CCH.

6.7.10 Enhanced Switch of the IMS Signaling BearerThis parameter indicates whether to enable the function of configuring the initial bandwidth ofthe IMS signaling at the background.

6.7.11 Initial Access Rate of the IMS SignallingThis parameter indicates the initial bandwidth of the IMS signalling configured at thebackground.

6.7.1 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the VoIPThis parameter indicates the type of the VoIP bearer channel.

IDVoipChlType

Value RangeDCH, HSDPA, HSPA

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingThe default value is DCH.

DCH means the VoIP service is carried by the DCH channel. HSDPA means the VoIP is carriedby the HSDPA channel. HSPA means the VoIP is carried by the HSDPA and HSUPA channels.


Related CommandsUse SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to queryVoipChlType.





6.7.2 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the IMS SignalingThis parameter indicates the type of the IMS signaling.

IDImsChlType


Physical ScopeNone.


DCH means the IMS signaling is carried by the DCH channel. HSDPA means the IMS signalingis carried by the HSDPA channel. HSPA means the IMS signaling is carried by the HSDPA andHSUPA channels.


Related CommandsUse SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to queryImsChlType.

6.7.3 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the SRBThis parameter indicates the type of the SRB.

IDSrbChlType


Physical ScopeNone.




6-27

DCH means the SRB is carried by the DCH channel. HSDPA means the SRB is carried by theHSDPA channel. HSPA means the SRB is carried by the HSDPA and HSUPA channels.


Related CommandsUse SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to querySrbChlType.

6.7.4 Flag of Effecting SrbChlType at the RRC StageThis parameter indicates whether SrbChlType takes effect when the RRC connection isestablished and at other stages, or takes effect only at other stages.

IDSrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag

Value RangeFALSE, TRUE

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingThe default value is FALSE.

TRUE means SrbChlType takes effect when the RRC connection is established and at otherstages. FALSE means SrbChlType takes effect only at other stages.


Related CommandsUse SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to querySrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag.

6.7.5 Downlink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSDPAThe rate decision threshold of Downlink PS domain streaming service to be carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum Downlink service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, theservice will be carried on HS-DSCH. Otherwise, on DCH.

IDDlStrThsOnHsdpa





Value RangeD8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384

Physical Scope8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s


The streaming service is fit to be carried on the cell with abundance power resource, such asindoor cell. The bottleneck of such cell usually is channel code resource.

If the service is carried on DCH, the higher the rate, the more the channel code needed. If theservice is carried on HS-DSCH, the change of channel code needed is small when the rate gettinghigher. So that the high-speed service is fit to carried on HS-DSCH.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the parameter is set to low, the capacity of HS-DSCH may be lower than that of DCH.

Related CommandsUse SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to queryDlStrThsOnHsdpa.

6.7.6 Downlink BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPAThe rate decision threshold of Downlink PS domain background or interactive service to becarried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service rate is greater than or equal to thisthreshold, the service will be carried on HS-DSCH. Otherwise, on DCH.

IDDlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa

Value RangeD8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D768, D1024, D1536, D1800, D2048

Physical Scope8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s, 768 kbit/s,1024 kbit/s, 1536 kbit/s, 1800 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s


HS-DSCH channel is a resource sharing channel. If the burst BE service is carried on HS-DSCH,the time utilization of subscribers increase, converge the transmit data, save the power resource.So that all the BE service is recommended to be carried on HS-DSCH.



6-29

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the parameter is set too large, the utilization of system resource will be lower.

Related CommandsUse SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to queryDlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa.

6.7.7 Uplink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPAThe rate decision threshold of Uplink PS domain streaming service to be carried on E-DCH.When the maximum Uplink service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the servicewill be carried on E-DCH.

IDUlStrThsOnHsupa

Value RangeD8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384

Physical Scope8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s



Related CommandsUse SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to queryUlStrThsOnHsdpa.

6.7.8 Uplink BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPAThe rate decision threshold of UL PS domain background or interactive service to be carried onE-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the servicewill be carried on E-DCH.

IDUlBeTraffThsOnHsupa

Value RangeD8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D768, D1024, D1536, D1800, D2048





Physical Scope8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s, 768 kbit/s,1024 kbit/s, 1536 kbit/s, 1800 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s


Impact on the Network PerformanceThrough the emulation，when data service is carried on E-DCH, system capacity increase ratherthan that is carried on R99 channel. So that all the BE service can be carried on E-DCH.

Related CommandsUse SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to queryUlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa.

6.7.9 Uplink and Downlink BE Traffic Decision Threshold on DCHThe default rate decision threshold of uplink and downlink PS domain background or interactiveservice to be carried on DCH. If the FRC parameters of the best cell cannot be obtained, thisdefault value will be used. When the uplink and downlink service rate is greater than or equalto this threshold, the service will be set up on DCH. Otherwise, on CCH.

IDUlBeTraffDecThs

DlBeTraffDecThs

Value RangeD8, D16

Physical Scope8, 16. unit: kbit/s


Impact on the Network PerformanceThe service carried on DCH can obtain better rate and consume more system resource. So low-speed service is often carried on CCH, and the high-speed service is carried on DCH.

Related CommandsUse SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA or ADD CELLFRC to set and LSTFRCCHLTYPEPARA or LST CELLFRC to query the parameters.



6-31

6.7.10 Enhanced Switch of the IMS Signaling BearerThis parameter indicates whether to enable the function of configuring the initial bandwidth ofthe IMS signaling at the background.

IDImsBearEnhancedSwitch

Value RangeOFF, ON

Physical ScopeNone.


OFF means the function is disabled. ON means the function is enabled.


Related CommandsUse SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query ImsBearEnhancedSwitch.

6.7.11 Initial Access Rate of the IMS SignallingThis parameter indicates the initial bandwidth of the IMS signalling configured at thebackground.

IDImsInitialAccessRate

Value RangeD32, D64

Physical Scope32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s


This parameter takes effect when the IMS signalling enhanced switch is enabled.





Impact on the Network PerformanceIf this parameter is set to 32 kbit/s, a higher bandwidth utilization can be obtained, but the accessdelay of the IMS service is longer. If this parameter is set to 64 kbit/s, a shorter service accessdelay can be obtained, but the bandwidth utilization is lower.

Related CommandsUse SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query ImsInitialAccessRate.



6-33

7 HSDPA Parameters

About This Chapter

This describes HSDPA parameters as follows: HSDPA power resource management parameters,HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters, HSDPA mobility managementparameters, HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters, and HSDPA calladmission control algorithm parameters.

7.1 HSDPA Power Resource Management ParametersThis describes the HSDPA power resource management parameters. Based on three differentUE capabilities, the minimum TTI interval for UE to receive data on HS-PDSCH is 1, 2, or 3TTIs. For the default configuration, inside the brackets is the physical value while outside thebrackets is the cell value.

7.2 HSDPA Code Resource Management ParametersThis describes the HSDPA code resource management parameters that can be modified bynetwork planners.

7.3 HSDPA Mobility Management ParametersThe common configurable HSDPA mobility management parameters are listed here.

7.4 HSDPA Direct Retry and Channel Type Switch ParametersThis describes the HSDPA direct retry and channel type switch parameters that can be modifiedby network planners.

7.5 HSDPA Admission Control ParametersThis describes the HSDPA admission control parameters that can be modified by networkplanners.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 7 HSDPA Parameters


7-1

7.1 HSDPA Power Resource Management ParametersThis describes the HSDPA power resource management parameters. Based on three differentUE capabilities, the minimum TTI interval for UE to receive data on HS-PDSCH is 1, 2, or 3TTIs. For the default configuration, inside the brackets is the physical value while outside thebrackets is the cell value.

7.1.1 HSPA Total Power and Measurement Power Offset ConstantThis describes the HSPA total power and measurement power offset constant that can bemodified by network planners.

7.1.2 F-DPCH Power Control ParameterThis describes the F-DPCH power control RNC-oriented parameters.

7.1.1 HSPA Total Power and Measurement Power Offset ConstantThis describes the HSPA total power and measurement power offset constant that can bemodified by network planners.

Table 7-1 HSPA total power and measurement power offset constant

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 HspaPower Power offset ofthe total power ofHSPA relative tothe cell maximumtransmit power

0 dB Set: ADD CELLHSDPAQuery: LST CELLHSDPAModify: MOD CELLHSDPA

Cell

2 HsPdschMPOConstEnum

Measurementpower offsetconstant. MeasurePower Offset =Min(13,CellMaxPower - PcpichPower -Measure PowerOffset Constant)

2.5 dB

7.1.1.1 HSPA Total PowerThis describes the offset between the maximum value of the sum of HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH and the maximum transmit power of a cell.

7 HSDPA ParametersRAN




7.1.1.2 Measurement Power Offset ConstantThis describes the constant that is used to calculate the measurement power offset (MPO).

HSPA Total PowerThis describes the offset between the maximum value of the sum of HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH and the maximum transmit power of a cell.

IDHspaPower



SettingThe default value of is 0, namely 0 dB.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe maximum value for dynamic power adjustment affects the throughput of HSDPAsubscribers on the edge of a cell.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA tomodify the total HSPA power.

Measurement Power Offset ConstantThis describes the constant that is used to calculate the measurement power offset (MPO).

IDHsPdschMPOConstEnum



SettingThe default value is 2.5, namely 2.5 dB.



7-3

Impact on the Network PerformanceIt helps calculate the MPO (Γ).

Measure Power Offset = Max ( -6, Min (13, CellMaxPower - PcpichPower - Measure PowerOffset Constant))

According to the formula PHSPDSCH = PCPICH + Γ + Δ, calculate PHSPDSCH, and then convert itto CQI. This parameter is used to adjust the distribution of CQI reported by UE. In order toschedule and resource allocate based on correct channel quality on the network side, make surethat the value of CQI cannot be 0 or 30.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA tomodify HsPdschMPOConstEnum.

7.1.2 F-DPCH Power Control ParameterThis describes the F-DPCH power control RNC-oriented parameters.

Table 7-2 List of F-DPCH parameters

SerialNO.


MML Command Level

1 FdpchPO2 F-DPCH poweroffset

3 dB Set: SET FPDCHPARAQuery: LSTFPDCHPARA

RNC

2 FDPCHMAXREFPWR

F-DPCHmaximumreference power

-3 dB Set: SETFDPCHRLPWRQuery: LSTFDPCHRLPWR3 FDPCHMINREFPWR F-DPCH

minimumreference power

-20 dB

7.1.2.1 F-DPCH Power OffsetThe parameter indicating the power offset of TPC command on F-DPCH channel relative toReference F-DPCH TX power

7.1.2.2 F-DPCH Maximum Reference PowerThis parameter is used to limit the F-DPCH maximum transmit power.

7.1.2.3 F-DPCH Minimum Reference Power





This parameter is used to limit the F-DPCH minimum transmit power.

F-DPCH Power OffsetThe parameter indicating the power offset of TPC command on F-DPCH channel relative toReference F-DPCH TX power

IDFdpchPO2

Value Range0 to 24

Physical Scope0 dB to 6 dB, with the step of 0.25 dB

SettingThe default value of is 12, namely 3 dB.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the parameter is set too large, some power will be wasted. If the parameter is set too low, thequality of F-DPCH can't be ensured.

Related CommandsUse SET FDPCHPARA to set, LST FDPCHPARA to query.

F-DPCH Maximum Reference PowerThis parameter is used to limit the F-DPCH maximum transmit power.

IDFDPCHMAXREFPWR


Physical Scope-35 dB to 15 dB, with the step of 0.1 dB




7-5

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the parameter is set too large, the F-DPCH power will be largely consumed. If the parameteris set too small, the F-DPCH coverage can't be ensured.

Related CommandsUse SET FDPCHRLPWR to set, LST FDPCHRLPWR to query.

F-DPCH Minimum Reference PowerThis parameter is used to limit the F-DPCH minimum transmit power.

IDFDPCHMINREFPWR


Physical Scope-35 dB to 15 dB, with the step of 0.1 dB


Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the parameter is set too large, the F-DPCH power will be largely consumed. If the parameteris set too small, the F-DPCH power control may be longer.

Related CommandsUse SET FDPCHRLPWR to set, LST FDPCHRLPWR to query.

7.2 HSDPA Code Resource Management ParametersThis describes the HSDPA code resource management parameters that can be modified bynetwork planners.





Table 7-3 List of HSDPA code resource management parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 AllocCodeMode HSDPA coderesource allocationmode (Manual,Automatic)

Automatic

Set: ADD CELLHSDPAQuery: LST CELLHSDPAModify: MODCELLHSDPA

Cell

2 HsPdschCodeNum Number of HS-PDSCH codes.Valid whenAllocCodeMode isset to Manual.

4

3 HsPdschMaxCodeNum

Maximum numberof HS-PDSCHcodes. Valid whenAllocCodeMode isset to Automatic.

10

4 HsPdschMinCodeNum

Minimum numberof HS-PDSCHcodes. Valid whenAllocCodeMode isset to Automatic.

5

5 HsScchCodeNum Number of HS-SCCH codes

4

7.2.1 HSDPA Code Resource Allocation ModeThis describes the HSDPA code resource allocation mode: automatic or manual.

7.2.2 Number of HS-PDSCH CodesThis describes the number of HS-PDSCH codes. The number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid onlywhen AllocCodeMode is set to Manual.

7.2.3 Maximum Number of HS-PDSCH CodesThis describes the maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes. The maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to Automatic.

7.2.4 Minimum Number of HS-PDSCH CodesThis describes the minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes. The minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to Automatic.

7.2.5 Number of HS-SCCH CodesThis describes the number of codes allocated for the HS-SCCH.



7-7

7.2.1 HSDPA Code Resource Allocation ModeThis describes the HSDPA code resource allocation mode: automatic or manual.

ID

AllocCodeMode

Value Range

Automatic, Manual

Physical Scope

Automatic means automatic allocation. Manual means manual allocation.

Setting

The default value is Automatic.

At the early stage of network construction, or when the traffic model of subscribers in a cell isnot fixed, AllocCodeMode can be set to Automatic to have the HSDPA channel codes beautomatically allocated. If the traffic model of subscribers in a cell is fixed and known,AllocCodeMode can be set to Manual to select the static allocation mode.


Manual allocation leads to restriction of HSDPA code resource or leaves HSDPA code resourceidle.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA tomodify AllocCodeMode.

7.2.2 Number of HS-PDSCH CodesThis describes the number of HS-PDSCH codes. The number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid onlywhen AllocCodeMode is set to Manual.

ID

HsPdschCodeNum

Value Range

1 to 15

Physical Scope

None.





SettingHsPdschCodeNum is set according to actual traffic model of a cell. The default value ofHsPdschCodeNum is 4.

Impact on the Network Performancel If HsPdschCodeNum is excessively low, the HSDPA code resource is restricted.

l If HsPdschCodeNum is excessively high, the HSDPA code resource is wasted and theadmission rejection rate of R99 services increases due to code resource.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA tomodify HsPdschCodeNum.

7.2.3 Maximum Number of HS-PDSCH CodesThis describes the maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes. The maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to Automatic.

IDHsPdschMaxCodeNum

Value Range1 to 15

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingHsPdschMaxCodeNum is set according to the actual traffic model of a cell. The default valueof HsPdschMaxCodeNum is 10.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIn automatic HSDPA code allocation mode, set the maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes toa comparatively high value.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA tomodify HsPdschMaxCodeNum.

7.2.4 Minimum Number of HS-PDSCH CodesThis describes the minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes. The minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to Automatic.



7-9

IDHsPdschMinCodeNum

Value Range1 to 15

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingHsPdschMinCodeNum is set according to the actual traffic model of a cell. The default valueof HsPdschMinCodeNum is 5.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIn automatic HSDPA code allocation mode, set the minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes toa comparatively low value. In addition, HsPdschMinCodeNum must be not higher thanHsPdschMaxCodeNum.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA tomodify HsPdschMinCodeNum.

7.2.5 Number of HS-SCCH CodesThis describes the number of codes allocated for the HS-SCCH.

IDHsScchCodeNum

Value Range1 to 15

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingHsScchCodeNum is set according to actual traffic model of a cell. The default value ofHsScchCodeNum is 4.

Impact on the Network PerformanceHsScchCodeNum decides the maximum number of subscribers that the NodeB can schedulein a TTI period. In the scenarios like outdoor macro cells with power restricted, it is less likely





to schedule multiple subscribers simultaneously, so two HS-SCCHs are configured. In thescenarios like indoor pico with code restricted, it is more likely to schedule multiple subscriberssimultaneously, so four HS-SCCHs are configured. If excessive HS-SCCHs are configured, thecode resource is wasted. If insufficient HS-SCCHs are configured, the HS-PDSCH code resourceor power resource is wasted. Both affect the cell throughput rate.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA tomodify HsScchCodeNum.

7.3 HSDPA Mobility Management ParametersThe common configurable HSDPA mobility management parameters are listed here.

Table 7-4 List of HSDPA mobility management parameters

Parameter ID ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

Relevant Command Level

HSPATIMERLEN

HSPAhandoverprotectionlength

0 (0 s) Set or modify:SET HOCOMMQuery: LST HOCOMM

RNC

7.3.1 HSPA Handover Protection LengthAccording to event 1D trigger, HSPA uses a protection timer (TimerHSPA) to: Guerantee thatHSPA does not change serving cell frequently; Affect system performance. When event 1Dtriggers HSPA handover, the timer starts. Before the TimerHSPA expires, the event 1D doesnot trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 0, the system does not start the timer, namely, event1D immediately trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 1024, the HSPA handover will never betriggered until the cell to bear HSPA service is unlisted.

7.3.1 HSPA Handover Protection LengthAccording to event 1D trigger, HSPA uses a protection timer (TimerHSPA) to: Guerantee thatHSPA does not change serving cell frequently; Affect system performance. When event 1Dtriggers HSPA handover, the timer starts. Before the TimerHSPA expires, the event 1D doesnot trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 0, the system does not start the timer, namely, event1D immediately trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 1024, the HSPA handover will never betriggered until the cell to bear HSPA service is unlisted.

Parameter ID

HSPATIMERLEN

Value Range

0 to 1024



7-11


0 s to 1024 s

Parameter Setting

The default value is 0 s.

The serving cell is updated between different NodeBs. The buffer of original MAC-hs is reset,so the data in the buffer is missing. As a result, the interruption time of data transfer exists. Thelength of interruption time of data transfer is relevant to implementation of flow controlalgorithm and RLC parameter configuration. The unit is hundred mill-second.

In the scenarios with great fluctuation of signals, if the process occurs frequently, the subscriberkeeps in the state of restoring data transfer, interruption of data transfer, and then restoring datatransfer. This impacts the average throughput.

Set this parameter to control the frequency of update of serving cell. As a result, the impact ofthe process on performance of HSPA data transfer is controlled. If the flow control algorithmcan control data in MAC-hs buffer accurately, set the parameter to 0.

If the parameter is too large in the scenarios with great fluctuation of signals, report event 1Dby UE before expiration is more probable. When the UE reports event 1D before expiration, dueto the parameter restriction, the serving cell keeps being weak cell. As a result, the throughputdeclines.

Figure 7-1 Impact from over long HSPA protection length


Set it properly to restrict the frequency to update serving cell in the scenarios with greatfluctuation of signals. This helps control the interruption of data transfer in serving cell updatebetween different NodeBs. It also helps control the impact on subscriber throughput.





Relevant CommandsSet it through SET HOCOMM. Query it through LST HOCOMM.

7.4 HSDPA Direct Retry and Channel Type SwitchParameters

This describes the HSDPA direct retry and channel type switch parameters that can be modifiedby network planners.

Table 7-5 List of HSDPA direct retry and channel type switch parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 HRetryTimerLen

D2H retrytimer length

5 s Set: SET COIFTIMERQuery: LST COIFTIMER

RNC

2 D2HIntraHoTimerLen

Timer lengthof D2H intra-frequencyhandover

2 s Set: SET HOCOMMQuery: LST HOCOMM

3 D2HInterHoTimerLen

Timer lengthof D2H inter-frequencyhandover

5 s

4 MultiCarrierHoTimerLen

Timer lengthof multi-carrierhandover

14 s

5 HsdpaCMPermissionInd

CMpermissionindicator onHSDPA

TURE Set: SET CMCFQuery: LST CMCF

7.4.1 D2H Retry Timer LengthThis describes the D2H retry timer length. If a service is preferably to be mapped to the HS-DSCH but is actually mapped to the DCH, the D2H retry timer starts. If H2D occurs, the D2Hretry timer starts only after the D2H punishment timer expires.

7.4.2 Intra-Frequency Handover D2H Timer LengthThis describes the intra-frequency handover D2H timer length. After a UE finishes the intra-frequency handover, the system starts the D2H intra-frequency handover timer and performs theD2H retry after the timer expires, if the current cell after the handover supports HSDPA or hasa DRD neighboring cell. If the intra-frequency handover D2H timer length is set to 0, the D2Hretry is triggered immediately after the intra-frequency handover.



7-13

7.4.3 Inter-Frequency Handover D2H Timer LengthThis describes the D2H inter-frequency handover timer length. After a UE finishes the intra-frequency handover, the system starts the D2H inter-frequency handover timer and performs theD2H retry after the timer expires, if the current cell after the handover does not support HSDPAbut has a DRD neighboring cell. If the inter-frequency handover D2H timer length is set to 0,the D2H retry is triggered immediately after the inter-frequency handover.

7.4.4 Multi-Carrier Handover Timer LengthThis describes the multi-carrier handover timer length. To prevent ping-pong handovers betweenmultiple carriers, which have a bad effect on the system performance, a protect timerMultiCarrierHoTimerLen is needed. After the UE is handed over from cell A, the timer startsup. Before the timer expires, the HSDPA or HSUPA service is not directly redirected to cell A.If the timer length is set to 0, the timer does not start up, that is, it does not prevent the ping-pong handovers between multiples carriers.

7.4.5 Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPAThis describes the compress mode permission indication on HSDPA. If the compress modepermission indication is set to TRUE, the CM (Compress Mode) is permitted on HSDPA, andHSDPA can exist with CM activated. If the compress mode permission indication is set toFALSE, H2D is needed before the CM is activated when HSDPA exists, and HSDPA cannotexist when CM is activated.

7.4.1 D2H Retry Timer LengthThis describes the D2H retry timer length. If a service is preferably to be mapped to the HS-DSCH but is actually mapped to the DCH, the D2H retry timer starts. If H2D occurs, the D2Hretry timer starts only after the D2H punishment timer expires.

ID

HRetryTimerLen

Value Range

0 to 180

Physical Scope

0, 1 to 180 s

Setting

The default value is 5 (5 s).

When the D2H timer is set to 0, the H retry function is closed.


l If HRetryTimerLen is excessively high, the D2H handover does not occur when thesubscribers data can be carried on HSDPA. This affects subscriber perception.

l If HRetryTimerLen is excessively low, useless direct retry occurs. As a result, extrasignaling interaction occurs and the network resource is wasted.





Related Commands

Use SET COIFTIMER to set and LST COIFTIMER to query HRetryTimerLen.

7.4.2 Intra-Frequency Handover D2H Timer LengthThis describes the intra-frequency handover D2H timer length. After a UE finishes the intra-frequency handover, the system starts the D2H intra-frequency handover timer and performs theD2H retry after the timer expires, if the current cell after the handover supports HSDPA or hasa DRD neighboring cell. If the intra-frequency handover D2H timer length is set to 0, the D2Hretry is triggered immediately after the intra-frequency handover.

ID

D2HIntraHoTimerLen

Value Range

0 to 999

Physical Scope

0 s to 999 s

Setting



l If D2HIntraHoTimerLen is excessively high, the D2H is not triggered in time after anintra-frequency handover. This may affect the QoS.

l If D2HIntraHoTimerLen is excessively low, the ping-pong handover between H2D andD2H may occur in some scenarios.

Related Commands

Use SET HOCOMM to set and user LST HOCOMM to query D2HIntraHoTimerLen.

7.4.3 Inter-Frequency Handover D2H Timer LengthThis describes the D2H inter-frequency handover timer length. After a UE finishes the intra-frequency handover, the system starts the D2H inter-frequency handover timer and performs theD2H retry after the timer expires, if the current cell after the handover does not support HSDPAbut has a DRD neighboring cell. If the inter-frequency handover D2H timer length is set to 0,the D2H retry is triggered immediately after the inter-frequency handover.

ID

D2HInterHoTimerLen



7-15

Value Range0 to 180



Impact on the Network Performancel If D2HInterHoTimerLen is excessively high, the D2H is not triggered in time after an

inter-frequency handover. This may affect the QoS.l If D2HInterHoTimerLen is excessively low, the ping-pong handover between H2D and

D2H may occur in some scenarios.

Related CommandsUse SET HOCOMM to set and LST HOCOMM to query D2HInterHoTimerLen.

7.4.4 Multi-Carrier Handover Timer LengthThis describes the multi-carrier handover timer length. To prevent ping-pong handovers betweenmultiple carriers, which have a bad effect on the system performance, a protect timerMultiCarrierHoTimerLen is needed. After the UE is handed over from cell A, the timer startsup. Before the timer expires, the HSDPA or HSUPA service is not directly redirected to cell A.If the timer length is set to 0, the timer does not start up, that is, it does not prevent the ping-pong handovers between multiples carriers.

IDMultiCarrierHoTimerLen

Value Range0 to 999



Impact on the Network Performancel If MultiCarrierHoTimerLen is excessively high, the handover to the original cell may

not be triggered in time after multi-carrier handovers. This may affect the QoS.





l If MultiCarrierHoTimerLen is excessively low, the ping-pong handover betweenmultiple carriers occurs in some scenarios.

Related CommandsUse SET HOCOMM to set DivCtrlField and LST HOCOMM to queryMultiCarrierHoTimerLen.

7.4.5 Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPAThis describes the compress mode permission indication on HSDPA. If the compress modepermission indication is set to TRUE, the CM (Compress Mode) is permitted on HSDPA, andHSDPA can exist with CM activated. If the compress mode permission indication is set toFALSE, H2D is needed before the CM is activated when HSDPA exists, and HSDPA cannotexist when CM is activated.

IDHsdpaCMPermissionInd

Value RangeFALSE (not permitted), TRUE (permitted)

Physical Scope0, 1

SettingThe default value is TRUE.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the terminal supports this function, the terminal has a better performance when the CM isactivated with HSDPA connected.

Related CommandsUse SET CMCF to set and LST CMCF to query HsdpaCMPermissionInd.

7.5 HSDPA Admission Control ParametersThis describes the HSDPA admission control parameters that can be modified by networkplanners.



7-17

Table 7-6 List of admission control parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum

Maximumnumber ofHSDPA usersof the NodeB

3840 Set: ADDNODEBALGOPARAQuery: LSTNODEBALGOPARAModify: MODNODEBALGOPARA

NodeB

2 UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor

UL HS-DPCCH reservefactor

0 Set: ADD CELLCACQuery: LSTCELLCACModify: MODCELLCAC

Cell

3 HsdpaStrmPBRThd

HSDPAstreaming PBRthreshold

70%

4 HsdpaBePBRThd

HSDPA BEservice PBRthreshold

30%

5 MaxHSDSCHUserNum

Maximumnumber of userssupported bythe HS-DSCH

64

7.5.1 Maximum HSDPA Users Per NodeBThis describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA channel perNodeB.

7.5.2 Uplink HS-DPCCH Reserve FactorThis describes the uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor. If the uplink HS-DPCCH bears ACK andNACK messages, the system does not perform the CAC. If the HS-DPCCH bears CQI messages,the system performs the CAC. The uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor is the resource reservedwhen the uplink HS-DPCCH bears ACK/NACK messages. The CAC threshold equals theproduct of the UL limit capacity and the uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor.

7.5.3 HSDPA Streaming PBR ThresholdThis describes the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA streaming traffic.

7.5.4 HSDPA BE Service PBR ThresholdThis describes the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA BE service.

7.5.5 Maximum HSDPA User NumberThis describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA channel.





7.5.1 Maximum HSDPA Users Per NodeBThis describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA channel perNodeB.

IDNodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum


Physical ScopeNone.


NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum is set according to the product specification and actual number ofsold HSDPA licenses.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the HSDPA user connection is rejected by the NodeB, you can infer that the HSDPA licensesare insufficient. We need to apply for new HSDPA licenses.

Related CommandsUse ADD NODEBALGOPARA to set, LST NODEBALGOPARA to query, and MODNODEBALGOPARA to modify NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum.

7.5.2 Uplink HS-DPCCH Reserve FactorThis describes the uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor. If the uplink HS-DPCCH bears ACK andNACK messages, the system does not perform the CAC. If the HS-DPCCH bears CQI messages,the system performs the CAC. The uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor is the resource reservedwhen the uplink HS-DPCCH bears ACK/NACK messages. The CAC threshold equals theproduct of the UL limit capacity and the uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor.

IDUlHsDpcchRsvdFactor

Value Range0 to 100

Physical Scope0 to 1, with the step of 0.01



7-19

Setting


Because the current ACK and NACK channel power on the HS-DPCCH is included in the publicmeasurement of the Iub interface, the uplink HS-DPCCH reverse factor is set according to theACK/NACK load that may burst on the HS-DPCCH during the interval of two measurementprocesses. In general, the burst data in such a short time rarely have any impact, so the uplinkHS-DPCCH reverse factor can be set to 0 by default.


l If UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor is excessively high, the probability of admission rejectionincreases.

l If UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor is excessively low, the reserved uplink resource is insufficient.But because the probability of the burst load of ACK/NACK messages is low and the effectis small, UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor can be set to a comparatively lower value so as to admitmore connections.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyUlHsDpcchRsvdFactor.

7.5.3 HSDPA Streaming PBR ThresholdThis describes the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA streaming traffic.

ID

HsdpaStrmPBRThd

Value Range

0 to 100

Physical Scope

0% to 100%

Setting


For the HSDPA admission, the system needs to meet the following condition:

, where,

l PBRstrm is the total throughput of the streaming service provided by the cell.

l Thdhsdpa_strm_PBR is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA streamingservice.





Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter is likely a active factor of streaming service. If the HsdpaStrmPBRThd isexcessively high, the admission mistaken rejection rate may increase. If theHsdpaStrmPBRThd is excessively low, the mistakenly admission rate may increase, the GBRof subscribers cannot be guaranteed.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyHsdpaStrmPBRThd.

7.5.4 HSDPA BE Service PBR ThresholdThis describes the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA BE service.

IDHsdpaBePBRThd

Value Range0 to 100



For the HSDPA admission, the system needs to meet the following condition:

, where,l PBRBE is the total throughput of the BE service provided by the cell.

l Thdhsdpa_BE_pbr is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA BE service.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter is likely a active factor of BE service. If the HsdpaBePBRThd is excessivelyhigh, the admission mistaken rejection rate may increase. If the HsdpaBePBRThd is excessivelylow, the mistakenly admission rate may increase, the GBR of subscribers cannot be guaranteed.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyHsdpaBePBRThd.

7.5.5 Maximum HSDPA User NumberThis describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA channel.



7-21

IDMaxHSDSCHUserNum

Value Range0 to 64

Physical ScopeNone.


The number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA refers to the number of subscribers whoseservice is carried by the HSDPA channel, no matter how many RABs are borne by the HSDPAchannel. The highest value of MaxHSDSCHUserNum equals the cell HSDPA capacity that isprescribed in the NodeB product specification. MaxHSDSCHUserNum can be set accordingto the cell type, the available power of HSDPA, and the code resource.

Impact on the Network Performancel If MaxHSDSCHUserNum is excessively low, the HSDPA capacity of cell may be

reduced, causing a waste of the HSDPA resource.l If MaxHSDSCHUserNum is excessively high, the congestion of HSDPA service may be

caused.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyMaxHSDSCHUserNum.





8 HSUPA Parameters

About This Chapter

This describes the HSUPA parameters: HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters,HSUPA power control parameters, and HSUPA admission control parameters.

8.1 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm ParametersThis describes the HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified bynetwork planners.

8.2 HSUPA Admission Control ParametersThis describes the HSUPA admission control parameters that can be modified by networkplanners.

8.3 HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control ParametersThis describes the HSUPA outer loop power control parameters that can be modified by networkplanners.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 8 HSUPA Parameters


8-1

8.1 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm ParametersThis describes the HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified bynetwork planners.

Table 8-1 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 MaxTargetUlLoadFactor

Maximum target uplinkload factor

75% Set: ADDCELLHSUPAQuery: LSTCELLHSUPA

Cell

2 NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio

Target non-serving E-DCH to total E-DCHpower ratio

0

3 Hsupa2msTtiRateThs

Rate Threshold forHSUPA 2 ms TTI

384 kbit/s Set: SET FRCQuery: LST FRC

RNC

8.1.1 Maximum Target Uplink Load FactorThis describes the target uplink load factor of the NodeB scheduling module. The RNC calculatesthe maximum RTWP value according to this factor, and then sends it to the NodeB by the Iubmessage.

8.1.2 Rate Threshold for HSUPA 2 ms TTIOnly HSUPA services with uplink bit rate reaching this threshold can use 2ms as their E-DCHTTI value, otherwise use 10ms as the E-DCH TTI value.

8.1.3 Threshold of Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power RatioThis describes the threshold of the ratio of the non-serving E-DCH power to the total E-DCHpower. The non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to the UE only when the ratio of the non-serving E-DCH power to the total E-DCH power is higher than this threshold.

8.1.1 Maximum Target Uplink Load FactorThis describes the target uplink load factor of the NodeB scheduling module. The RNC calculatesthe maximum RTWP value according to this factor, and then sends it to the NodeB by the Iubmessage.

ID

MaxTargetUlLoadFactor

8 HSUPA ParametersRAN




Value Range

0 to 100

Physical Scope

0% to 100%

Setting



This parameter is set according to the radio network planning.

l If MaxTargetUlLoadFactor is excessively low, the cell throughput is excessively low.

l If MaxTargetUlLoadFactor is excessively high, the interference is excessively high.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLHSUPA to set and LST CELLHSUPA to query MaxTargetUlLoadFactor.

8.1.2 Rate Threshold for HSUPA 2 ms TTIOnly HSUPA services with uplink bit rate reaching this threshold can use 2ms as their E-DCHTTI value, otherwise use 10ms as the E-DCH TTI value.

ID

Hsupa2msTtiRateThs

Value Range

D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D608, D1450

Physical Scope

8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s, 608 kbit/s,1450 kbit/s

Setting



If the parameter is set too low, the low-speed service use the 2 ms TTI which lead to the wasteof CE resource. If the parameter is set too high, the high-speed service cannot use the 2 ms TTIwhich lead to influence on QoS of traffic.



8-3

Related CommandsUse SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query Hsupa2msTtiRateThs.

8.1.3 Threshold of Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH PowerRatio

This describes the threshold of the ratio of the non-serving E-DCH power to the total E-DCHpower. The non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to the UE only when the ratio of the non-serving E-DCH power to the total E-DCH power is higher than this threshold.

IDNonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio

Value Range0 to 100



Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter is used to decide whether the non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to the UE.l If NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio is excessively low, the power of non-serving RL is

very low, and the UE data rate is affected when the UE is in soft handover status.l If NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio is excessively high, the non-serving RL can not send

RG DOWN to the UE even if the system is overloaded.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLHSUPA to set and use LST CELLHSUPA to queryNonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio.

8.2 HSUPA Admission Control ParametersThis describes the HSUPA admission control parameters that can be modified by networkplanners.





Table 8-2 List of HSUPA admission control parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 MAXHSUPAUSERNUM

Maximum number ofusers supported by theHSUPA

64 Set: ADDCELLCACQuery: LSTCELLCACModify: MODCELLCAC

Cell

2 HsupaNonServInterfereFactor

HSUPA Non-serveicecell interfere factor

0

3 HsupaLowPriorityUserPBRThdHsupaEqualPriorityUserPBRThdHsupaHighPriorityUserPBRThd

PBR satisfaction forHSUPA different priorityusers

100/100/100

4 DLHSUPARSVDFACTOR

DL HSUPA reservedfactor

0

5 NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum

Maximum number ofusers of the HSUPA inthe NodeB

3840 Set: ADDNODEBALGOPARAQuery: LSTNODEBALGOPARAModify: MODNODEBALGOPARA

NodeB

8.2.1 Maximum HSUPA User NumberThis describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA channel. Theparameter is used for the HSUPA admission control.

8.2.2 HSUPA Non-Serveice Cell Interfere FactorThis parameter indicates that the ratio of uplink interference generated by the non-service RLin an HSUPA cell to the total uplink interference.

8.2.3 PBR satisfaction for HSUPA different priority usersThis group of parameters indicates the threshold of PBR satisfaction decision. The parameteraffects HSUPA scheduling service access. The QoS satisfaction of the existing service is usedto allow new users to access.



8-5

8.2.4 Downlink HSUPA Reserved FactorThis describes the downlink HSUPA reserved factor. The parameter is used to reserve part ofresource for downlink control channels: E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH.

8.2.5 Maximum HSUPA User Number Per NodeBThis describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA channel perNodeB.

8.2.1 Maximum HSUPA User NumberThis describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA channel. Theparameter is used for the HSUPA admission control.

IDMaxHsupaUserNum

Value Range0 to 100

Physical Scope0 to 100


This parameter represents the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPAchannel and is set according to the product specification. For the HSUPA admission, the numberof subscribers must be counted first. If the current HSUPA subscriber number is lower than thisparameter, the admission request is being analyzed, or else, the admission is rejected directly.

Impact on the Network Performancel If MaxHsupaUserNum is excessively high, the product capacity cannot support all the

HSUPA users after admission, and cannot provide satisfying services.l If MaxHsupaUserNum is excessively low, part of the subscribers are rejected for

admission, and part of the resource is idle and wasted, thus decreasing the system capacity.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyMaxHsupaUserNum.

8.2.2 HSUPA Non-Serveice Cell Interfere FactorThis parameter indicates that the ratio of uplink interference generated by the non-service RLin an HSUPA cell to the total uplink interference.

IDHsupaNonServInterfereFactor





Value Range0 to 100

Physical Scope0 to 100%


The ratio of HSUPA users and soft handover in the system is considered when setting thisparameter. If the ratio of HSUPA users and soft handover in the system is large, this parametershould be increased.

Impact on the Network Performancel If HsupaNonServInterfereFactor is excessively low, the product capacity cannot support

all the HSUPA users after admission, and cannot provide satisfying services.l If HsupaNonServInterfereFactor is excessively high, part of the subscribers are rejected

for admission, and part of the resource is idle and wasted, thus decreasing the systemcapacity.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyHsupaNonServInterfereFactor.

8.2.3 PBR satisfaction for HSUPA different priority usersThis group of parameters indicates the threshold of PBR satisfaction decision. The parameteraffects HSUPA scheduling service access. The QoS satisfaction of the existing service is usedto allow new users to access.

IDHsupaNonServInterfereFactor

Value Range0 to 100

Physical Scope0 to 100%


During setting, the characteristics of the scheduling service, the setting of GBR and GBRguarantee strategy should be considered. To ensure GBR of users, set the parameter to 100. Ifthe requirement for GBR is low, the parameter can be set to a value less than 100.



8-7


If the parameter is set too large, the requirement for users’ PBR satisfaction is higher, and theprobability of refusing HSUPA scheduling service increases, thus affecting access success rate.If the value is too small, the requirement for users’ PBR satisfaction is lower, and too manyHSUPA scheduling service users may be accessed, thus affecting the satisfaction of accessedusers and resulting in system congestion due to serious load.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify theparameters.

8.2.4 Downlink HSUPA Reserved FactorThis describes the downlink HSUPA reserved factor. The parameter is used to reserve part ofresource for downlink control channels: E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH.

ID

DlHSUPARsvdFactor

Value Range

0 to 100

Physical Scope


Setting



The higher DlHSUPARsvdFactor is, the more resource is reserved for the HSUPA controlchannel, and thus the more resource is wasted.

If DlHSUPARsvdFactor is excessively low, the HSUPA service quality is affected when theresource is limited.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyDlHSUPARsvdFactor.

8.2.5 Maximum HSUPA User Number Per NodeBThis describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA channel perNodeB.





ID

NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum

Value Range

0 to 3840

Physical Scope

0 to 3840

Setting


NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum is set according to the product specification and actual number ofsold HSUPA licenses.


If the HSUPA subscriber connection is rejected by the NodeB, you can infer that the HSUPAlicenses are insufficient. We need to apply for new HSUPA licenses.

Related Commands

Use ADD NODEBALGOPARA to set, LST NODEBALGOPARA to query, and MODNODEBALGOPARA to modify NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum.

8.3 HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control ParametersThis describes the HSUPA outer loop power control parameters that can be modified by networkplanners.

Table 8-3 List of HSUPA outer loop power control parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 EdchTargetRetransNum

Target number ofE-DCH PDUretransmission

0.1 Set: ADD TYPRABOLPCQuery: LST TYPRABOLPCModify: MOD TYPRABOLPC

RAB



8-9

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

2 ResBLER Target value of E-DCH residualBLER

N/A

8.3.1 HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control SwitchThis switch is used to select HSUPA outer loop power control algorithm.

8.3.2 Target Number of E-DCH PDU RetransmissionThis parameter specifies the target number of E-DCH PDU Mac-es retransmission.

8.3.3 Target Value of E-DCH Residual BLERThis parameter indicates the target transmission quality of E-DCH, that is, the target residualBLER value.

8.3.1 HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control SwitchThis switch is used to select HSUPA outer loop power control algorithm.

Parameter ID

OlpcAlgSwitch

Value Range

Enum (BASEDONRESIDUALBLER, BASEDONMEANNHT)


BASEDONRESIDUALBLER, BASEDONMEANNHT

Parameter Setting

For BE and streaming services, set this parameter to BASEDONMEANNHT.

For conversational services, set this parameter to BASEDONRESIDUALBLER.


None.





Relevant CommandsUse ADD TYPRABOLPC to set, LST TYPRABOLPC to query and MODTYPRABOLPC to modifyOlpcAlgSwitch.

8.3.2 Target Number of E-DCH PDU RetransmissionThis parameter specifies the target number of E-DCH PDU Mac-es retransmission.

IDEdchTargetRetransNum

Value Range0 to 150

Physical Scope0 to 15, step is 0.1.

SettingThe default value is 1, namely 0.1.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe smaller the parameter is, the better subscribers feel, but the air interface capacity is not themaximum. The rate of subscriber, air interface capacity, and CE resource consumed areconsidered for the parameter setting.

Related CommandsUse ADD TYPRABOLPC to set, LST TYPRABOLPC to query, and MODTYPRABOLPC to modify EdchTargetRetransNum.

8.3.3 Target Value of E-DCH Residual BLERThis parameter indicates the target transmission quality of E-DCH, that is, the target residualBLER value.

IDResBLER


Physical Scope0 to 1, step is 0.001.



8-11

SettingNone.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the parameter is set too small, the subscribers feel better, but the air interface capacity is notthe maximum. The rate of subscriber, air interface capacity, and CE resource consumed areconsidered for the parameter setting.

Related CommandsUse ADD TYPRABOLPC to set, LST TYPRABOLPC to query, and MODTYPRABOLPC to modify ResBLER.





9 MBMS Parameters

About This Chapter

This describes MBMS parameters. MBMS parameters are MBMS admission parameters,MBMS preemption parameters, and FLC/FLD algorithm parameters.

9.1 MBMS Admission and Preemption Algorithm ParametersThis describes the MBMS admission and preemption algorithm parameters that can be modifiedby network planners.

9.2 FLC/FLD Algorithm ParametersThis describes the FLC/FLD algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 9 MBMS Parameters


9-1

9.1 MBMS Admission and Preemption AlgorithmParameters

This describes the MBMS admission and preemption algorithm parameters that can be modifiedby network planners.

Table 9-1 List of MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 MaxFachPower

Maximum transmitpower of the FACH thatcarries the MBMSservice

Setvariousvaluesaccordingto theservicerate.

Set: ADD FACHQuery: LST FACH

Cell

2 MTCHMinPerc0

Minimum coveragepercentage of the MBMSservice with the highestpriority, that is, priority 0

80% Set: ADDCELLMBMSFACHQuery: LSTCELLMBMSFACH

3 MTCHMaxPerc15

Minimum coveragepercentage of the MBMSservice with the lowestpriority, that is, priority15

50%

4 MtchRsvPwr MTCH budget powerresource

20% Set: ADDCELLCACQuery: LSTCELLCACModify: MODCELLCAC

5 MtchRsvsf MTCH budget coderesource

16 SF64

6 MtchMaxPwr MTCH maximum power 60%

7 MtchMaxsf MTCH maximum coderesource

40 SF64

9 MBMS ParametersRAN




SerialNo.


MML Command Level

8 MbmsDecPowerRabThd

A service prioritythreshold, indicating thatthe power of the MBMSservices with a prioritylower than this thresholdcan be decreased

1 Set: ADDCELLLDRQuery: LSTCELLLDRModify: MODCELLLDR

9 MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch

MBMS service preemptalgorithm switch

OFF Set: SETQUEUEPREEMPTQuery: LSTQUEUEPREEMPT

10

PtmPreemptSwitch

MBMS PTM preemptswitch

ON Set: SETRNCMBMSPARAQuery: LSTRNCMBMSPARA

RNC

11

PtmStrmPasiSwitch

MBMS streaming PTMpreempt switch

ON

12

PtmNullStrmPasiSwitch

MBMS non-streamingPTM preempt switch

ON

9.1.1 Maximum FACH Transmit PowerThis describes the maximum transmit power of the FACH that carries the MBMS service.

9.1.2 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Highest PriorityThis describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service with the highest priority,that is, priority 0.

9.1.3 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Lowest PriorityThis describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service with the lowest priority,that is, priority 15.

9.1.4 MTCH Budget Power ResourcesThis parameter is configured according to the budget for power and code resources of the MBMSPTM bearer (that is MTCH) made by carriers.

9.1.5 MTCH Budget Code ResourceThis parameter is configured according to the budget for power and code resources of the MBMSPTM bearer (that is MTCH) made by carriers.

9.1.6 MTCH Maximum PowerThis parameter indicates the MTCH maximum power of a MBMS cell.

9.1.7 MTCH Maximum Code ResourceThis parameter indicates the MTCH maximum code resource of a MBMS cell.



9-3

9.1.8 Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing PowerThis describes the service priority threshold for decreasing power. The power of the MBMSservices with a priority lower than this threshold can be decreased.

9.1.9 MBMS Service Preemption Algorithm SwitchThis describes the MBMS preemption algorithm switch. When this switch is ON, an MBMSservice can obtain resources through preemption in case the access of the MBMS service fails.The preemption, however, occurs only between the MBMS services.

9.1.10 MBMS PTM Preempt SwitchThis parameter is configured according to the requirements of operators.

9.1.11 MBMS Streaming PTM Preempt SwitchThis parameter is configured according to the requirements of operators.

9.1.12 MBMS Non-Streaming PTM Preempt SwitchThis parameter indicates the MTCH maximum code resource of a MBMS cell.

9.1.1 Maximum FACH Transmit PowerThis describes the maximum transmit power of the FACH that carries the MBMS service.

IDMaxFachPower



SettingSet various values for MaxFachPower according to the service rate.

Impact on the Network PerformanceBecause the FACH does not have the power control function, you must consider the QoS of thesubscribers on the edge of a cell when setting the maximum transmit power of the FACH.

l If MaxFachPower is excessively low, the quality for receiving services on the edge of acell decreases and the mosaic effect and the service delay occur.

l If MaxFachPower is excessively high, the extra power of the FACH is wasted.

RAN6.1 supports only the MBMS broadcast function. Thus, all cells must use the PTMtransmission mode. This means that all cells use the FACH to send data. An UE can obtainremarkable gain through soft combination or selective combination. According to the emulationresult, the gain obtained through soft combination ranges from 4.6 dB to 6.6 dB and the gainobtained through selective combination ranges from 2 dB to 3 dB. In terms of the MBMSterminal, you must choose selective combination for the integrated channel of the CMB and theMBMS. Thus, by taking the generated gain into account, you can configure a lower power forthe FACH when a majority of terminals in a network support the MBMS service.





CAUTIONThe CMB terminals do not support soft combination or selective combination. Therefore, if amajority of terminals support the CMB service, you can neglect the relevant gain whenconfiguring the FACH.

Related Commands

Use ADD FACH to set and LST FACH to query MaxFachPower.

9.1.2 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with theHighest Priority

This describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service with the highest priority,that is, priority 0.

ID

MTCHMinPerc0

Value Range

0 to 100

Physical Scope

0% to 100%

Setting



When a cell has a heavy load, the RNC assigns a low power to the MBMS service. This avoidsthe further deterioration of cell congestion and increases the success rate of MBMS service setup.You must ensure that the assigned low power can cover the minimum coverage area of theMBMS service. The minimum coverage area is set on the basis of the percentage of area coveredby the MBMS service using the maximum transmit power of the FACH.

To implement service differentiation, you must ensure that the minimum coverage area variesaccording to service priorities. The value of MTCHMinPerc0 is in positive correlation with thecoverage area of the MBMS service when the cell load is high.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLMBMSFACH to set andLST CELLMBMSFACH to queryMTCHMinPerc0.



9-5

9.1.3 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with theLowest Priority

This describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service with the lowest priority,that is, priority 15.

ID

MTCHMinPerc15

Value Range

0 to 100

Physical Scope

0% to 100%

Setting



When a cell has a heavy load, the RNC assigns a low power to the MBMS service. This avoidsthe further deterioration of cell congestion and increases the success rate of MBMS service setup.You must ensure that the assigned low power can cover the minimum coverage area of theMBMS service. The minimum coverage area is set on the basis of the percentage of area coveredby the MBMS service using the maximum transmit power of the FACH.

To implement service differentiation, you must ensure that the minimum coverage area variesaccording to service priorities. The value of MTCHMinPerc15 is in positive correlation withthe coverage area of the MBMS service when the cell load is high.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLMBMSFACH to set andLST CELLMBMSFACH to queryMTCHMinPerc15.

9.1.4 MTCH Budget Power ResourcesThis parameter is configured according to the budget for power and code resources of the MBMSPTM bearer (that is MTCH) made by carriers.

ID

MtchRsvPwr

Value Range

0 to 100







When the power sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is less than or equal toMtchRsvPwr, and the code sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is less than or equal toMtchRsvSF, the established MBMS PTM bearer can only be preempted by the MBMS PTMbearer with higher priority, and cannot be preempted by the MBMS PTP bearer or non-MBMSbearer.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter is a kind of protection for the MBMS PTM bearer, In case of low power resourceconsumption, it is necessary to prevent the MBMS PTM bearer being preempted, because thisbearer serves multiple users at the same time. This threshold should not be set to a large one,otherwise, the system resources will be consumed by the MBMS PTM bearer, and few non-MBMS service capability will be left.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyMtchRsvPwr.

9.1.5 MTCH Budget Code ResourceThis parameter is configured according to the budget for power and code resources of the MBMSPTM bearer (that is MTCH) made by carriers.

IDMtchRsvsf

Value Range0 to 63

Physical Scope64 SF64

SettingThe default value is 16, namely 16 SF64.

When the power sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is less than or equal toMtchRsvPwr, and the code sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is less than or equal toMtchRsvSF, the established MBMS PTM bearer can only be preempted by the MBMS PTMbearer with higher priority, and cannot be preempted by the MBMS PTP bearer or non-MBMSbearer.



9-7


This parameter is a kind of protection for the MBMS PTM bearer, In case of low code resourceconsumption, it is necessary to prevent the MBMS PTM bearer being preempted, because thisbearer serves multiple users at the same time. This threshold should not be set to a large one,otherwise, the system resources will be consumed by the MBMS PTM bearer, and few non-MBMS service capability will be left.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyMtchRsvsf.

9.1.6 MTCH Maximum PowerThis parameter indicates the MTCH maximum power of a MBMS cell.

ID

MtchMaxPwr

Value Range

0 to 100

Physical Scope

0% to 100%

Setting


This parameter is configured according to the budget for power of the MBMS PTM bearer (thatis MTCH) made by carriers. When the power sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell islarger than this threshold, the MBMS PTM bearer whose access is refused can only preempt theMBMS PTM bearer with low priority, and cannot preempt the MBMS PTP bearer or non-MBMSbearer.


This parameter is a kind of protection for the MBMS PTM bearer, In case of low code resourceconsumption, it is necessary to prevent the MBMS PTM bearer being preempted, because thisbearer serves multiple users at the same time. This threshold should not be set to a large one,otherwise, the system resources will be consumed by the MBMS PTM bearer, and few non-MBMS service capability will be left.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyMtchMaxPwr.





9.1.7 MTCH Maximum Code ResourceThis parameter indicates the MTCH maximum code resource of a MBMS cell.

IDMtchMaxsf

Value Range0 to 63

Physical Scope64 SF64

SettingThe default value is 40, namely 40 SF64.

This parameter is configured according to the budget for code of the MBMS PTM bearer (thatis MTCH) made by carriers. When the code sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is largerthan this threshold, the MBMS PTM bearer whose access is refused can only preempt the MBMSPTM bearer with low priority, and cannot preempt the MBMS PTP bearer or non-MBMS bearer.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter is a kind of limit to the MBMS PTM bearer. When the total code resources ofthe bearer are consumed largely, excessive consumption should be avoided. This thresholdshould not be set to a large one. Otherwise, the system resource will be consumed by the MBMSPTM bearer and few non-MBMS service capability will be left.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modifyMtchMaxsf.

9.1.8 Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing PowerThis describes the service priority threshold for decreasing power. The power of the MBMSservices with a priority lower than this threshold can be decreased.

IDMbmsDecPowerRabThd

Value Range1 to 15




9-9

Setting



The MBMS service at each rate is set on the basis of two power levels. The power set for anMBMS service is determined according to cell load during the service access. In addition, theFACH power of the MBMS service must be decreased as required in the duration of cellcongestion. Some services with high priority, for example the disaster pre-alert, however, donot need the coverage shrink caused by cell load. In such a case, you can adjust the servicepriority threshold to protect the services with high priority against the impact of the serviceaccess failure and the load control algorithm.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modifyMbmsDecPowerRabThd.

9.1.9 MBMS Service Preemption Algorithm SwitchThis describes the MBMS preemption algorithm switch. When this switch is ON, an MBMSservice can obtain resources through preemption in case the access of the MBMS service fails.The preemption, however, occurs only between the MBMS services.

ID

MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch

Value Range

ON, OFF

Physical Scope

ON, OFF

Setting

The default value is OFF.


The periodic re-setup of the preempted MBMS service is not implemented in RAN6.1. As aresult, an MBMS service cannot be sent in a cell if the resource for the MBMS service is occupiedby another service through preemption. Therefore, the switch is OFF by default.

Related Commands

Use SET QUEUEPREEMPT to set and LST QUEUEPREEMPT to queryMbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch.





9.1.10 MBMS PTM Preempt SwitchThis parameter is configured according to the requirements of operators.

IDPtmPreemptSwitch

Value RangeON, OFF

Physical ScopeON, OFF


If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM bearer is allowed to preempt other MBMS service bearersor non-MBMS service bearers. If the parameter is set to OFF, preemption is forbidden.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the parameter is set to ON, preemption may be triggered in case of failure of access to thePTM bearer. The MBMS service bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with low priority will bereleased, thus resulting in traffic interruption.

Related CommandsUse SET RNCMBMSPARA to set and LST RNCMBMSPARA to queryPtmPreemptSwitch.

9.1.11 MBMS Streaming PTM Preempt SwitchThis parameter is configured according to the requirements of operators.

IDPtmStrmPasiSwitch

Value RangeON, OFF





9-11

If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM streaming service bearer is preempted by the MBMSservice bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with high priority. If the parameter is set to OFF,preemption is forbidden.


If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM streaming service bearer may be preempted by the MBMSservice bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with high priority in case of resource congestion,thus resulting in MBMS service interruption. Because the PTM service bearer serves multipleusers, the influence scope of service interruption is wide.

Related Commands

Use SET RNCMBMSPARA to set and LST RNCMBMSPARA to queryPtmStrmPasiSwitch.

9.1.12 MBMS Non-Streaming PTM Preempt SwitchThis parameter indicates the MTCH maximum code resource of a MBMS cell.

ID

PtmNullStrmPasiSwitch

Value Range

ON, OFF

Physical Scope

ON, OFF

Setting

The default value is ON.

If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM streaming service bearer is preempted by the MBMSservice bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with high priority. If the parameter is set to OFF,preemption is forbidden.


If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM streaming service bearer may be preempted by the MBMSservice bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with high priority in case of resource congestion,thus resulting in MBMS service interruption. Because the PTM service bearer serves multipleusers, the influence scope of service interruption is wide.

Related Commands

Use SET RNCMBMSPARA to set and LST RNCMBMSPARA to queryPtmNullStrmPasiSwitch.





9.2 FLC/FLD Algorithm ParametersThis describes the FLC/FLD algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.

Table 9-2 List of FLC/FLD algorithm parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 FlcAlgoSwitch FLC algorithm switch ON Set: ADDCELLMCCHQuery: LSTCELLMCCHModify: MODCELLMCCH

Cell

2 MbmsTransMode

MBMS transmissionmode

PTM Set: SETRNCMBMSPARAorADDSAMBMSPARAorADDCELLMBMSPARAQuery: LSTRNCMBMSPARAorLSTSAMBMSPARA orLSTCELLMBMSPARAModify: MODSAMBMSPARA orMODCELLMBMSPARA

RNC/SA/Cell

3 NCountingThd Counting threshold 2

4 NPtpToPtmOffset

PTP to PTM offset 1

5 MbmsPtpUlBitRate

MBMS PTP RB uplinkrate

16 kbit/s Set: SETRNCMBMSPARAQuery: LSTRNCMBMSPARA

RNC



9-13

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

6 MbmsNCellInd

MBMS neighboring cellindicator

TRUE Set: ADDINTRAFREQNCELLQuery: LSTINTRAFREQNCELLModify: MODINTRAFREQNCELL

Cell

9.2.1 FLC Algorithm SwitchThis describes the FLC algorithm switch. When the FLC algorithm switch is enabled, the RNCperforms FLC operations.

9.2.2 MBMS Transmission ModeThis describes the transmission mode of MBMS.

9.2.3 Counting ThresholdWhen the counting or recounting UE is larger than the parameter, then use the PTM transmissionmode, otherwise use the PTP transmission mode.

9.2.4 PTP To PTM OffsetThis describes the offset from PTP to PTM.

9.2.5 MBMS PTP RB Uplink RateThis describes the MBMS PTP uplink bit rate.

9.2.6 MBMS Neighboring Cell IndicatorThis parameter indicates whether the cell is MBMS neighboring cell or not.

9.2.1 FLC Algorithm SwitchThis describes the FLC algorithm switch. When the FLC algorithm switch is enabled, the RNCperforms FLC operations.

ID

FlcAlgoSwitch

Value Range

ON, OFF







Impact on the Network PerformanceThe FLC algorithm is a mandatory algorithm. When the network starts sending the MBMSservice, the FLC algorithm ensures that the subscribers on the other frequency points can reselectthe current frequency point for receiving the MBMS service. Therefore, the FLC algorithm isenabled by default.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLMCCH to set, LST CELLMCCH to query, and MOD CELLMCCH tomodify FlcAlgoSwitch.

9.2.2 MBMS Transmission ModeThis describes the transmission mode of MBMS.

IDMbmsTransMode

Value RangePTM~0/ PTP~1/ ENHANCEDPTM~2/ DYNAMIC~3

Physical ScopePTM/PTP/ENHANCEDPTM/DYNAMIC

SettingThe default value is PTM.

This parameter can be configured for the RNC or service area(SA).

If for the RNC, all the cells under the RNC adopt the transmission mode. If for the SA, all thecells under the SA adopt the transmission mode.

Impact on the Network PerformancePTM, PTP and ENHANCEDPTM, as static or semi-static transmission modes, have small effecton the MBMS service and network performance.

The DYNAMIC mode is the most complicated. To balance the service quality guarantee andnetwork resource utilization, dynamically convert PTP and PTM modes. The network convertstransmission modes periodically according to the number of users and the state of neighboringcells, so the reception of MBMS users may be affected. In addition, when passing the boundary



9-15

of a PTP cell or a PTM cell, MBMS users may be aware of service interruption, thus greatlyaffecting the MBMS service and network performance.

Related Commands

Use SET RNCMBMSPARA orADD SAMBMSPARA orADD CELLMBMSPARA to set,LST RNCMBMSPARA orLST SAMBMSPARA or LST CELLMBMSPARA to query, andMOD SAMBMSPARA or MOD CELLMBMSPARA to modify MbmsTransMode.

9.2.3 Counting ThresholdWhen the counting or recounting UE is larger than the parameter, then use the PTM transmissionmode, otherwise use the PTP transmission mode.

ID

NCountingThd

Value Range

2 ～ 10

Physical Scope

None.

Setting


Comprehensively configure such resources as power, code, CE and transmission of the PTMbearer and PTP bearer. Suppose that the consumption of the PTM bearer resources is two timesthe average consumption of the PTP bearer resources, the parameter is configured as 2. Thisparameter can be configured for RNC, SA or CELL.


The greater the parameter, the higher the probability of the network to adopt PTP transmissionmode. Although the power consumption of PTP may be less than that of PTM, the code, CE andtransmission occupied by the PTP bearer increase as the number of subscribers increases. Thisparameter should be configured by considering various resources and bottleneck resources ofoperators so that it should not be set too large.

Related Commands

Use SET RNCMBMSPARA orADD SAMBMSPARA orADD CELLMBMSPARA to set,LST RNCMBMSPARA orLST SAMBMSPARA or LST CELLMBMSPARA to query, andMOD SAMBMSPARA or MOD CELLMBMSPARA to modify NCountingThd.

9.2.4 PTP To PTM OffsetThis describes the offset from PTP to PTM.





ID

NPtpToPtmOffset

Value Range

1 ～ 5

Physical Scope

None.

Setting


To avoid ping-pong of PTP and PTM transmission modes, adopt dual-threshold control as modeconversion decision. That is, in the initial state or PTM mode, the PTM mode is adopted if thenumber of MBMS subscribers exceeds NCountingThd, otherwise, the PTP mode is adopted.But in the PTP mode, the PTM mode is adopted if the number of MBMS users exceedsNCountingThd+NPtpToPtmOffset, otherwise, the PTP mode is adopted. This parameter canbe configured for RNC, SA or Cell.


Although dual-threshold control is adopted, this parameter only acts as hysteresis. Theconfiguration of this parameter should not affect the whole decision policy. In addition,NCountingThd should not be too large. The smaller this parameter, the better.

It is recommended to keep the default value.

Related Commands

Use SET RNCMBMSPARA orADD SAMBMSPARA orADD CELLMBMSPARA to set,LST RNCMBMSPARA orLST SAMBMSPARA or LST CELLMBMSPARA to query, andMOD SAMBMSPARA or MOD CELLMBMSPARA to modify NPtpToPtmOffset.

9.2.5 MBMS PTP RB Uplink RateThis describes the MBMS PTP uplink bit rate.

ID

MbmsPtpUlBitRate

Value Range

D8~0, D16~1, D32~2, D64~3, D128~4, D144~5, D256~6

Physical Scope

8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s



9-17

SettingThe default value is D16~1, namely 16 kbit/s.

MBMS service is a unidirectional downlink service. But for the PTP bearer, an uplink channelmust be established for signaling transmission. Because the uplink signaling traffic is not heavy,the uplink channel width can be configured as a small one.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the parameter is set too large, uplink resources will be wasted. Therefore, the default value isrecommended.

Related CommandsUse SET RNCMBMSPARA to set and LST RNCMBMSPARA toqueryMbmsPtpUlBitRate.

9.2.6 MBMS Neighboring Cell IndicatorThis parameter indicates whether the cell is MBMS neighboring cell or not.

IDMbmsNCellInd

Value RangeTRUE, FALSE

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingThe default value is TRUE.

In an actual commercial network, there may be multiple intra-frequency neighboring cellsaround a cell. Such a design can further limit the number of neighboring cells affecting thetransmission mode of this cell.

If the MbmsTransMode is set to DYNAMIC, and a cell is not in the elementary congestionstate and the PTP transmission mode is shown in the statistical result of the number of users inthe cell, the final transmission mode is PTM mode if only a PTM mode is shown in the statisticalresult of the number of subscribers in an MBMS neighboring cell.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe more the intra-frequency neighboring cells are configured as MBMS neighboring cells, theeasier the transmission mode of this cell is determined as PTM, and the higher the ratio of PTMtransmission mode in the whole network is. In terms of performance of the whole network, ifthe number of subscribers reaches a certain scale, the higher the ratio of PTM transmission mode,the better. Because the higher the ratio, the greater the MBMS consolidatory gain obtained by





subscribers, the less the conversion between PTP and PTM modes, and the lower the serviceinfluence. But, if there are a few subscribers in the whole network, the high ratio of PTMtransmission mode will waste resources and affect other service capacities.

Related CommandsUse ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to set, LST INTRAFREQNCELL to query, and MODINTRAFREQNCELL to modify MbmsNCellInd.



9-19

10 Algorithm Switches

About This Chapter

This describes the RNC algorithm Switches. In the RNC, algorithm switches are categorizedinto connection-oriented algorithm switches and cell-oriented algorithm switches.

10.1 Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in the RNCThis describes the connection-oriented algorithm switches in the RNC. In the RNC, theconnection-oriented algorithm switches are effective only within the duration of a cell, that is,the modification of an algorithm switch is not effective for the UEs that are already in connectionmode before the modification but effective for the UEs that are connected later. The enablingand disabling of the connection-oriented algorithm switches are effective for the entire RNC,but cannot be controlled for single cells.

10.2 Cell Algorithm SwitchesThis describes the cell algorithm switches, which are valid for single cells. Different cells canhave different algorithm configurations. The algorithm switches become effective as soon asthey are configured.

10.3 Other Algorithm SwitchesThis describes some other algorithm switches, such as the Iub CAC algorithm switch, Iubbandwidth-restricted BE service rate reduction algorithm switch, and intra-frequencymeasurement control information indication.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 10 Algorithm Switches


10-1

10.1 Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in the RNCThis describes the connection-oriented algorithm switches in the RNC. In the RNC, theconnection-oriented algorithm switches are effective only within the duration of a cell, that is,the modification of an algorithm switch is not effective for the UEs that are already in connectionmode before the modification but effective for the UEs that are connected later. The enablingand disabling of the connection-oriented algorithm switches are effective for the entire RNC,but cannot be controlled for single cells.

On the RNC LMT, set each connection-oriented algorithm switch through SETCORRMALGOSWITCH and query the status of each algorithm switch through LSTCORRMALGOSWITCH.

10.1.1 Channel Class Algorithm SwitchesThis describes the channel algorithm switches.

10.1.2 Handover Algorithm SwitchThis describes the handover algorithm switches.

10.1.3 Power Control Algorithm SwitchesThis describes the power control switches.

10.1.4 HSPA Algorithm SwitchThis describes the HSPA algorithm switches.

10.1.5 DRD Algorithm SwitchesThis describes the DRD algorithm switches.

10.1.6 SRNS Relocation Algorithm SwitchThis describes the SRNS relocation algorithm switches.

10.1.7 Compressed Mode Algorithm SwitchThis describes the compressed mode algorithm switches.

10.1.1 Channel Class Algorithm SwitchesThis describes the channel algorithm switches.

IDChSwitch

10 Algorithm SwitchesRAN




Meaning

CAUTIONThe DCCC algorithm is a basic function. If the DCCC algorithm is disabled, channels cannotimplement the following D2D adjustments that are caused by other algorithms:l D2D rate adjustment of the BE service triggered on the basis of traffic

l 1A rate decreasing, that is, the rate decreasing before soft handovers

l Rate decreasing due to the IUB bandwidth limit

l Rate decreasing due to the TCP limit, that is, the rate decreasing for the link stability

l BE service bandwidth adjustment that is triggered by the primary congestion

Table 10-1 shows channel algorithm switches.

Table 10-1 List of channel algorithm switches

Serial No. AlgorithmSwitch

SwitchName


Description

1 AMR_TWO_CODCH_SWITCH

Switch ofconfiguring twoDCHs forAMR

OFF When the switch is enabled, twoCoDCHs are allocated for theAMR voice call with the bit rate of7.95 kbit/s or less. When the switchis disabled, three CoDCHs areallocated for the AMR voice call.

2 AMR_SID_MUST_CFG_SWITCH

Switch ofconfiguring the SIDframe forAMR

OFF When the switch is enabled, theSID frame for AMR-NB voice callwill be configured anyway.Otherwise, the SID frame will beconfigured acorrding to the CNassignment.

3 AMRC_SWITCH

AMRCalgorithmswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled and theAMRC (AMR Control) license isactivated, the AMR controlfunction is applied to the AMRservice.

4 AQM_SWITCH

AQMalgorithmswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theAQM algorithm is applied to theRNC.

5 BE_RATE_DOWN_BF_HO_SWITCH

Algorithmswitch forratedecreasingbeforehandovers

OFF When the switch is enabled, thebandwidth of the BE services isdecreased before handoverhappens. It is recommended toenable DCCC_SWITCH whenusing this function.



10-3


SwitchName


Description

6 DCCC_SWITCH

DCCCalgorithmswitch

ON When the switch is enabled, thedynamic channel reconfigurationcontrol algorithm is applied to theRNC.

7 DL_INNER_LOOP_POWER_CTRL_SWITCH

Downlinkinner looppowercontrolactivationswitch

ON When the switch is enabled, theinner loop downlink power controlstatus is set to Active. When theswitch is disabled, the inner loopdownlink power control status isset to Inactive.

8 DOWNLINK_BLIND_DETECTION_SWITCH

Downlinkblinddetectionswitch

ON When the switch is enabled, thedownlink blind transport formatdetection function is used forsingle SRB and AMR + SRBbearers.NOTE

The UE is only required to support theblind transport format that is theprescribed in section 4.3.1 of the 3GPP25.212 protocol.

9 FRC_FP_MODE_SWITCH

FP modeswitch

ON When the switch is enabled, the FPmode on the Iub interface is set tonormal mode. When the switch isdisabled, the FP mode on the Iubinterface is set to silent mode.

10 FRC_PDCP_RFC2507_HC_SWITCH

PDCP IPheadercompression switch

OFF When the switch is enabled and thePDCP IP header compressionlicense is activated, the PDCP IPheader compression algorithm willbe applied to the RNC.

11 FRC_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH

PDCP ROheadercompression switch

OFF When the switch is enabled and thePDCP RO header compressionlicense is activated, the PDCP ROheader compression algorithm willbe applied to the RNC.






SwitchName


Description

12 HANDOVER_TO_UTRAN_DEFAULT_CONFIG_SWITCH

Defaultconfiguration switchfor inter-RAThandovertoUTRAN

ON When the switch is enabled, thedefault configurations of signalingand RABs which are defined in3GPP 25.331 are used when the UEperforms handovers from the GSMsystem to the WCDMA system.When the switch is disabled, thosedefault configurations are notapplied, but the RB, TrCH andPhyCH included in theHANDOVER TO UTRANCOMMAND message are usedinstead.

13 IGNORE_RLC_CAP_SWITCH

Algorithmswitch ofignoringthe RLCcapabilityof UE

ON When the switch is enabled, theRAB Assignment request and thesubsequent RB Setup should becontinued if the RLC AMcapability of UE cannot meet theminimum RLC buffer requirementdefined by the RLC TX/RXWINDOW LIMITs of the RAB tobe setup. When the switch isdisabled, the RAB setup requestshould be rejected.

14 IMS_PROC_AS_NORMAL_PS_SWITCH

IMSprocessedas anormal PSRABswitch

OFF When the switch is enablede, theIMS signalling RAB CN assignedwill be processed as a normal PSRAB. Otherwise no special actionwill be taken.

15 IMS_SUPPORT_ACTIVATION

IMSsupportactivationswitch

ON When the switch is enabled and theIMS license is activated, the RNCsupports IMS.

16 IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH

Iu QoSnegotiation switch

OFF When the switch is enabled, the IuQoS negotiation function isapplied to the PS domain ifalternative RAB parameters arepresent in the RANAP RABASSIGNMENT REQUEST orRELOCATION REQUESTmessage.



10-5


SwitchName


Description

17 IU_QOS_RENEG_SWITCH

Iu QoS re-negotiation switch

OFF When the switch is enabled and theIU QOS RENEQ license isactivated, the RNC supports themaximum rate re-negotiation if theQoS of real-time traffic can not beguaranteed according to cellconditions.






SwitchName


Description

18 IUB_OVERBOOKING_SWITCH

Iuboverbooking switch

OFF When the wireless environment ispoor, some TFs are banned for highspeed RAB to limit the speed andthen reduce the transmissionpower. When the switch is enabled,the IUB overbooking function isapplied to the SRNC.The data services are unstable to acertain degree, for example, sometraffic is caused by downloading awebpage while no traffic is causedwhen users are reading thewebpage, so the actual service rateis much different from the channelrate and there is a big peak-to-average ratio.If data services and voice servicesuse the same path for transmission,a full-rate bandwidth must bereserved for the data services sothat the voice services are notaffected when the data services areimplemented in peak rate. The Iubinterface has insufficienttransmission resources and eachdata service needs muchbandwidth, so a rather limitedamount of data can be connected atthe same time, and thus it isdifficult to carry out a mass of dataservices.More data services can beimplemented if data services use anindependent path for transmission,differentiated transmissionmethods are used, and smalleractivated factors are configured. Inthis way, only data services areaffected even when congestion iscaused by simulatneous datatransmission of multiple dataconnections.

19 IUUP_V2_SPT_SWITCH

IUUp V2SPTswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled and theSupport IUUP Version 2 licenseis enabled, the RNC supports theTFO/TRFO function.



10-7


SwitchName


Description

20 LOSSLESS_RELOCIN_SWITCH

Losslessrelocationswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled and theUE supports lossless relocation,PDCP is configured to supportingthe lossless relocation if the RNCmeets conditions such as the RLCmode, desertion mode, and in-sequence submission.

21 LOSSLESS_DLRLC_PDUSIZECHG_SWITCH

LosslessdownlinkRLC PDUsizechangealgorithmswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, thesize of downlink RLC PDU canchange lossless.

21 MULTI_RAB_SWITCH

Switch ofsingledomainsupportingmultipleservices

ON When the switch is enabled, multi-RABs combination of 2CS, 2CS+1PS, 1CS+2PS and 2PS aresupported in the RNC.

22 PDCP_IPV6_HEAD_COMPRESS_SWITCH

IPv6packetheadercompression switch

OFF When the switch is enabled and thePDCP header compression licenseis activated, the PDCP headercompression algorithm for IPv6will be applied to the RNC.

23 PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH

UE statetransitionswitch forPS BEservice

OFF When the switch is enabled, the UERRC state transitions(CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/URA_PCH) for services areapplied to the RNC.

24 PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH

UE StateTransitionswitch forPS Non-BE service

OFF When the switch is enabled, the UERRC state transitions toCELL_FACH for real-timeservices are applied to the RNC.

25 RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH

RABdownsizing switch

ON When the switch is enabled, theRAB downsizing function isactivated to determine the initial bitrate according to cell resources.






SwitchName


Description

26 RSC_FEEDBK_AFTER_SETUPRAB_FAIL_SWITCH

RSCfeedbackafter setupRABfailureswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, thecell left SF is brought back if theRAB setup fails because of the lackof CELL SF and then the RABsetup tries again with a lower speedto fit the feedback SF.

27 SYSHOIN_CMP_IUUP_FIXTO1_SWITCH

SysHoIncompleteconfigureIUUPversionbackswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, IUUPVersion can back to R99 whenSysHoIn use complete configure.

28 THROU_DCCC_SWITCH

DCCCswitchbased onthroughput

OFF When the switch is enabled, DCCCis applied to DCH based onthroughput statistic.

10.1.2 Handover Algorithm SwitchThis describes the handover algorithm switches.

IDHoSwitch

Meaning

Table 10-2 List of handover algorithm switches


SwitchName


Description

1 1J_MEAS_SWTICH

1Jmeasurement controlswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled and theUE version is R6, 1J event will becarried with intra-frequencymeasurement control.



10-9


SwitchName


Description

2 6F6G_SWITCH

6F6Gmeasurement controlswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theRNC starts the 6F6G measurementif the UE is in a macro-diversity,that is, the UE triggers the radio linksynchronization parametersmeasurement if the UE has morethan two links in the active set. If thetiming difference between radiolinks exceeds a certain threshold,the UE reports the 6F event andtriggers a timer. If the timingdifference between the radio links isbelow the threshold, the UE reportsthe 6G event, or the UE will releaseone or more radio links when thetimer expires.

3 ACT_SET_QUAL_SWITCH

Active setqualitymeasurement switch

ON When the switch is enabled, theactive set quality measurement isallowed. After the RB setup iscomplete (or after the RRC setup iscomplete ifSIGNAL_HO_SWITCH is ON),the RNC initiates signal qualitymeasurement to all the cells in theactive set. If the integrated signalquality of all the cells in the activeset is below a certain threshold, theUE reports the 2D event. Thenaccording to the status of the inter-frequency and inter-RAT handoverswitch and UE capability, the RNCwill initiate the compressed modeand send inter-frequencymeasurement control or inter-RATmeasurement control to triggerinter-frequency or inter-RAThandovers based on the coverage.

4 DETSET_ADD_TO_ACTSET_SWITCH

Detectedset add toactive setswitch

OFF (ONrecommended)

When the switch is enabled, thecells in detected set can be added tothe active set when the RNCreceives the valid event reports fromthe cells. The cells in the detectedset allowed to be added to the activeset must be the neighboring intra-frequency cells of a cell in the activeset.






SwitchName


Description

5 DETSET_RPRT_SWITCH

Detectedset reportswitch

OFF (ONrecommended)

When the switch is enabled, thedetected cell is allowed to send theintra-frequency measurementreport to the RNC.

6 HCS_SPD_EST_SWITCH

HCS speedestimationswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theRNC evaluates the UE's movingspeed when it is in an HCS cell, andinitiates inter-layer handover byfast-mobility decision or by fast-mobility decision according to theUE's speed.

7 INTRA_FREQUENCY_HARD_HANDOVER_SWITCH

Intra-frequencyhardhandoverswitch

ON When the switch is enabled, theintra-frequency hard handover isallowed under the followingconditions:l The BE service is set up on the

DCH and the bit rate of BEservice or combined servicesexceeds the threshold for softhandover downlink bit rate.

l The UE reports the 1D eventwhen the soft handover switch isoff.

l The UE performs inter-RNChandovers when there is no Iurinterface between the RNCs.

8 INTER_FREQ_HHO_SWITCH

Inter-frequencyhardhandoverswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theinter-frequency measurement isallowed or the inter-frequency hardhandover based on cell load isallowed.

9 INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH

Inter-RAThandoverout switchfor CSservice

ON When the switch is enabled, theRNC is allowed to initiate inter-RAT measurement to trigger inter-RAT handovers of the CS domainfrom the UTRAN.

10 INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH

Inter-RAThandoverout switchfor PSservice

ON When the switch is enabled, theRNC is allowed to initiate inter-RAT measurement to trigger inter-RAT handovers of the PS domainfrom the UTRAN.



10-11


SwitchName


Description

11 IUR_SHO_DIVCTRL_FIELD_SUPP_SWITCH

Inter-Iursoft-handovermacro-diversitysupportswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, the Iurdiversity support switch isconfigured according to thediversity switch of this RNC. Whenthe switch is disabled, the Iurdiversity support switch is set toMUST (for BE service) or MAY(for other services) according to theservice type.

12 NCELL_COMBINE_SWITCH

Neighboring cellcombiningswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, themeasurement object is chosen fromneighboring cells of all the cells inthe active set and limited by 32.When the switch is disabled, themeasurement object is chosen fromneighboring cells and the best celland limited by 32.

13 PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH

PS 3G->2G cellchangeNACCswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theNetwork Assisted Cell Change(NACC) function is supported in the3G -> 2G inter-RAT handoversupport process for the PS domain.WhenPS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH is ON, the PS 3G->2G cellchange NACC switch is not invalid.NACC: Network Assisted CellChange. The NACC is used toaccess the 2G cell according to theSI/PSI of the target cell to reduce thedelay of inter-cell handovers.

14 PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH

PS 3G->2Greallocation switch

OFF l When the switch is enabled,inter-RAT handovers of the PSdomain from UTRAN use therelocation method.

l When the switch is disabled,inter-RAT handovers of the PSdomain from UTRAN use thecell change order method.






SwitchName


Description

15 SERVICE_HO_BASED_ON_RNC_SWITCH

Servicehandoverbased onthe RNCsettings

OFF l When the switch is enabled, theservice attribute of inter-RAThandovers is configuredaccording to the RNCparameters.

l When the switch is disabled, theservice attribute of inter-RAThandovers is configured based onthe CN if the CN has the servicehandover attribute, and isconfigured based on the RNC ifthe CN has not the servicehandover attribute.

16 SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH

Signalinghandoverswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theRNC initiates the qualitymeasurement of active set after theRRC setup is complete (before RBsetup). In this way, the RNC cantrigger inter-frequency or inter-RAT handover when the RRC setupis complete. Thus the UE can behanded over to an inter-frequency orinter-RAT neighboring cell morequickly when the UE is located atthe edge of the cell or the signalquality of the radio link is bad.SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH is notused to trigger inter-frequency orinter-RAT handovers only when theUE has signal connection. It is usedto start the active set qualitymeasurement process once the RRCconnection is set up and the RB isnot setup. If the active set qualitymeasurement result has been sent,SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH affectsnothing.

17 SIGNAL_IUR_INTRA_HO_SWITCH

Signalingintra-frequencyhandovercontrolover Iur

OFF When the switch is enabled, theintra-frequency handover over IURis allowed if the UE has only signalconnection.



10-13


SwitchName


Description

18 SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH

SNArestrictionswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theRNC controls the UEs that areactive in the CN configuration.Those UEs are allowed to accessand move only in the cells withpermission.The SNA restriction needs to besupported by the CN.

19 SOFT_HANDOVER_SWITCH

Softhandoverswitch

ON When the switch is enabled, the softor softer handover is allowed in thecells of the RNC. When receiving anevent 1A, 1B, 1C, or 1D report, theRNC starts to add, remove orreplace soft handover cells.

20 HO_BEYOND_UE_CAP_ADD_TO_MC_SWITCH

Neighborcellbeyond UEcapabilitymeasurement switch

OFF When the switch is enabled, then theneighboring cells whose frequencyband is not included in the UE'smeasurement capability will also besent in the inter-frequencymeasurement list.

21 LDR_HO_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH

SofthandoverstatetriggerLDR inter-frequencyhandoverswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theLDR inter-frequency handover isallowed in the soft handover state.

22 MBMS_FLC_SWITCH

MBMSfrequencylayerconvergence swtich

OFF When the switch is enabled, theMBMS frequency layerconvergence adopts redirectionstrategy.。

23 OVERLAY_SWITCH

Overlaynetworkswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, thespecial functions for overlaynetwork are valid. Otherwise, theyare forbidden.

24 SERV_CELL_CHG_WITH_ACTSET_UPDATE_SWITCH

Servicecell changeand activeset updatein one stepswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, activeset update procedure and servicecell change procedure can befinished in one step. The switch isonly fit for the UE with version R6.






SwitchName


Description

25 SERV_CELL_CHG_WITH_CHL_SWITCH

Servicecell changeandchannelreconfiguration inone stepswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, channelreconfiguration procedure andservice cell change procedure canbe finished in one step.

10.1.3 Power Control Algorithm SwitchesThis describes the power control switches.

IDPcSwitch

Switch Meaning

Table 10-3 List of power control switches

Serial No. Algorithm Switch

SwitchName


Description

1 AMR_MODE_INDUCE_BLER_TARGET_ALTER_SWITCH

Alteringswitch oftargetBLERvalueinduced byAMRmode

OFF When the switch is enabled, theBLER target value comes from theBLER target value of the AMRmodes specified in the AMRCparameter table. When the switch isdisabled, the BLER target valuecomes from the BLER target valuespecified in TYPRAB.

2 DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH

Downlinkpowerbalanceswitch

ON When the switch is enabled, the DPB(Downlink Power Balance)algorithm is applied to the RNC.Downlink power drift amongdifferent RLs may be caused by TPCbit error in the soft handover process.The downlink power balance cansolve the power unbalance betweenRLs to reach the otpimal gain of softhandovers.



10-15


SwitchName


Description

3 FP_MUTI_RLS_IND_SWITCH

Multi RLSindicatorswitch

ON When the switch is enabled, the RNCwill inform NodeB about the changeof RLS's number with FP inner bandsignaling.

4 INNER_LOOP_DL_LMTED_PWR_INC_SWITCH

Limitedpowerincrease inthe innerloop powercontrolswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, thelimited power increase algorithm isapplied in the inner loop powercontrol.

5 OLPC_SWITCH

Outer looppowercontrolswitch

ON When the switch is enabled, the RNCupdates the uplink SIR TARGET ofRLS on the NodeB side by IUB DCHFP signals.

6 OLPC_UL_SIR_ERR_REL_SWITCH

UEreleasedlinked toUL SIRerrorswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, the UEis released if the SIRERR is high andthe cell is overloaded.

7 RL_RECFG_SIR_TARGET_CARRY_SWITCH

SIRTargetswitch forRLreconfiguration

ON When the switch is disabled, thecurrent converged outer loop SIRTarget should be taken intoconsideration in the new initial SIRTarget during the RLreconfiguration, and the UL SIRTarget is not included in the RLreconfiguration message to theNodeB. The switch is valid onlywhen OLPC_SWITCH is on.

8 SIG_DCH_OLPC_SWITCH

Switch ofthesignalingtransmissionparticipating in theouter looppowercontrol formultipleDCHs

OFF This switch is used to determinewhether SIG DCH joins the uplinkOLPC (outside loop power control)procedure if there are multipleDCHs. When the switch is enabled,SIG DCH joins OLPC procedure.But when there is SIG DCH, SIGDCH joins OLPC procedure nomatter whether this switch is enabledor not.





10.1.4 HSPA Algorithm SwitchThis describes the HSPA algorithm switches.

ID

HspaSwitch

Switch Meaning

Table 10-4 List of HSPA algorithm switches


SwitchName


Description

1 HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH

HSDPAservicestatetransitionswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, the UERRC state transitions toCELL_FACH for the HSDPAservices are applied to the RNC. $When the RAB on the HS-DSCH isthe BE service, thePS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCHneeds to be enabled simultaneously.$ When the RAB on the HS-DSCHis the PS real-time service, thePS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH needs to be enabledsimultaneously.

2 PS_STREAMING_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH

Streamingservice onHSDPAswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, the PSstreaming service can be mapped tothe HS-DSCH if the maximumdownlink bit rate is higher than orequal to the threshold for the PSstreaming service to be set up on theHSDPA.

3 HSDPA_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH

HSDPAflowcontrolswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theHSDPA (AM mode) flow controlfunction is applied to the SRNC.

4 HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH

HSUPAstatetransitionswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, UE RRCstate transitions to CELL_FACH forthe DCCC algorithm of HSUPAservices are allowed in the RNC.

5 HSUPA_PO_UPDATE_SWITCH

HSUPAPO updateswitch

OFF When the HSUPA PO update switchand OLPC algorithm switch isenabled, the RNC adjusts the E-DCHpower offset periodically.



10-17


SwitchName


Description

6 PS_STREAMING_ON_E_DCH_SWITCH

PSstreamingon E-DCHswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, the PSstreaming traffic can be mapped tothe E-DCH if the maximum uplinkbit rate is higher than or equal to thethreshold for the PS streamingservice to be set up on HSUPA.

7 H2D_FOR_LOWR5_NRNCCELL_ADD_SWITCH

H2Dbefore anNRNC cellwhoseversion isearlier thanR5 isadded

OFF When the switch is enabled, channelswitch of HS-DSCH to DCH isneeded before an NRNC whoseversion is earlier than R5 is added tothe active set.

8 HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH

2 ms TTIswitch forHSUPAservice

OFF When the switch is enabled, the 2msTTI could be applied to HSUPAtraffic.

9 HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH

DCCCswitch forHSUPAservice

OFF When the switch is enabled, thedynamic channel reconfigurationcontrol algorithm is applied to theHSUPA service.

10.1.5 DRD Algorithm SwitchesThis describes the DRD algorithm switches.

ID

DrdSwitch

Meaning

Table 10-5 DRD algorithm switches


SwitchName


Description

1 COMB_SERV_DRD_SWITCH

Integrated serviceDRDswitch

OFF When this switch is enabled,DRD can be performed only ifthe integrated service needsretry.






SwitchName


Description

2 DRD_SWITCH

DRDswitch

OFF This is the general DRDalgorithm switch. Other DRDsub-switches can be enabledonly when this switch is enabled.

3 HSDPA_DRD_SWITCH

HSDPADRDswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theDRD can be performed only ifthe HSDPA service needs retry.

4 RAB_DCCC_DRD_SWITCH

DCCCDRDswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theDRD can be done only if theRAB DCCC process needs retry.

5 RAB_MODIFY_DRD_SWITCH

RABmodifyDRDswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theDRD can be performed only ifthe RAB modify process needsretry.

6 HSUPA_DRD_SWITCH

HSUPADRDswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theDRD can be done only if theHSUPA service needs retry.

7 RAB_SETUP_DRD_SWITCH

RABsetupDRDswitch

ON When the switch is enabled, theDRD can be done only if theRAB setup process needs retry.

8 INTRA_HO_D2H_DRD_SWITCH

Intra-frequencyhandoverD2HDRDswitch

ON When the UE needs D2H retryfor handover-triggering after theintra-frequency handoverprocess is completed, the blind-Ho DRD cell can be selected forD2H retry only if the switch ison.

9 INTER_HO_D2H_DRD_SWITCH

Inter-frequencyhandoverD2HDRDswitch

ON When the UE needs D2H retryfor handover-triggering after theinter-frequency handoverprocess is completed, the blind-Ho DRD cell can be selected forD2H retry only if the switch ison.

10.1.6 SRNS Relocation Algorithm SwitchThis describes the SRNS relocation algorithm switches.



10-19

IDSrnsrSwitch

Meaning

Table 10-6 List of SRNS relocation algorithm switches


SwitchName


Description

1 SRNSR_DSCR_IUR_RESRCE_SWITCH

SRNSrelocationor DSCRswitch forIurresourceoptimization

OFF When the switch is enabled, theRNC initiates SRNS relocation orDSCR of certain UEs under thefollowing conditions to optimizeresources over the Iur interface:l The UE only has connections

with cells in the DRNC.l The Iur transmission resources

are congested.l The service of UE is the same as

the service that is carried by thecongestion link.

The RNC selects the relocation orthe DSCR process according to thesetting of DSCRInd in ADDNRNC.

2 SRNSR_DSCR_LOC_SEPRAT_SWITCH

SRNSrelocationor DSCRswitch forseparatedlocation

OFF When the switch is enabled, theRNC triggers RNS relocation orDSCR when the SRNC and CRNCare separated and all the intra-frequency neighboring cells and thebest cell are not under the SRNC.The RNC selects the relocation orthe DSCR process according to thesetting of DSCRInd in ADDNRNC.






SwitchName


Description

3 SRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH

SRNSrelocationor DSCRswitch fordelayoptimization

OFF When the switch is enabled, theRNC initiates SRNS relocationunder the following conditions toreduce link delay at the network sideto enhance service quality:l The SRNC and CRNC are

separated.l The link delay does not meet the

Qos requirement for the currentservice.

The RNC selects the relocation orthe DSCR process according to thesetting of DSCRInd in ADDNRNC.

4 SRNSR_DSCR_SEPRAT_DUR_SWITCH

SRNSrelocationor DSCRswitch forseparatedduration

OFF When the switch is enabled, theRNC triggers RNS relocation orDSCR when the separated timebetween the SRNC and the CRNCexceeds a certain threshold.The RNC selects the relocation orthe DSCR process according to thesetting of DSCRInd in ADDNRNC.

10.1.7 Compressed Mode Algorithm SwitchThis describes the compressed mode algorithm switches.

IDCmcfSwitch



10-21

Meaning

Table 10-7 List of compressed mode algorithm switches


SwitchName


Description

1 CMCF_DL_HLS_SWITCH

Compressed mode DLhigher-layerschedulingswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, the DLhigher-layer scheduling forcompressed mode is allowed.

2 CMCF_UL_HLS_SWITCH

Compressed mode ULhigher-layerschedulingswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, the ULhigher-layer scheduling forcompressed mode is allowed.

3 CMCF_UL_PRECFG_TOLERANCE_SWITCH

Compressed mode ULpreconfigured statetoleranceswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, thedisaccord between compressedmode method and current traffic isallowed.

4 CMCF_WITHOUT_UE_CAP_REPORT_SWITCH

Compressed modewithoutUEcapabilityreportswitch

OFF When the switch is enabled, theRNC needs to start the compressedmode and deliver the measurement,if the UE does not report thecompressed mode capability of thecorresponding frequency band afterthe inter-frequency or inter-RATmeasurement is started.

10.2 Cell Algorithm SwitchesThis describes the cell algorithm switches, which are valid for single cells. Different cells canhave different algorithm configurations. The algorithm switches become effective as soon asthey are configured.

On the RNC LMT, cell-oriented algorithm switches are added uniformly through ADDCELLALGOSWITCH, the state of each algorithm switch is queried through LSTCELLALGOSWITCH, and the algorithm switches are modified through MODCELLALGOSWITCH.

10.2.1 Cell Class Algorithm SwitchesThis describes the cell algorithm switches.

10.2.2 Uplink Admission Control Algorithm Switch





This describes the switch that is used to control the UL CAC algorithm.

10.2.3 Downlink Admission Control Algorithm SwitchThis describes the switch that is used to control the DL CAC algorithm.

10.2.1 Cell Class Algorithm SwitchesThis describes the cell algorithm switches.

Table 10-8 List of cell algorithm switches

AlgorithmSwitch

SwitchName


Description

Cell CAC algorithm switch: NBMCACALGOSWITCH

CRD_ADCTRL NodeBcreditadmissioncontrolalgorithm

ON The switch is used to determine whether thepreliminary admission needs to be performedfor the credit of the intelligent-admissionNodeB and whether the credit admission controlalgorithm is started for the cell. The NodeBcredit admission control algorithm is valid onlywhen NODEB_CONG_CAC_SWITCH inthe SET CACALGOSWITCH command isenabled and CRD_ADCTRL is enabled.

IUBBAND_ADCTRL

Iubbandwidthadmissioncontrol

OFF Only when IUB_CONG_CAC_SWITCH inthe command SET CACALGOSWITCH isenabled and this switch is also enabled, the Iubbandwidth admission control algorithm is valid.

HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL

HSDPA UULoadadmissioncontrol

OFF The switch is used to determine whether theHSDPA UU Load admission control algorithmis started.

HSDPA_GBP_MEAS

HSDPAGBPmeasurement

OFF The switch is used to determine whether theHSDPA HS-DSCH required powermeasurement is started.

HSDPA_PBR_MEAS

HSDPAPBRmeasurement

OFF The switch is used to determine whether theHSDPA HS-DSCH provided bit ratemeasurement is started.

HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL

HSUPA UULoadadmissioncontrol

OFF The switch is used to determine whether theHSUPA UU Load admission control algorithmis started.



10-23

AlgorithmSwitch

SwitchName


Description

MBMS_UU_ADCTRL

MBMS UULoadadmissioncontrol

OFF The switch is used to determine whether theMBMS UU Load admission control algorithmis started.

HSUPA_PBR_MEAS

HSUPAPBRmeasurement

OFF The switch is used to determine whether theHSUPA guaranteed bit rate measurement isstarted.

DOFFC DefaultDPCHoffsetconfiguration algorithm

ON When the switch is enabled, the DOFF isconfigured with intervals according to the load.When the switch is disabled, the DOFF isconfigured randomly.

Cell LDC algorithm switch: NBMLDCALGOSWITCH

INTRA_FREQUENCY_LDB

Intra-frequencyloadbalancealgorithm

OFF It is also named cell breathing algorithm. Basedon the cell load, this algorithm changes the pilotpower of the cell to control the load betweenintra-frequency cells.

PUC Potentialuser controlalgorithm

OFF Based on the cell load, this algorithm changesthe selection/reselection parameters of a cell tolead the UE to a lighter loaded cell.

UL_UU_OLC Uplinkoverloadcontrolalgorithm

OFF When the cell is overloaded in UL, thisalgorithm reduces the cell load in UL by quickTF restriction or UE release.

DL_UU_OLC Downlinkoverloadcontrolalgorithm

OFF When the cell is overloaded in DL, thisalgorithm reduces the cell load in DL by quickTF restriction or UE release.

UL_UU_LDR Uplink loadrearrangementalgorithm

OFF When the cell is heavily loaded in UL, thisalgorithm reduces the cell load in UL by usinginter-frequency load handover, BE service ratereduction, uncontrollable real-time service QoSrenegotiation, CS inter-RAT handover, and PSinter-RAT handover.





AlgorithmSwitch

SwitchName


Description

DL_UU_LDR Downlinkloadrearrangementalgorithm

OFF When the cell is heavily loaded in DL, thisalgorithm reduces the cell load in DL by usinginter-frequency load handover, BE service ratereduction, uncontrollable real-time service QoSrenegotiation, CS inter-RAT handover, and PSinter-RAT handover.

OLC_EVENTMEAS

OLC eventmeasurement

OFF The switch determines whether the load controlis triggered based on the event measurementalone or based on the period measurementreport.

CELL_CODE_LDR

Codereshufflingalgorithm

OFF When the cell is heavily loaded in DL, thisalgorithm reduces the cell load in DL by usingBE service rate reduction and code treereshuffling.

CELL_CREDIT_LDR

Creditreshufflingalgorithm

OFF When the cell credit is heavily loaded, thisalgorithm reduces the credit load of the cell byusing BE service rate reduction, uncontrollablereal-time service QoS renegotiation, CS inter-RAT handover, and PS inter-RAT handover.

MAC-HS reset algorithm switch

NBMMACHSRESETALGOSELSWITCH

MAC-HSresetalgorithmswitch

ALGORITHM_DEPEND_ON_LCG

Value range:l ALGORITHM_REQUIRED: Always reset

the MAC-HS no matter the target cell andsource cell are in the same NodeB or not.

l ALGORITHM_DEPEND_ON_LCG: Resetthe MAC-HS only when the target cell andsource cell are in different local cell groups.

Recommended value:ALGORITHM_DEPEND_ON_LCG

10.2.2 Uplink Admission Control Algorithm SwitchThis describes the switch that is used to control the UL CAC algorithm.

IDNBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch



10-25

Value Range

ALGORITHM_OFF, ALGORITHM_FIRST, ALGORITHM_SECOND,ALGORITHM_THIRD

Physical Scope

ALGORITHM_OFF: switches off the uplink admission control algorithm

ALGORITHM_FIRST: uses the load prediction algorithm for the uplink admission

ALGORITHM_SECOND: uses the total service normalized factor algorithm for the uplinkadmission

ALGORITHM_THIRD: The loose call admission control algorithm is used in the uplink CAC.

Setting

The default setting is ALGORITHM_SECOND.

When the change range of the uplink background noise is wide or the RTWP reported by theNodeB is invalid, it is necessary to use the total service normalized factor algorithm.

10.2.3 Downlink Admission Control Algorithm SwitchThis describes the switch that is used to control the DL CAC algorithm.

ID

NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch

Value Range

ALGORITHM_OFF, ALGORITHM_FIRST, ALGORITHM_SECOND,ALGORITHM_THIRD

Physical Scope

ALGORITHM_OFF: switches off the downlink admission control algorithm

ALGORITHM_FIRST: uses the load prediction algorithm for the downlink admission

ALGORITHM_SECOND: uses the total service normalized factor algorithm for the downlinkadmission

ALGORITHM_THIRD: The loose call admission control algorithm is used in the downlinkCAC.

Setting

The default setting is ALGORITHM_FIRST.

If TCP measurement is invalid, the total service normalized factor algorithm is adopted.





10.3 Other Algorithm SwitchesThis describes some other algorithm switches, such as the Iub CAC algorithm switch, Iubbandwidth-restricted BE service rate reduction algorithm switch, and intra-frequencymeasurement control information indication.

10.3.1 NodeB credit admission Algorithm SwitchThis describes the switch that is used to control the NodeB credit admission control algorithm.

10.3.2 Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm SwitchThis describes the Iub bandwidth congestion control algorithm switch.

10.3.3 Intra-Frequency Measurement Control Information IndicationThis describes the indication that defines whether the intra-frequency measurement controlinformation should be delivered through the system messages.

10.3.4 Inter-Frequency or Inter-RAT Measurement IndicationThis describes the indication that indicates whether inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurementcontrol information is to be delivered in the system messages.

10.3.5 FACH Measurement IndicationThis describes the indicator that indicates whether the FACH measurement occasion periodlength coefficient is to be delivered in the system message. If the inter-frequency or inter-RATmeasurement control information is delivered in the system message, some UE needs to beconfigured with the measurement occasion parameters to perform the inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement when they are in the CELL-FACH state. If the inter-frequency or inter-RATmeasurement control information indicator is set to NOT_REQUIRE, the FACH measurementindicator needs not to be configured.

10.3.1 NodeB credit admission Algorithm SwitchThis describes the switch that is used to control the NodeB credit admission control algorithm.

Parameter ID

CacSwitch

Value Range

Table 10-9 NodeB credit admission algorithm switch

AlgorithmSwitch

SwitchName

Description Related Command

NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH

NodeBcredit CACswitch

The system performs theCAC based on the usage stateof the NodeB credit. When theidle NodeB's credit is notenough, the system refusesnew access requests.

Set: SETCACALGOSWITCHQuery: LSTCACALGOSWITCH



10-27

10.3.2 Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm SwitchThis describes the Iub bandwidth congestion control algorithm switch.

IDIubCongCtrlSwitch

Value RangeEnum (ON, OFF)

Physical ScopeNone.


When this switch is enabled, the Iub bandwidth restriction algorithm works, so that when theoccupied bandwidth of Iub interface exceeds the Iub congestion trigger threshold, the algorithmuses LDR to periodically reduce some BE service rates or AMR service rates until the occupiedbandwidth is lower than the Iub congestion release threshold.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf there is insufficient transmission resource of the Iub interface and the carrier wants to havemore users be admitted even at the risk of reducing the QoS, this switch shall be ON. When thetransmission resources are abundant, this switch shall preferably be OFF.

Related CommandsUse ADD NODEBALGOPARA to set, LST NODEBALGOPARA to query, and MODNODEBALGOPARA to modify IubCongCtrlSwitch.

10.3.3 Intra-Frequency Measurement Control InformationIndication

This describes the indication that defines whether the intra-frequency measurement controlinformation should be delivered through the system messages.

IDIntraFreqMeasInd

Value RangeEnum (REQUIRE, NOT_REQUIRE)

Physical ScopeREQUIRE: The intra-frequency measurement control information is delivered in SIB11.





NOT_REQUIRE: The intra-frequency measurement control information is not delivered inSIB11.

Setting

The default setting is REQUIRE.

When intra-frequency measurement control information (the pre-configuration of themeasurement control) is delivered in the system, so that the UE can starts the intra-frequencymeasurement and sends the measurement report immediately after it enters CELL_DCH state,and the soft handover can be more quickly finished by the UE to avoid call drops when the UEis in the soft handover area.


The preconfiguration of measurement control can enable the UE in the soft handover area toimplement soft handovers more quickly to decrease the call drop rate. With the preconfigurationfunction, the UEs in the single signaling state perform soft handovers in a higher probability. Ifthe CN delivers the RAB assignment before a soft handover is complete, the delay of UE servicesetup may increase.

Related Commands

Use ADD CELLMEAS to set, LST CELLMEAS to query, and MOD CELLMEAS to modifyIntraFreqMeasInd.

10.3.4 Inter-Frequency or Inter-RAT Measurement IndicationThis describes the indication that indicates whether inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurementcontrol information is to be delivered in the system messages.

ID

InterFreqInterRatMeasInd

Value Range

Enum (NOT_REQUIRE, INTER_FREQ, INTER_RAT, INTER_FREQ_AND_INTER_RAT)

Physical Scope

NOT_REQUIRE: The inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement control information is notrequired.

INTER_FREQ: The inter-frequency measurement control information is required.

INTER_RAT: The inter-RAT measurement control information is required.

INTER_FREQ_AND_INTER_RAT: The inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurementcontrol information is required.



10-29

SettingThe default setting is INTER_FREQ_AND_INTER_RAT, that is, the inter-frequency FDDmeasurement indicator and Inter-RAT measurement indicator are set to TRUE in the systemmessage. This switch is oriented to cells.

When a UE in the CELL_FACH state receives the FACH measurement occasion info messageand in the message the inter-frequency FDD measurement indicator is set to TRUE, the UEperforms inter-frequency measurement and cell reselection assessment according to the inter-frequency neighboring cell list in the SIB11 or SIB12. If in the preceding condition, the inter-RAT measurement indicator is set to TRUE, the UE performs inter-frequency measurement andcell reselection assessment according to the inter-RAT neighboring cell list in the SIB11 orSIB12. If the inter-frequency FDD measurement indicator and Inter-RAT measurement indicatorare set to FALSE in the system message, the UE does not start corresponding measurement andcell reselection.

NOTE

If the inter-frequency FDD measurement indicator and Inter-RAT measurement indicator are set to TRUEbut no inter-frequency or inter-RAT neighboring cell is configured, the UE does not perform the inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement and cell reselection.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLMEAS to set, LST CELLMEAS to query, and MOD CELLMEAS to modifyInterFreqInterRatMeasInd.

10.3.5 FACH Measurement IndicationThis describes the indicator that indicates whether the FACH measurement occasion periodlength coefficient is to be delivered in the system message. If the inter-frequency or inter-RATmeasurement control information is delivered in the system message, some UE needs to beconfigured with the measurement occasion parameters to perform the inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement when they are in the CELL-FACH state. If the inter-frequency or inter-RATmeasurement control information indicator is set to NOT_REQUIRE, the FACH measurementindicator needs not to be configured.

IDFACHMeasInd

Value RangeEnum (REQUIRE, NOT_REQUIRE)

Physical ScopeREQUIRE: The inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement occasion parameter is delivered inSBI11.

NOT_REQUIRE: The inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement occasion parameter is notdelivered in SIB11.

SettingIf the inter-freq or inter-RAT measurement control information is delivered in the systemmessage (SIB11 or SIB12), UEs in the CELL_FACH state can perform inter-frequency or inter-





RAT cell measurement and reselection only when the CN delivers the inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement occasion parameter in SIB11 or SIB12.

Impact on the Network PerformanceWhen there is no inter-frequency or inter-RAT cell, the FACH measurement indicator needs notto be configured. To have the UE perform inter-frequency or inter-RAT cell reselection, theFACH measurement indicator needs to be configured.

Related CommandsUse ADD CELLMEAS to set, LST CELLMEAS to query, and MOD CELLMEAS to modifyFACHMeasInd.



10-31

11 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT

About This Chapter

This describes the parameters that can be configured on the NodeB LMT: the HSDPA flowcontrol parameters, HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA MAC-escheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA power control parameters, and local cell managementparameters.

11.1 HSDPA Flow Control ParametersThis describes the HSDPA flow control parameters that can be modified by network planners.

11.2 HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm ParametersThis describes the HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified bynetwork planners.

11.3 HSDPA Based on SPI Algorithm ParametersThis describes the HSDPA SPI algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.

11.4 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm ParametersThis describes the HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified bynetwork planners on the NodeB LMT.

11.5 HSUPA Power Control ParametersThis describes the HSUPA power control parameters: the power control algorithm switches fordownlink control channel, fixed power control mode algorithm parameters, and dynamic powercontrol mode algorithm parameters.

11.6 Local Cell Management ParametersThis describes the local cell management parameters: cell radius and cell handover radius.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 11 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT


11-1

11.1 HSDPA Flow Control ParametersThis describes the HSDPA flow control parameters that can be modified by network planners.

Table 11-1 List of HSDPA flow control parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command

1 SWITCH Flow ControlSwitch

AUTO_ADJUST_ FLOW_CTRL

Set: SETHSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836,BTS3836A, BBU3836)Query: LSTHSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836,BTS3836A, BBU3836)

2 DR Frame discardrate thresholdon the Iubinterface

0.1%

3 TD Delay triggerthreshold

2 (10 ms)

11.1.1 HSDPA Flow Control SwitchThis describes the switch of dynamic adjustment of the HSDPA bandwidth. The switchdetermines whether the congestion is controlled by the RNC or NodeB.

11.1.2 Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub InterfaceThis describes the frame discard rate threshold on the Iub interface. The frame discard rate onthe Iub interface is the frame discard rate of the transmission network on the Iub interface, namelythe packet loss rate caused by errors when the transmission network is in the idle state. Only ifthe frame discard rate measured by the reception end exceeds the threshold, the system judgesthat the Iub interface has congestion.

11.1.3 Time Delay Threshold on Iub InterfaceThis describes the time delay of frame transmission when the transport network is less busy.The Iub congestion is triggered when the time delay measured at the NodeB exceeds thethreshold. Otherwise, it is considered as common time delay of the transport network other thancongestion.

11.1.1 HSDPA Flow Control SwitchThis describes the switch of dynamic adjustment of the HSDPA bandwidth. The switchdetermines whether the congestion is controlled by the RNC or NodeB.

IDSWITCH

11 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMTRAN




Value RangeSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL, NO_FLOW_CTRL

Physical ScopeSIMPLE_FLOW_CTR: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied byR99 subscribers, the traffic is allocated to HSDPA subscribers when the physical bandwidthrestriction is taken into account.

AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRLNode: Based on the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL,traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are takeninto account.

NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on theUu interface reported by the NodeB.

SettingThis parameter should be configured according to the scenarios, and is set toAUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL by default.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter helps implement the end-to-end congestion control when HSDPA data istransmitted on the Iub interface. In this way, the Iub bandwidth utilization rate is promoted andthe transmission reliability is enhanced. The switch is enabled by default.

Related CommandsUse SET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTHSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SWITCH.

11.1.2 Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub InterfaceThis describes the frame discard rate threshold on the Iub interface. The frame discard rate onthe Iub interface is the frame discard rate of the transmission network on the Iub interface, namelythe packet loss rate caused by errors when the transmission network is in the idle state. Only ifthe frame discard rate measured by the reception end exceeds the threshold, the system judgesthat the Iub interface has congestion.

IDDR


Physical Scope0 to 1, with the step of 0.001



11-3

SettingThe default value is 1, namely 0.1% when the Iub interface uses the ATM topology.

When the Iub interface uses IP networking, it is set to the discard target of the IP transmissionnetwork.

Impact on the Network Performancel If DR is excessively low, the dynamic adjustment algorithm may judge that there is a

congestionthe when frames are discarded due to the network code errors, thus decreasingthe bandwidth utilization rate.

l If DR is excessively high, the sensitivity to clear Iub congestion decreases.

Related CommandsUse SET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTHSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query DR.

11.1.3 Time Delay Threshold on Iub InterfaceThis describes the time delay of frame transmission when the transport network is less busy.The Iub congestion is triggered when the time delay measured at the NodeB exceeds thethreshold. Otherwise, it is considered as common time delay of the transport network other thancongestion.

IDTD

Value Range0 to 20

Physical Scope0 ms to 100 ms, with the step of 5 ms

SettingThe parameter setting consists of two parts: the time delay of Iub transport network + 10 ms

l Time delay of the Iub transport networkThe time delay of the Iub transport network refers to the transmission delay period whiledata is transmitted on HS-DSCH and it consists of the delay of data buffering in eachprocessing unit and the delay of transmission through the network. The time delay of ATMtransmission network differs from that of the IP transmission network. It is recommendedto send data frames when the network is less busy, and get the transmission delay differencesamong labeled samples at the NodeB receiver. (The NodeB with enhanced performancecan get the time delay of data frame transmission.)But there is no test result at present, and it is arranged for the time being as follows:For the Iub interface with ATM networking: 0 ms





For Iub interface with IP networking: the time delay target of IP transport networkl 10 ms:

According to HS-DSCH INTERVAL (10 ms to 80 ms), when a data frame is transmittedin a network not congested, the transmission delay may be up to 80 ms, but we take theminimum value 10 ms as a benchmark.

Impact on the Network Performancel If TD is excessively low, the system may judges that there is Iub-interface congestion when

the regular time delay jitter of the Iub interface happens, reducing the Iub bandwidthutilization rate.

l If TD is excessively high, the sensitivity to clear the congestion decreases, and the Iubtransmission delay increases.

Related CommandsUse SET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTHSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query TD.

11.2 HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm ParametersThis describes the HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified bynetwork planners.

Table 11-2 List of HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command

1 SM Schedulingmethod

EPF Set:SET MACHSPARA(BTS3836, BTS3836A,BBU3836)Query:LST MACHSPARA(BTS3836, BTS3836A,BBU3836)

2 RSCALLOCM Resourceallocatemethod,CODE_PRI :code priority(applied to thepower-limitedmacro cells);POWER_PRI :power priority(applied to thecode-limitedmicro cells)

0



11-5

SerialNo.


MML Command

3 SCCHPWRCM HS-SCCHpower controlmethod

CQI

4 SCCHPWR When the HS-SCCH power iscontrolled byfixedconfiguration,SCCHPWR isthe fixed powervalue of HS-SCCH; whenthe HS-SCCHuses theadaptive powercontrol basedon CQI,SCCHPWR isthe HS-SCCHinitial transmitpower. Thevalue is anoffset in dBrelevant to thetransmit powerof PCPICH.

28, namely –3dB

5 RSCLMSW Resourcelimiting switch

OPEN

6 DYNCODESW HSDPAdynamic codeswitchcontrolled bythe NodeB

OPEN

7 MXPWRPHUSR Maximumtransmit powerof per HSDPAuser.

100%





SerialNo.


MML Command

8 8KRSCLMT16KRSCLMT32KRSCLMT64KRSCLMT128KRSCLMT256KRSCLMT384KRSCLMT

Resourcelimiting fordifferent GBR

10%10%15%15%20%25%30%

Set:SET RSCLMTPARA(BTS3836, BTS3836A,BBU3836)Query:LST RSCLMTPARA(BTS3836, BTS3836A,BBU3836)

11.2.1 Scheduling MethodThis describes the scheduling method.

11.2.2 Resource Allocation MethodThis describes the resource allocation method.

11.2.3 HS-SCCH Power Control MethodThis describes the power control method of the HS-SCCH.

11.2.4 HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit PowerThis describes the HS-SCCH fixed power or initial transmit power. When the HS-SCCH poweris controlled by the fixedly configured method, this parameter is the HS-SCCH fixed power.When the HS-SCCH uses the adaptive power control based on the CQI, this parameter is theHS-SCCH initial transmit power. The value is an offset in dB relevant to the transmit power ofPCPICH.

11.2.5 Resource Limiting SwitchThis describes the resource limiting switch. The parameter decides whether to restrain a singlesubscriber's maximum resource usage in a congested cell.

11.2.6 HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation SwitchThis describes the switch that indicates whether the HSDPA dynamic code allocation algorithmis enabled.

11.2.7 Maximum Transmit Power of per HSDPA user.This describes the maximum transmit power for per HSDPA user.

11.2.8 Resource limiting for different GBRThe parameters specify the maximum resource ratio available for different GBR.

11.2.1 Scheduling MethodThis describes the scheduling method.

ID

SM



11-7

Value RangeEPF, PF, RR, MAXCI

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingThe default value is EPF.

Impact on the Network PerformanceRR : The service types of queues are not considered. All the queues in a cell are sequencedaccording to the RR values.

MAX CI: The service types of queues are not considered. All the queues in a cell are sequencedaccording to the MAXCI values.

PF: The service types of queues are not considered. All the queues in a cell are sequencedaccording to the PF values.

EPF: The types of queues are considered.

Related CommandsUse SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SM.

11.2.2 Resource Allocation MethodThis describes the resource allocation method.

IDRSCALLOCM

Value RangeCODE_PRI, POWER_PRI

Physical ScopeCode priority, power priority

SettingThe default value is CODE_PRI.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the power resource is limited, the code is preferably allocated to save power resources forother subscribers; while the code resource is limited, the power is preferably allocated to savecode resources for other subscribers.





Related Commands

Use SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RSCALLOCM.

11.2.3 HS-SCCH Power Control MethodThis describes the power control method of the HS-SCCH.

ID

SCCHPWRCM

Value Range

CQI, FIXED

Physical Scope

CQI means that the adaptive power control based on CQI is used; FIXED means that the HS-SCCH power is fixed.

Setting

The default value is CQI.

Impact on Network Performance

The HS-SCCH power control has a significant effect on data transmission.

l If excessive HS-SCCH power is allocated, the available power of HS-PDSCH decreases,and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.

l If insufficient HS-SCCH power is allocated, the HS-PDSCH decoding error probabilityincreases, and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.

Related Commands

Use SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SCCHPWRCM.

11.2.4 HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit PowerThis describes the HS-SCCH fixed power or initial transmit power. When the HS-SCCH poweris controlled by the fixedly configured method, this parameter is the HS-SCCH fixed power.When the HS-SCCH uses the adaptive power control based on the CQI, this parameter is theHS-SCCH initial transmit power. The value is an offset in dB relevant to the transmit power ofPCPICH.

ID

SCCHPWR



11-9

Value Range0 to 80


SettingThe default value is 28, namely –3 dB.

Impact on the Network PerformanceWhen the HS-SCCH power is configured to a fixed value, SCCHPWR has the following impactson the network performance:l If excessive HS-SCCH power is allocated, the available power of the HS-PDSCH

decreases, and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.l If insufficient HS-SCCH power is allocated, the HS-SCCH decoding error probability

increases, and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.

When the HS-SCCH uses the adaptive power control based on CQI, SCCHPWR has thefollowing impacts on the network performance:l If SCCHPWR is excessively high, the HS-SCCH power is wasted before the power control

takes effect.l If SCCHPWR is excessively low, the HS-SCCH decoding error probability increases

before the power control takes effect, weakening the data transmission performance.

Related CommandsUse SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SCCHPWR.

11.2.5 Resource Limiting SwitchThis describes the resource limiting switch. The parameter decides whether to restrain a singlesubscriber's maximum resource usage in a congested cell.

IDRSCLMSW

Value RangeOPEN, CLOSE

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingThe default value is OPEN.






If the switch is turned off, it is likely that a vast majority of the cell resources are taken up bythe subscribers with high priority but poor CQI.

Related Commands

Use SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RSCLMSW.

11.2.6 HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation SwitchThis describes the switch that indicates whether the HSDPA dynamic code allocation algorithmis enabled.

ID

DYNCODESW

Value Range

OPEN, CLOSE

Physical Scope

OPEN: The dynamic code allocation is enabled.

CLOSE: The dynamic code allocation is disabled.

Setting

The recommended value of DYNCODESW is OPEN.


The HSDPA dynamic code allocation makes the physical layer channel codes be fully utilized,but the number of allocated codes will not exceed the number of codes defined by the HSDPAlicense.

Related Commands

Use SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query DYNCODESW.

11.2.7 Maximum Transmit Power of per HSDPA user.This describes the maximum transmit power for per HSDPA user.

ID

MXPWRPHUSR



11-11

Value Range1 to 100



Impact on Network PerformanceIf the parameter is set too low, the peak rate may be limited.

Related CommandsUse SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query MXPWRPHUSR.

11.2.8 Resource limiting for different GBRThe parameters specify the maximum resource ratio available for different GBR.

ID8KRSCLMT

16KRSCLMT

32KRSCLMT

64KRSCLMT

128KRSCLMT

256KRSCLMT

384KRSCLMT

Value Range1 to 100


Setting

GBR (bps) Default value

8k 10%





GBR (bps) Default value

16k 10%

32k 15%

64k 15%

128k 20%

256k 25%

384k 30%

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe parameters are used to avoid impacting system capacity due to too much air interfaceresource are consumed.

Related CommandsUse SET RSCLMTPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTRSCLMTPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query the parameters.

11.3 HSDPA Based on SPI Algorithm ParametersThis describes the HSDPA SPI algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.

Table 11-3 List of HSDPA SPI scheduling algorithm parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command

1 SSPI SPI initialvalue

0 Set: SETMACHSSPIPARA(BTS3836, BTS3836A,BBU3836)Query: LSTMACHSSPIPARA(BTS3836, BTS3836A,BBU3836)

2 ESPI SPI end value 15

3 SPIWEIGHT Weight of SPI N/A

4 EPFSA EPF schedulealgorithmswitch

DS_PQ_SCHEDULE

5 FCA Flow controlalgorithmswitch

FLOW_CONTRL_FREE



11-13

SerialNo.


MML Command

6 CQIADJA CQI adjustalgorithmswitch

NO_CQI_ADJ

7 RBLERTARGET ResidualBLER target

N/A

8 MAXRETRANS Maximumnumber ofretransmissionattempts

N/A

11.3.1 SPI Initial ValueThis describes the initial SPI value for subscribers.

11.3.2 SPI End ValueThis describes the end SPI value for subscribers.

11.3.3 Weight of SPIThis describes the weight of SPI.

11.3.4 EPF Schedule Algorithm SwitchThis describes the EPF schedule algorithm for SPI.

11.3.5 Flow Control Algorithm SwitchThis descries the flow control algorithm switch for SPI.

11.3.6 CQI Adjust Algorithm SwitchThis describes the switch of CQI adjust algorithm.

11.3.7 Residual BLER Target ValueThis describes the residual BLER target value when setting outer loop control.

11.3.8 Maximum Number of Retransmission AttemptsThis describes the maximum of retransmission attempts in the HSDPA outer loop power controlprocedure.

11.3.1 SPI Initial ValueThis describes the initial SPI value for subscribers.

IDSSPI

Value Range0 to 15







Impact on the Network PerformanceThe parameter is only used to set the value of parameters related to SPI algorithm.

Related CommandsUse SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SSPI.

11.3.2 SPI End ValueThis describes the end SPI value for subscribers.

IDESPI

Value Range0 to 15

Physical ScopeNone.


Impact on the Network PerformanceThe parameter is only used to set the value of parameters related to SPI algorithm.

Related CommandsUse SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query ESPI.

11.3.3 Weight of SPIThis describes the weight of SPI.

IDSPIWEIGHT



11-15

Value Range

1 to 100

Physical Scope

1% to 100%

Setting

Traffic Class User Priority THP Default SPI Weight of SPI

SRB signaling No ARP None 15 100%

IMS signaling No ARP None 14 100%

Conversational(VoIP)

1 None 13 100%

2

3

Streaming 1 None 12 100%

2 11 90%

3 11 90%

Interactive 1 1 10 100%

1 2 9 100%

1 3 to 15 8 100%

2 1 7 90%

2 2 6 90%

2 3 to 15 5 90%

3 1 4 80%

3 2 3 80%

3 3 to 15 2 80%

Background 1 None 8 100%

2 5 90%

3 2 80%


The parameter impact multi-subscribers differently.





Related CommandsUse SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SPIWEIGHT.

11.3.4 EPF Schedule Algorithm SwitchThis describes the EPF schedule algorithm for SPI.

IDEPFSA

Value RangeTS_SCHEDULE, DS_PQ_SCHEDULE, DS_URGENT_SCHEDULE

Physical ScopeFlow capacity sensitive queue, Time delay sensitive queue for PQ schedule, Time delay sensitivequeue for urgent schedule

SettingThe default value is DS_PQ_SCHEDULE.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe parameter need be set to DS_PQ_SCHEDULE for SRB signaling and IMS signaling.

The parameter need be set to DS_URGENT_SCHEDULE for VoIP.

The parameter need be set to TS_SCHEDULE for streaming traffic and BE service.

Related CommandsUse SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query EPFSA.

11.3.5 Flow Control Algorithm SwitchThis descries the flow control algorithm switch for SPI.

IDFCA

Value RangeFLOW_CONTRL_DYNAMIC, FLOW_CONTRL_FREE

Physical ScopeDynamic flow control, Free flow control



11-17

SettingThe default value is FLOW_CONTRL_FREE.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe parameter need be set to FLOW_CONTRL_FREE for SRB signaling, IMS signaling, andsuch low streaming service.

The parameter need be set to FLOW_CONTRL_DYNAMIC for streaming service and BEservice.

Related CommandsUse SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query FCA.

11.3.6 CQI Adjust Algorithm SwitchThis describes the switch of CQI adjust algorithm.

IDCQIADJA

Value RangeCQI_ADJ_BY_IBLER, CQI_ADJ_BY_RBLER, NO_CQI_ADJ

Physical ScopeAdjusted CQI by IBLER, Adjusted CQI by RBLER, Do not use CQI adjust algorithm.

SettingThe default value of is NO_CQI_ADJ.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIt is recommended to use the default value.

Related CommandsUse SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query CQIADJA.

11.3.7 Residual BLER Target ValueThis describes the residual BLER target value when setting outer loop control.

IDRBLERTARGET





Value Range1 to 50

Physical Scope1 to 50%, with the step of 1%

SettingNone.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter works only when the CQIADJA is set to CQI_ADJ_BY_RBLER.

This parameter is set according to QoS requirements. If it is set too high, the residual BLER islarge. If it is set too small, that will make the air interface transmission ratio be too small.

Related CommandsUse SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RBLERTARGET.

11.3.8 Maximum Number of Retransmission AttemptsThis describes the maximum of retransmission attempts in the HSDPA outer loop power controlprocedure.

IDMAXRETRANS

Value Range0 to 10


SettingWhen the SPI is 13, The default value is 2.

For other SPI value, The default value is 4.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe parameter is set according to QoS requirements. If it's set too large, the traffic delay is toolong.

For the time delay sensitive services such as VoIP, it is recommended to set the parameter to 2.For other services such as BE, it is recommended to set the parameter to 4.



11-19

Related CommandsUse SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query MAXRETRANS.

11.4 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm ParametersThis describes the HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified bynetwork planners on the NodeB LMT.

Table 11-4 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command

1 SCHEDULEPARA

Set the MAC-e parametersor not.

YES Set: SETMACEPARA(BTS3836, BTS3836A,BBU3836) Query: LSTMACEPARA(BTS3836, BTS3836A,BBU3836).

2 GBREnable If the switch is on, thescheduling algorithmensures the GBR rate forGBR subscribers withoutconsidering the uplink load.

Enabled

11.4.1 MAC-e Schedule Parameters SwitchThis parameter indicates whether to set the MAC-e schedule parameters or not.

11.4.2 GBR Scheduling SwitchThis describes the GBR scheduling switch. If the switch is on, whether the user real rate is GBRrate needs to be affirmed during the GBR user scheduling. The scheduling algorithm ensuresthe GBR rate for GBR users without consideration of the uplink load.

11.4.1 MAC-e Schedule Parameters SwitchThis parameter indicates whether to set the MAC-e schedule parameters or not.

IDSCHEDULEPARA

Value RangeNO, YES

Physical ScopeNone.





SettingThe default value is YES.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe parameter should be set YES when need to change the MAC-e parameters.

Related CommandsUse SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RAVGINITVALUE.

11.4.2 GBR Scheduling SwitchThis describes the GBR scheduling switch. If the switch is on, whether the user real rate is GBRrate needs to be affirmed during the GBR user scheduling. The scheduling algorithm ensuresthe GBR rate for GBR users without consideration of the uplink load.

IDGBRENABLE

Value RangeOPEN, CLOSE

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingThe default value is OPEN.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the GBR scheduling switch is set to OPEN, the RNC overload control needs to be configuredas an action which can be triggered by the RTWP measurement value.

Related CommandsUse SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query GBRENABLE.

11.5 HSUPA Power Control ParametersThis describes the HSUPA power control parameters: the power control algorithm switches fordownlink control channel, fixed power control mode algorithm parameters, and dynamic powercontrol mode algorithm parameters.

11.5.1 Power Control Algorithm Switches for the Downlink Control Channel



11-21

This describes the HSUPA power control algorithm switches for downlink control channel thatcan be modified by network planners.

11.5.2 Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm ParametersThis describes the fixed power control mode algorithm parameters that can be modified bynetwork planners.

11.5.1 Power Control Algorithm Switches for the Downlink ControlChannel

This describes the HSUPA power control algorithm switches for downlink control channel thatcan be modified by network planners.

Table 11-5 List of power control algorithm switches for the downlink control channel

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 EAGCHPCMOD

E-AGCH HPC mode FIXED Set: SETMACEPARA(BTS3836,BTS3836A,BBU3836)Query: LSTMACHSPARA(BTS3836,BTS3836A,BBU3836).

Cell

2 SERGCHPCMOD

E-RGCH HPC mode forEDCH serving radiolinks

FIXED

3 NSERGCHPCMOD

E-RGCH HPC mode forEDCH non-serving radiolinks

FIXED

4 SEHICHPCMOD

E-HICH HPC mode forserving radio links

FIXED

5 NSEHICHPCMOD

E-HICH HPC mode fornon-serving radio links

FIXED

11.5.1.1 E-AGCH HPC ModeThis describes the E-AGCH power control algorithm switch. If the switch is set to FIXED, thetransmit power is set according to the P-CPICH power and fixed power offset. If the switch isset to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power of the UE.

11.5.1.2 E-RGCH HPC Mode for Service Radio LinksThis describes the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH serving RLS. If the switchis set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power and fixed poweroffset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH powerof the UE.

11.5.1.3 E-RGCH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links





This describes the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH non-serving RLS. If theswitch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power and fixedpower offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCHpower of the UE.

11.5.1.4 E-HICH HPC Mode for Service Radio LinksThis describes the HICH power control algorithm switch of the RLS that contains serving RL.If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power andfixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to theDCH power of the UE.

11.5.1.5 E-HICH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio LinksThis describes the HICH power control algorithm switch of the RLS that does not contain servingRL. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH powerand fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set accordingto the DCH power of the UE.

E-AGCH HPC Mode

This describes the E-AGCH power control algorithm switch. If the switch is set to FIXED, thetransmit power is set according to the P-CPICH power and fixed power offset. If the switch isset to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power of the UE.

ID

EAGCHPCMOD

Value Range

FIXED, DYNAMIC

Physical Scope

None.

Setting

The HSUPA parameters have not been optimized, so the recommended value ofEAGCHPCMOD is FIXED.


Fixed power control mode can be easily implemented, but it may waste NodeB transmissionpower. If dynamic power control mode is used, the power utilization is more efficient. But if theparameter is set unreasonably, it may lead to power waste or the demodulation requirement maynot be satisfied.

Related Commands

Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query EAGCHPCMOD.



11-23

E-RGCH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links

This describes the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH serving RLS. If the switchis set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power and fixed poweroffset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH powerof the UE.

ID

SERGCHPCMOD

Value Range

FIXED, DYNAMIC

Physical Scope

None.

Setting

The HSUPA parameters have not been optimized, so the recommended value ofSERGCHPCMOD is FIXED.


Fixed power control mode can be easily implemented, but it may waste NodeB transmit power.If dynamic power control mode is used, the power utilization is more efficient. But if theparameter is set unreasonably, it may lead to power waste or the demodulation requirement maynot be satisfied.

Related Commands

Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SERGCHPCMOD.

E-RGCH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links

This describes the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH non-serving RLS. If theswitch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power and fixedpower offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCHpower of the UE.

ID

NSERGCHPCMOD

Value Range

FIXED, DYNAMIC





Physical Scope

None.

Setting

The HSUPA parameters have not been optimized, so the recommended value ofNSERGCHPCMOD is FIXED.



Related Commands

Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query NSERGCHPCMOD.

E-HICH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links

This describes the HICH power control algorithm switch of the RLS that contains serving RL.If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power andfixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to theDCH power of the UE.

ID

SEHICHPCMOD

Value Range

FIXED, DYNAMIC

Physical Scope

None.

Setting

The HSUPA parameters have not been optimized, so the recommended value ofSEHICHPCMOD is FIXED.





11-25

Related CommandsUse SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SEHICHPCMOD.

E-HICH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio LinksThis describes the HICH power control algorithm switch of the RLS that does not contain servingRL. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH powerand fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set accordingto the DCH power of the UE.

IDNSEHICHPCMOD

Value RangeFIXED, DYNAMIC

Physical ScopeNone.

SettingThe HSUPA parameters have not been optimized, so the recommended value ofNSEHICHPCMOD is FIXED.

Impact on the Network PerformanceFixed power control mode can be easily implemented, but it may waste NodeB transmit power.If dynamic power control mode is used, the power utilization is more efficient. But if theparameter is set unreasonably, it may lead to power waste or the demodulation requirement maynot be satisfied.

Related CommandsUse SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query NSEHICHPCMOD.

11.5.2 Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm ParametersThis describes the fixed power control mode algorithm parameters that can be modified bynetwork planners.





Table 11-6 List of fixed power control mode algorithm parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command Level

1 EAGCHPOWER

E-AGCH power -92,namely –9.2 dB

Set:SET MACEPARA(BTS3836,BTS3836A,BBU3836)Query:LST MACEPARA(BTS3836,BTS3836A,BBU3836).

Cell

2 SERGCHPOWER

E-RGCH power forserving RLS

-200,namely –20 dB

3 NSERGCHPOWER

E-RGCH power for non-serving RLS

–163,namely –16.3 dB

4 SEHICHPOWER

E-HICH power forserving radio links

–192,namely –19.2 dB

5 NSEHICHPOWER

E-HICH power for non-serving radio links

–100,namely –10 dB

11.5.2.1 E-AGCH PowerThis parameter is the AGCH power offset relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power controlmode.

11.5.2.2 E-RGCH Power for Service Radio LinksThis describes the RGCH power offset relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power controlmode.

11.5.2.4 E-HICH Power for Service Radio LinksThis describes the power offset of the HICH in the RLS that contains serving radio links relativeto the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.

11.5.2.5 E-HICH Power for Non-service Radio LinksThis describes the power offset of the HICH in the RLS that does not contain serving radio linksrelative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.

E-AGCH PowerThis parameter is the AGCH power offset relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power controlmode.



11-27

IDEAGCHPOWER



SettingThe default value is –92, namely –9.2 dB.

Impact on the Network Performancel If EAGCHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of AGCH channel

cannot satisfy the demodulation requirement.l If EAGCHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.

Related CommandsUse SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query EAGCHPOWER.

E-RGCH Power for Service Radio LinksThis describes the RGCH power offset relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power controlmode.

IDSERGCHPOWER




Impact on the Network Performancel If SERGCHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of the RGCH

cannot satisfy the demodulation requirement.





l If SERGCHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.

Related CommandsUse SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SERGCHPOWER.

E-RGCH Power for Non-service Radio LinksThis describes the power offset of the RGCH for non-serving RLS relative to the P-CPICHpower in fixed power control mode.

IDNSERGCHPOWER



SettingThe default value is –163, namely –16.3 dB.

Impact on the Network Performancel If NSERGCHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of the RGCH

cannot satisfy the demodulation requirement.l If NSERGCHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.

Related CommandsUse SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query NSERGCHPOWER.

E-HICH Power for Service Radio LinksThis describes the power offset of the HICH in the RLS that contains serving radio links relativeto the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.

IDSEHICHPOWER




11-29

Physical Scope


Setting

The default value is –192, namely –19.2 dB.


l If SEHICHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of the RGCHcannot satisfy the demodulation requirement.

l If SEHICHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.

Related Commands

Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SEHICHPOWER.

E-HICH Power for Non-service Radio Links

This describes the power offset of the HICH in the RLS that does not contain serving radio linksrelative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.

ID

NSEHICHPOWER

Value Range

–350 to 150

Physical Scope


Setting

The default value is –100, namely –10 dB.


l If NSEHICHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of the RGCHcannot satisfy the demodulation requirement.

l If NSEHICHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.

Related Commands

Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LSTMACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query NSEHICHPOWER.





11.6 Local Cell Management ParametersThis describes the local cell management parameters: cell radius and cell handover radius.

Table 11-7 List of local cell management parameters

SerialNo.


MML Command

1 RADIUS Cell radius 29 km Set:MOD LOCELL (BTS3836,BTS3836A, BBU3836)Query:LST LOCELL (BTS3836,BTS3836A, BBU3836)

2 HORAD Cell handoverradius

0 m

11.6.1 Cell RadiusThis describes the radius of a NodeB cell. The cell radius affects the demodulation of the uplinkboard and the configuration of the parameters related to the access part.

11.6.2 Cell Handover RadiusThis describes the cell handover radius, which can be configured on the NodeB LMT.

11.6.1 Cell RadiusThis describes the radius of a NodeB cell. The cell radius affects the demodulation of the uplinkboard and the configuration of the parameters related to the access part.

IDRADIUS


Physical Scope150 m to 180 km, with the step of 1 m

SettingThe default value is 29000, namely 29 km.



11-31

You can set and adjust the cell radius based on the network planning and network optimizationresult. In case that the cell radius cannot be determined precisely, ensure that the set cell radiusis bigger than the required cell radius. If the configured cell radius exceeds the required cellradius too much, the processing resource, however, is wasted and the processing delay increases.Based on the data provided by relevant products, the handover synchronization time increasesby a maximum of 60 ms if the cell radius changes its value in increments of 3.75 km. If the setvalue has a big difference from the actual value, the handover success rate may be affected.

CAUTIONl When using the RRU, you must set the sum of the cell radius and the fiber transmission

delay as the cell radius.l If the access board of the NodeB is configured to support multiple sectors, the maximum

configurable cell radius is 30 km.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe setting of the cell radius must be the same as the result of network planning.

Related CommandsUse MOD LOCELL (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST LOCELL(BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RADIUS.

11.6.2 Cell Handover RadiusThis describes the cell handover radius, which can be configured on the NodeB LMT.

IDHORAD


Physical Scope0 m to 180 km, with the step of 1 m

SettingThe default value is 0. The inner radius of a cell handover radius must be at least 78.125 m, thatis, 1 chip, shorter than the cell radius.

You can set and adjust the cell handover radius based on the network planning and networkoptimization result. In case that the cell handover radius cannot be determined precisely, ensurethat the set cell handover radius is not bigger than the minimum cell handover radius requiredby the network planning. If the configured cell handover radius is muchly smaller than therequired cell handover radius, the processing delay, however, increases.





CAUTIONWhen using the RRU, you must set the cell handover radius to the sum of the actual cell handoverradius and the fiber transmission delay.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the cell handover radius is beyond the cell handover scope that is determined by networkplanning, the NodeB cannot process the subscribers within the distance defined by the cellhandover radius, and the actual handover scope is smaller than the scope determined by networkplanning.

Related CommandsUse MOD LOCELL (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST LOCELL(BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query HORAD.



11-33

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference(RAN10.0_01)

Documents